Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPermit D08-317 - AT&T - TENANT IMPROVEMENTLTE° ou Ad WILLNaDHJnOS TV9T ,L'B,I.V Parcel No.: 5379200290 Address: 16415 SOUTHCENTER PY TUKW Suite No: Tenant: Name: AT & T Address: 16415 SOUTHCENTER PY , TUKVVILA WA CityllIf Tukwila � Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206- 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us DEVELOPMENT PERMIT Owner: Name: ARGUS GROUP LTD Address: C/O METROVATION , 225 108TH AVE NE #520 98004 Phone: Contact Person: Name: SAMSON HU Address: 4 HUTTON CENTRE DR, SUITE 800 , SANTA ANA CA 92707 Phone: 714- 327 -4203 Contractor: Name: C B BOVENKAMP Address: 9002 SW 152ND ST , MIAMI FL 331157 Phone: Contractor License No: CBBOVI *006D8 Permit Number: D08 -317 Issue Date: 08/07/2008 Permit Expires On: 02/03/2009 Expiration Date: 08/30/2009 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: INSTALL NON - STRUCTURAL PARTITIONS, FREESTANDING - MODIFY RESTROOM. REMOVE AND RELOCATE CEILING FIXGTURE AND NO CHANGE TO BUILDING EXTERIOR. Value of Construction: $65,000.00 Fees Collected: $1,591.80 Type of Fire Protection: International Building Code Edition: 2006 Type of Construction: VB Occupancy per IBC: doc: IBC -10/06 * *continued on next page ** D08 -317 Printed: 08-07 -2008 Public Works Activities: Channelization / Striping: N Curb Cut / Access / Sidewalk / CSS: N Fire Loop Hydrant: N Number: 0 Size (Inches): 0 Flood Control Zone: Hauling: N Start Time: End Time: Land Altering: Volumes: Cut 0 c.y. Fill 0 c.y. Landscape Irrigation: Moving Oversize Load: Start Time: End Time: Sanitary Side Sewer: Sewer Main Extension: Private: Public: Storm Drainage: Street Use: Profit: N Non- Profit: N Water Main Extension: Water Meter: N Permit Center Authorized Signature: [A-);(11-1--95-1--'L The granting of this pe ' t does not construction or the pe; ormance o doc: IBC -10/06 City i Tukwila 0 Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206- 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Private: Public: Permit Number: D08 -317 Issue Date: 08/07/2008 Permit Expires On: 02/03/2009 Date: I hereby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. thority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating ed to sign and obtain this development permit. _ pg Signature: v2 % /I/� Date: - Print Name: 4.0/5d This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. D08 -317 Printed: 08-07 -2008 Parcel No.: 5379200290 Address: 16415 SOUTHCENTER PY TUKW Suite No: Tenant: AT & T 1: ** *BUILDING DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS * ** City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 -431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us PERMIT CONDITIONS Permit Number: D08 -317 Status: ISSUED Applied Date: 06/09/2008 Issue Date: 08/07/2008 2: No changes shall be made to the approved plans unless approved by the design professional in responsible charge and the Building Official. 3: All mechanical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center (206/431- 3670). 4: All permits, inspection records, and approved plans shall be at the job site and available to the inspectors prior to start of any construction. These documents shall be maintained and made available until final inspection approval is granted. 5: New suspended ceiling grid and light fixture installations shall meet the non - building structures seismic design requirements of ASCE 7. 6: Partition walls that are tied to the ceiling and all partitions greater than 6 feet in height shall be laterally braced to the building structure. 7: All construction shall be done in conformance with the approved plans and the requirements of the International Building Code or International Residential Code, International Mechanical Code, Washington State Energy Code. 8: All rack storage requires a separate permit issued through the City of Tukwila Permit Center. Rack storage over 8 -feet in height shall be anchored or braced to prevent overturning or displacement during seismic events. The design and calculations for the anchorage or bracing shall be prepared by a registered professional engineer licensed in the State of Washington. 9: There shall be no occupancy of a building until final inspection has been completed and approved by Tukwila building inspector. No exception. 10: Remove all demolition rubble and loose miscellaneous material from lot or parcel of ground, properly cap the sanitary sewer connections, and properly fill or otherwise protect all basements, cellars, septic tanks, wells, and other excavations. Final inspection approval will be determined by the building inspector based on satisfactory completion of this requirement. 11: All plumbing and gas piping work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the Cityof Tukwila Permit Center. 12: All electrical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206 - 431 -3670). 13: VALIDITY OF PERMIT: The issuance or granting of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinances of the City of Tukwila. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of the code or other ordinances of the City of Tukwila shall not be valid. The issuance of a permit based on construction documents and other data shall not prevent the Building Official from requiring the correction of errors in the construction documents and other data. doc: Cond -10/06 D08 -317 Printed: 08-07 -2008 14: ** *FIRE DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS * ** City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 -431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http :• / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us 15: The attached set of building plans have been reviewed by the Fire Prevention Bureau and are acceptable with the following concerns: 16: Maintain fire extinguisher coverage throughout. 17: Portable fire extinguishers, not housed in cabinets, shall be installed on the hangers or brackets supplied. Hangers or brackets shall be securely anchored to the mounting surface in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 5 feet (1524 mm) above the floor. Hand -held portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 3.5 feet (1067 mm) above the floor. The clearance between the floor and the bottom of the installed hand -held extinguishers shall not be less than 4 inches (102 mm). (IFC 906.7 and IFC 906.9) 18: Fire extinguishers shall not be obstructed or obscured from view. In rooms or areas in which visual obstruction cannot be completely avoided, means shall be provided to indicate the locations of the extinguishers. (IFC 906.6) 19: Extinguishers shall be located in conspicuous locations where they will be readily accessible and immediately available for use. These locations shall be along normal paths of travel, unless the fire code official determines that the hazard posed indicates the need for placement away from normal paths of travel. (IFC 906.5) 20: Doors shall swing in direction of egress travel where serving an occupant load of 50 or more persons or a Group H occupancy. (1FC 1008.1.2) 21: Egress doors shall be readily openable from the egress side without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. (IFC 1008.1.8.3 subsection 2.2) 22: Dead bolts are not allowed on auxiliary exit doors unless the dead bolt is automatically retracted when the door handle is engaged from inside the tenant space. (IFC Chapter 10) 23: Exit hardware and marking shall meet the requirements of the International Fire Code. (IFC Chapter 10) 24: Aisles leading to required exits shall be provided from all portions of the building and the required width of the aisles shall be unobstructed. (IFC 1013.4) 25: Means of egress, including the exit discharge, shall be illuminated at all times the building space served by the means of egress is occupied. The means of egress illumination level shall not be less than 1 foot -candle (11 lux) at the floor level. The power supply for the means of egress illumination shall normally be provided by the premise's electrical supply. In event of a power failure an emergency power system shall provide power for a duration of not less than 90 minutes and shall consist of storage batteries, unit equipment or on -site generator. (IFC 1006.1, 1006.2, 1006.3) 26: Maintain automatic fire detector coverage per N.F.P.A. 72. Addition/relocation of walls, closets or partitions may require relocating and/or adding automatic fire detectors. 27: Maintain square foot coverage of detectors per manufacturer's specifications in all areas including: closets, elevator shafts, top of stairwells, etc. (NFPA 72- 5.5.2.1) 28: Local U.L. central station supervision is required. (City Ordinance #2051) 29: Remote indicator lights are required on all above ceiling smoke detectors. (City Ordinance #2051) 30: All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #2051) (IFC doc: Cond -10/06 D08 -317 Printed: 08-07 -2008 104.2) ® 0 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us 31: Call the Tukwila Fire Department at 206/575 -4407 for approval of any system shut down. Have job site address, name and the Tukwila Fire Department Job Number available to confirm shut down approval. (City Ordinance #2051) 32: All electrical work and equipment shall conform strictly to the standards of the National Electrical Code. (NFPA 70) 33: An aisle to and working space shall be provided for each electrical panel. An aisle width not less than 24 inches shall provide access to the panel and 30 inches of working space shall be provided directly in front of the panel. (NEC 110.26(A) thru F(2)) 34: Each circuit breaker shall be legibly marked to indicate it's purpose. (NEC 110 -22) 35: Required fire resistive construction, including occupancy separations, area separation walls, exterior walls due to location on property, fire resistive requirements based on type of construction, draft stop partitions and roof coverings shall be maintained as specified in the Building Code and Fire Code and shall be properly repaired, restored or replaced when damaged, altered, breached, penetrated, removed or improperly installed. (IFC 703.1) 36: New and existing buildings shall have approved address numbers, building numbers or approved building identification placed in a position that is plainly legible and visible from the street or road fronting the property. These numbers shall contrast with their background. Address numbers shall be Arabic numbers or alphabet letters. Numbers shall be a minimum of 4 inches (102mm) high with a minimum stroke width of 0.5 inch (12.7mm). (IFC 505.1) 37: This review limited to speculative tenant space only - special fire permits may be necessary depending on detailed description of intended use. 38: Any overlooked hazardous condition and/or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. 39: These plans were reviewed by Inspector 0700. If you have any questions, please call Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau at (206)575 -4407. doc: Cond -10/06 * *continued on next page ** D08 -317 Printed: 08-07 -2008 Signature: Print Name: City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 -431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us I hereby certify that I have read these conditions and will comply with them as outlined. All provisions of law and this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit • oes not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provision of any other work construction or the perfo ce of work. C— `ir>,(7E,5tcJ doc: Cond -10/06 D08 -317 Date: f ordinances governing or local laws regulating Printed: 08-07 -2008 SITE LOCATION King Co Assessor's Tax No.: Site Address: l G . i * .0011114 ‘Arc- jt 0�,,. tale/tdey Tenant Name: ,A'1 1 Property Owners Name: Mailing Address: Name: Company Name: Mailing Address: Contact Person: E -Mail Address: Contractor Registration Number: Company Name: Mailing Address: Contact Person: Contact Person: E -Mail Address: CITY OF TUKWILA Community Development Department Public Works Department Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd. Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Gnag:Me. •\14,AALs Q:\Applications\Porms- Applications On Line \3 -2006 - Permit Application.doc Revised: 9 -2006 bh t Building Permit No. Mechanical Permit No. Plumbng/Gs Permit No. Public Works Permit No, Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. * *Please Print* * i�a/1 &ate Suite Number: City State State State Floor: New Tenant: .... Yes Zip on CONTACT PER SON " = who do we et when your permit is ready to be issued �jAlt/l D1-.1 _ Day Telephone: Mailing Address: 4 -t `hr- , j Vv. efir ? ff e �} eI . .cfZ7D7 City State t Zi E -Mail Address: 4A 151-4 . &kI' et,2 JA *g* , t! iM Fax Number: GENERAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION — (Contractor Information for Mechanical (pg 4) for Plumbing and Gas Piping (pg 5) City Day Telephone: Fax Number: Expiration Date: Zip ARCHITECT. OF i s must be et of Record City Day Telephone: "11. E -Mail Address: 14-1 Nl `'eD Cjal/i Fax Number: 0 ENGINEER OF RECO All: p lans riiust be get stamped by En Company Name: Mailing Address: City Day Telephone: Fax Number: Zip Page 1 of 6 BUILDING PERMIT INFORM ION 206- 431 -3670 Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): Will there be new rack storage? E.... Yes Provide All Building Areas in Square Footage Below I' Floor 2n° Floo Floor Floors tl ru Basement Accessory Structur Attached arage Detached Gara Detached Carport! Covered'Decl Uncovered Deck Addition to Existing Structure Type of truction per V, t4 Type of Occupancy per IBC M PLANNING DIVISION: Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches) *For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following: Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling: *Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence. Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard: Q:\Applications\Forms- Applications On Line'3 -2006 - Permit Application.doc Revised: 9 -2006 bh Existing Building Valuation: $ NevrAt.t. + 46 j rf' t wZ li .. No If yes, a separate permit and plan submittal will be required. Compact: Handicap: Will there be a change in use? ❑ Yes ❑ No If "yes ", explain: FIRE PROTECTION/HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: ❑ Sprinklers ❑ Automatic Fire Alarm ❑ None ❑ Other (specify) Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? ❑ Yes ❑ No If `yes', attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8 - 1/2" x 1I " paper including quantities and Material Safety Data Sheets. SEPTIC SYSTEM ❑ On -site Septic System — For on -site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. Page 2 of 6 BUILDING OWNER OR AUTHORIZED AGENT: Signature: Print Name: Mailing Address: 15:14`Cril.1 . G- ye. Date Application Accepted: Q:\Applications\Forms- Applications On Line \3 -2006 - Permit Application.doc Revised: 9 -2006 bh PERMIT APPLICATION NOT — Applicable to all permits in this application Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review — Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. Building and Mechanical Permit The Building Official may grant one or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding 90 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 105.3.2 International Building Code (current edition). Plumbing Permit The Building Official may grant one extension of time for an additional period not exceeding 180 days. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 103.4.3 Uniform Plumbing Code (current edition). I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. Day Telephone: 1'1 it Date: 0/iie State Date Application Expires: Staff Initjts Page 6 of 6 Fixture Type: Qty Fixture Type: •' Fixture Type Qt Fixture Type: Qty Bathtub or combination bath /shower Drinking fountain or war cooler (per head) Wash fountain Gas piping outlets Bidet Food -waste grinder, / commercial / l Receptor, indirect aste Clothes washer, domestic Floor drain Si,ks Dental unit, cuspidor Shower, single}ead trap Uri is Dishwasher, domestic, with independent drain Lavatory / / Wate Closet Building sewer or trailer park sewer Rain wate system — per drain (in tde building) Water hea -r and/or vent Additional medical gas inlets /outlets — six or more Industrial waste pretreatment interceptor, including its trap and vent, except for kitchen type grease interceptors Repair alteration of water pipin and /or water treating equ' ment Repair or alter 'on of drainage or ve piping Medical gas piping system serving one to five inlets /outlets for specific gas PLUMBING AND GAS PIPIN(.3 _ ERMIT INFORMATION - 206 - 431 . X70 PLUMBING AND GAS PIPING CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company Name: Mailing Address: Contact Person: E -Mail Address: Contractor Registration Num r: Valuation of Plumbing work (con . ctor's bid price): $ Valuation of Gas Piping work (contra, tor's bid price): $ Scope of Work (please provide detailed i ormation): Building Use (per Int'1 Building Code): Occupancy (per Int'I Building Code): Utility Purveyor: Water: Indicate type of plumbing fixtures and /or gas piping outlets Q:\Applications\Forms- Applications On Line \3 -2006 - Permit Application.doc Revised: 9 -2006 bh / Sewer: ing installed and the quantity below: City Sae Zip Day Telephone: Fax Number: Expiration Date: Page 5 of 6 Parcel No.: 5379200290 Permit Number: D08 -317 Address: 16415 SOUTHCENTER PY TUKW Status: APPROVED Suite No: Applied Date: 06/09/2008 Applicant: AT & T Issue Date: Receipt No.: R08 -02872 Initials: WER Payment Date: User ID: 1655 Balance: Payee: CB BOVENKAMP TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Descriptio Amount doc: Receiot -06 Payment Check 43150 966.50 ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description BUILDING - NONRES STATE BUILDING SURCHARGE City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 -431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http://www.citukwila.wa.us Account Code Current Pmts 000/322.100 000/386.904 RECEIPT Payment Amount: $966.50 962.00 4.50 Total: $966.50 08/07/2008 11:57 AM $0.00 5798 08/07 9710 TOTAL 966.50 Printed: 08 -07 -2008 Don: REC.SETS -AB RECEIPT NO: R08 -02036 Initials: BLH User ID: ADMIN Payee: SAMSON HU SET ID: S000001047 SET NAME: 'Imp set/Initialized Activities SET TRANSACTIONS: Set Member Amount D08 -317 625.30 TOTAL: 625.30 Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: //wrvw. ci. tukwila. wa. us TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Description Amount Payment Check 296 625.30 TOTAL: 625.30 ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description PLAN CHECK - NONRES City of Tukwila SET RECEIPT Payment Date: 06/09/2008 Total Payment: 625.30 Account Code Current Pmts 000/345.830 TOTAL: 625.30 625.30 3419 06/09 9711 TOTAL 625.30 Project: Type of Inspection: Address: / (q /5 ,/ °. 0 1 Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: U a --/ S- p.m. Requester: Phone No: 3 o S- .582 r7 ?,0 . ri $6 E .00 p d a recei 6.06 3/7 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 1 22 . -- 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431- Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COPRAENTS: INSPECTION FEE R • IRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be 300 Southcenter Blvd uite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Date: Project 4 - 7 -- Type of Inspection: A �� , /' Address: /(dISSC ,4r 4- Date Called: Special instructions: / / Date Wanted: a r --6 p.m. 6 Requester: f Phone 0 5 J -5 I t s - Co -J;f INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 Approved per applicable codes. ❑ Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: nspector(. j) rate 2 — Q EJ $60.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. 1Receipt No.: 'Date: Proje. Type of pection: P'a A4 J Address: '' ( ito i5 1e � A / K r---% ^r---% Date Called: 7 Special Instructions: ../. Date Wanted: � a,cp. -23 - o � p.m. Requester: Phone No:,, 3os —Sf 2 —`73 Da-3 vrl INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. ❑ $60.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: 'Date: Project: i Type of Inspecction: Address: - Suite #: ',,, • l Contact Person: Special Instructions: Hood & Duct: Phone No.: Monitor: Needs Shift Inspection: ;' Sprinklers: - Fire Alarm: ;' Hood & Duct: Monitor: 046.4tuke A( iz . e.00 Pre -Fire: ti It Permits: Occupancy Type: Iv'\ . NC3' INSPECTION NUMBER II - Approved per applicabte codes. CITY OF TUKIAIILA FIRE DEPARTMENT INSPECTION •RECORD Retain a copy with permit Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc 1/13/06 .a 0: • PERMIT NUMBERS 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206 - 575 -4407 LI Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: • 4 . A Inspector: S i �l • I Date: 2.1 / V . • 1 Hrs.: � • $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from e City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 Project.- ,_ 1 Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: T of Inspection: ' Ad s ress: ' 4,(,J' Suite #: 4 . f S. C K 4, 1 . 1 Contact Person: Special Instructions: Phone No.: '° Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: ' Monitor: Pre- Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: - �il �"% �, �' ywa*? n�' �+ �Y': wy+ ��arae' ��r1 a:. k±'�.,ae„�rr:..ak.t.!5�r- :2e��: r�n.��".'rv_ x.,�.r+,K,.4'ma � +u.a!: tiG•�..'S:xn4t. � a INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECT-I-ON RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TU FIRE DEPARTMENT 0 PERMIT ''NUMBERS 444 Andover Park East; Tukwila; Wa: 98188 206 -575 =4407 Approved per applicable codes. Word /Inspecdor .:R and Form.Doc ». 1/13/06 Corrections required prior to approval: COMMENTS: Inipecto c/c/ .Date: L Hrs.: $80.00 REIINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an. .invoice from c d e City of Tukwila Finance Department. CaII to schedule a reinspection. T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 01 -02 -2009 SAMSON HU 4 HUTTON CENTRE DR, SUITE 800 SANTA ANA CA 92707 Dear Permit Holder: RE: Permit No. D08 -317 16415 SOUTHCENTER PY TUKW Jim Haggerton, Mayor Department of Community Development Jack Pace, Director In reviewing our current records the above noted permit has not received a final inspection by the City of Tukwila Building Division. Per the International Building Code and/or the International Mechanical Code, every permit issued by the Building Division under the provisions of this code shall expire by limitation and become null and void if the building or work authorized by such permit is not commenced within 180 days from the date of such permit, or if the building or work authorized by such permit is suspended or abandoned at any time after the work is commenced for a period of 180 days. Based on the above, you are hereby advised to: Call the City of Tukwila inspection Request Line at 206 - 431 -2451 to schedule for the next or final inspection. This inspection is intended to determine if substantial work has been accomplished since issuance of the permit or last inspection; or if the project should be considered abandoned. If such determination is made, the Building Code does allow the Building Official to approve one or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding 90 days each. Extension requests must be in writing and provide satisfactory reasons why circumstances beyond the applicants control have prevented action from being taken. In the event you do not call for the above inspection and receive an extension prior to 02/03/2009 , your permit will become null and void and any further work on the project will require a new permit and associated fees. Thank you for your cooperation in this matter. Sincerely, xc: fer Marshall, 't Technician Permit File No. D08 -317 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206- 431 -3670 • Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 PERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D08 -317 PROJECT NAME: AT & T SITE ADDRESS: 16415 SOUTHCENTER PY X Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Letter # DATE: 6 -9 -08 Response to Incomplete Letter # Revision # After Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: 06 B it ng ivlsion (v/k orks DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Documents/routing slip.doc 2 -28-02 Pfe Prevei1tioln Structural Incomplete ❑ DATE: DATE: Pin 4 vi on Permit Coordinator ❑ DUE DATE: 6 -10 -08 Not Applicable Comments: Permit Centerlise Only .. INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: TUES/THURS R UTING: Please Route 1 Structural Review Required No further Review Required ❑ uired q REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DUE DATE: 7 -8-08 Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions Not Approved (attach comments) ❑ Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: Bond Bond Company Name Bond Account Number Effective Date Expiration Date Cancel Date Impaired Date Bond Amount Received Date 2 FIDELITY Et DEPOSIT CO OF MD 08473969 08/30/2001 Until Cancelled $12,000.00 08/30/2001 1 FIDELITY DEPOSIT COMPANIES MD 08473969 03/24/200008/30/2001 $6,000.00 Name Role Effective Date Expiration Date BOVENKAMP, ESTHER 01/01/1980 BOVENKAMP, GERALD 01/01/1980 Untitled Page General /Specialty Contractor A business registered as a construction contractor with LEtI to perform construction work within the scope of its specialty. A General or Specialty construction Contractor must maintain a surety bond or assignment of account and carry general liability insurance. C B BOVENKAMP INC Business and Licensing Information Name Phone Address Suite /Apt. City State Zip County Business Type Parent Company Bond Information 0 C B BOVENKAMP INC 3052334438 9002 SW 152ND ST MIAMI FL 33157 OUT OF STATE CORPORATION Business Owner Information UBI No. Status License No. License Type Effective Date Expiration Date Suspend Date Separation Date Previous License Next License Associated License Specialty 1 Specialty 2 601998279 GENERAL UNUSED https: / /fortress.wa. gov /lni/bbip/Detail. aspx ?License= CBBOVI* 006D 8 0 ACTIVE CBBOVI*006D8 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR 3/28/2000 8/30/2009 Page 1 of 2 08/07/2008 SEPARATE PERMIT REQUIRED FOR: Mechanical ly Electrical Iumbing Bld Gas Piping City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION By i --- ____ . __ RD.riSiONS No changes shall be rnari to the scope of work without prior approval of Tukwila Building Division. NOTE: Revisions will require a new plan suhrri al ' and may include additional plan revi2' to _ F r COPY Permit No R E V I E W E D C O M P L I A N C E APPROVE SUN 1 6 MB ty Of 110 BUilici FRII.SON 122L-3a PI . r revisw approval is subject to errors and omissions. Approval 01 construction documents does not authorize the violation of any adopted cod h or ordinance. Pei 1pt ✓F 4 a t �s 0. c a'?�''Igad: approved Fiel•x Copy and a i Date: City of Tukwila BUILDING 01,91 ,9ICN COPYRIGHT ® 2009 CARTER & BURGESS. �lC. at &t Carter:Burgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (714) 327 -1600 FAX: (714) 327-1601 - 06 -05 -08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT NO. 16415 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 DRAWN BY: DATE sEcm o ISSUES /REVISIONS DESIGNED BY: CHECKED BY: PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE: COVER SHEET DESCRIPTION APPROVED BY: 444017.011.037.0001 NONE tOb3 i A -000 ABBREVIATIONS AC ACC ACOUS ACT AD ADDM ADJ AFF AHU ALT ALUM ANOD APPROX APT ARCH AUTO AV BB BD BLDG BLKG BO BOT BRG BRZ BSMT BUR CAB CB CEM CER CFLG CG CH CI CIP CL CLG CLO CLR CMU CO COL COMM CONC D DEEP DOUBLE DOUBLE DEMO DET DF DIA DIAG DIM DIV DMPF DN DR DS DW DWG DWR EIFS EJ EL ELEC ELEV ENCL EP EQ EQUIP ESCAL EXH EXP EXIST EXT FA FCIC FD FDC FE FEC FH FHC FIG FIN FLEX FIR FLUOR FO FOIC FOIV FP FR FRMG FRPF F FTG FUT FVC FWC GA GC GALV GEN GFRC GFRG GFRP GL GYP GYP BD H HB HC HD HDBD HDW HDWD HM HO HORIZ HR HT HVAC ASPHALTIC CONCRETE ACCESSIBLE ACOUSTICAL ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE AREA DRAIN ADDENDUM ADJUSTABLE ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AIR HANDLING UNIT ALTERNATE ALUMINUM ANODIZED APPROXIMATE APARTMENT ARCHITECT, ARCHITECTURAL AUTOMATIC AUDIO VISUAL BULLETIN BOARD BOARD BUILDING BLOCKING BOTTOM OF BOTTOM BEARING BRONZE BASEMENT BUILT UP ROOFING CABINET CATCH BASIN CEMENT, CEMENTTf1OUS CERAMIC COUNTERFLASHING CORNER GUARD COAT HOOK CAST IRON CAST -IN -PLACE CENTERUNE CEILING CLOSET CLEAR CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CLEAN OUT, CASED OPENING COLUMN COMMUNICATION CONCRETE CONN CONNECTION, CONNECT CONSTR CONSTRUCTION CONT CONTINUOUS, CONTINUE CORR CORRIDOR CPT CARPET CSWK CASEWORK CT CERAMIC TILE CTR CENTER CU CUBIC DEMOLISH, DEMOLITION DETAIL DRINKING FOUNTAIN DIAMETER DIAGONAL, DIAGRAM DIMENSION DMDE, DMSION DAMPPROOF, DAMPPROOFING DOWN DOOR, DRESSING ROOM DOWNSPOUT DISHWASHER DRAWING DRAWER EAST EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM EXPANSION JOINT ELEVATION ELECTRIC, ELECTRICAL ELEVATOR ENCLOSE, ENCLOSURE ELECTRIC PANEL EQUAL EQUIPMENT ESCALATOR EXHAUST EXPANSION, EXPOSED EXISTING EXTERIOR FIRE ALARM FURNISHED BY CONTRACTOR/ INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR FLOOR DRAIN FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION FOUNDATION FIRE EXTINGUISHER FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET FIRE HYDRANT FIRE HOSE CABINET FIGURE FINISH, FINISHED FLEXIBLE FLOOR FLUORESCENT FACE OF FINISHED OPENING FURNISHED BY OWNER/ INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY OWNER/ INSTALLED BY VENDOR FIRE PROTECTION FRAME, FIRE RATED FRAMING FIREPROOF, FIREPROOFING FIRE RETARDANT TREATED FLOOR SINK FOOT, FEET FOOTING FUTURE FIRE HOSE VALVE CABINET FABRIC WALL COVERING GAGE GALVANIZED GENERAL CONTRACTOR GENERAL, GENERATOR GLASS -FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE GLASS -FIBER REINFORCED GYPSUM GLASS -FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC GLASS GYPSUM GYPSUM BOARD HIGH HOSE BIBB HOLLOW CORE HAND DRYER HARDBOARD HARDWARE HARDWOOD HOLLOW METAL HOLD OPEN HORIZONTAL HOUR HEIGHT HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDffIONING ID INCL INFO INSUL INT JAN JS JT KIT LAM LAU LAV LT LTG MAS MATL MAX MECH MED MEMB MEZZ MGT MFR MH MIN MISC MO MS MTD MTL MVBL N NIC NO NOM MS OC OH OD OPNG OPP ORD OTS PBD PC PD PERP PLAM PLAS PLYWD PNL PL PR PRK PROP PT PIN QT R RCP RD REF REFR REINF REQD REV RFG RM RO RT T T &G TEL TEMP TER THK TMPD TO TSTAT TV TYP UGND UNFIN UON VERT VEST V VWC W W / 0 WC WD WH WP WR WT WWF XMFR YD INSIDE DIAMETER INCLUDE, INCLUDING INFORMATION INSULATE, INSULATION INTERIOR JANITOR JANITOR SINK JOINT KITCHEN LONG LAMINATE, LAMINATED LAUNDRY LAVATORY LIGHT LIGHTING MASONRY MATERIAL MAXIMUM MECHANICAL MEDIUM MEMBRANE MEZZANINE MANAGEMENT MANUFACTURE MANHOLE MINIMUM, MINUTE MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY OPENING MOP SINK MOUNTED METAL MOVABLE NORTH NOT IN CONTACT NUMBER NOMINAL NOT TO SCALE ON CENTER OVERHEAD OUTSIDE DIAMETER OPENING OPPOSITE OVERFLOW ROOF DRAIN OPEN TO STRUCTURE ABOVE PARTICLEBOARD PRECAST PLANTER DRAIN PERPENDICULAR PLASTIC LAMINATE PLASTER PLYWOOD PANEL PROPERTY UNE PAIR PARKING PROPERTY PAINT, POINT, PRESSURE TREATED PARTITION QUARRY TILE RADIUS, RISER REFLECTED CEILING PLAN ROOF DRAIN, ROAD REFER TO, REFERENCE REFRIGERATOR REINFORCED, REINFORCING REQUIRED REVISED, REVISION ROOFING ROOM ROUGH OPENING RIGHT S SOUTH SC SOLID CORE SCHED SCHEDULE SD STORM DRAIN SECT SECTION SGL SINGLE SFIT SHEET SHTHG SHEATHING SIM SIMILAR SPEC SPECIFICATION SPKLR SPRINKLER SPKR SPEAKER SQ SQUARE SS SERVICE SINK SST STAINLESS STEEL STC SOUND TRANSMISSION CLASS STD STANDARD STL STEEL STOR STORAGE STRUCT STRUCTURAL SUSP SUSPENDED TREAD TONGUE AND GROOVE TELEPHONE TEMPERATURE, TEMPORARY TERRAllO THINK, THICKNESS TEMPERED TOP OF THERMOSTAT TELEVISION TYPICAL UNDERGROUND UNFINISHED UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED VERTICAL VESTIBULE VENEER VAPOR RETARDER VINYL WALLCOVERING WEST, WIDE WITH WITHOUT WATER CLOSET, WALLCOVERING WOOD WALL HYDRANT WEATHERPROOF, WATERPROOF, WATERPROOFING, WORK POINT WATER RESISTANT WEIGHT WELDED WIRE FABRIC TRANSFORMER YARD fist 1 SYMBOLS SYMBOL AND DESCRIPTION A -XXX th 3 BUILDING SECTION INDICATOR SECTION DETAIL INDICATOR X -XXX EXTERIOR ELEVATION INDICATOR INTERIOR ELEVATION INDICATOR DATUM INDICATOR EXISTING COLUMN GRID INDICATOR AND GRID LINES ROOM NAME 1 xxx ROOM NAME & NUMBER © l a SEE SHEET A -801 FOR PARTITIONS WALL/PART1T1ON TYPE INDICATOR DEFERRED SUBMITTALS 1. FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 2. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 3. SECURITY DOORS & GRILLES SCOPE OF WORK 's+ ie& ham[ DETAIL INDICATOR WALL SECTION INDICATOR XX A -XXX SMALL CONDITION DETAIL INDICATOR REVISION INDICATOR NEW COLUMN GRID INDICATOR AND GRID LINES LOCATE TOP OF HANDLE AT 4' -0" AFF FIRE EXTINGUISHER DOOR INDICATOR - ._.. OOR NUMBER DWARE GROUP DOOR TYPE SEE SHEET A -802 FOR DOOR INFORMATION TENANT IMPROVEMENT WORK TO EXISTING SPACE IN A RETAIL STORE. THE WORK INCLUDES INSTALLATION OF NON- STRUCTURAL PARTITIONS, FREE STANDING AND WALL MOUNTED FIXTURES WITH ELECTRICAL & MECHANICAL WORK, MODIFY RESTROOM, REMOVE AND RELOCATE CEILING FIXTURE, AND NO CHANGES TO BUILDING EXTERIOR. VICINITY MAP ( VENDOR DISTRIBUTION /CONTACT LIST COMPANY NAME: CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PHONE E -MAIL ADDRESS PRODUCT /MATERIALS: COMPANY NAME: ADDRESS: CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PHONE: E-MAIL ADDRESS PRODUCT /MATERIALS: COMPANY NAME: ADDRESS: CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PHONE: E -MAIL ADDRESS PRODUCT /MATERIALS: COMPANY NAME: ADDRESS: CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PHONE: E -MAIL ADDRESS PRODUCT /MATERIALS: COMPANY NAME: ADDRESS: CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PHONE: E -MAIL ADDRESS PRODUCT /MATERIALS: COMPANY NAME CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PHONE: E -MAIL ADDRESS PRODUCT /MATERIALS: BUILDING INFORMATION BUILDING USE: OCCUPANCY GROUP: CONSTRUCTION TYPE: APPLICABLE CODE CODE ANALYSIS AREA CALCULATION'S SERVICE AREA: OPEN OFFICE: MANAGER OFFICE: INVENTORY\MDF ROOM: RESTROOM: TOTAL OCCUPANT LOAD = 36 REQUIRED: 1 EXIT IF UNDER 50 PEOPLE PROVIDED: 1 EXIT GRAINGER BOYD WAISATH /JASON JONES 404- 234 -1425 boyd_waisath @grainger.com, jason_jones@grainger.com LIGHTING PACKAGE, RESTROOM FIXTURES, FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, ECT., AND ANY FACILITY EQUIPMENTS. SHAW CARPET 1485 BRAWLEY CIRCLE, ATLANTA, GA 30319 MARK LAW 770 -729 -2765, CELL 770- 241 -1345, FAX 678-935-4-488 mark.law®shawinc.com CARPET / HARDWOOD FLOORING MIDWEST CUSTOM CASE 24 E. 36TH PLACE, STEGER, IL 60475 MIKE UNDGREN 708 - 333 -5600, CELL 708 - 906 -0341 mlindgren®midwestcase.com STORE FIXTURES RCS RETAIL INTERIORS 7075 WEST PARKLAND TROY DECKER 414 -354 -6900, CELL troy®resretail.com STORE FIXTURES TRANE NATIONAL ACCOUNTS 2677 BUFORD HIGHWAY ATLANTA, GA 30324 ED METZGER 404- 836 -2106, CELL 404 - 281 -2041, FAX 404 -636 -5204 ehmetzger@trane.com HVAC EQUIPMENT EPS SPECIALTIES LTD., INC. LEE WILKINSON 800-422-3556 lee ®Iamlite.com COMPASSO RADIUS SOFFIT EXISTING RETAIL M- MERCANTILE V -N FULLY ARE SPRINKLER 2006 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE 2006 INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE 2006 INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE 2006 UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE 2006 WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE LOCAL MUNICIPAL CODES LOAD FACTOR 1 ,000 SQ. FT. RETAIL /30 202 SQ. FT. OFFICE /100 53 SQ. FT. OFFICE /100 108 SQ. FT. STORAGE /300 44 SQ. FT. ACCESSORY N/A 1,407 SQ. FT. CT., MILWAUKEE, WS 53223 847 - 612 -3930, FAX 414 -354 -6930 OCCUPANT LOAD 33 1 0 0 = 36 LIGHTING LEGEND SYMBOL 0 B1 BERT F1 TRACK H1 TRACK NL O © C1 0 C2 F H H EE1 B1 B2 M EXIT K L P A A FIXTURE TYPE A B B1 B2 C C1 C2 F F1 H H1 EE1 L2, 3 EXIT KEY MAP REMARKS 1. COOPER 2. EP3GX232S181UNVEB81; MANUFACTURER: COOPER. 3. 1X4 8 CELL PARABOLIC LAY -IN FLOURESCENT. 1. ELECTRICAL ENGINEER TO COORDINATE VOLTAGES AND EMERGENCY BALLAST OPTIONS 1. ELECTRICAL ENGINEER TO COORDINATE VOLTAGES AND EMERGENCY BALLAST OPTIONS 1. ELECTRICAL ENGINEER TO COORDINATE VOLTAGES AND EMERGENCY BALLAST OPTIONS 2. LIGHT FIXTURE SHOWN ABOVE "WALL MERCHANDISE UNIT" ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY AND IS PART OF "WALL MERCHANDISE UNIT" WHICH SHALL BE PROVIDED BY FURNITURE VENDOR. 3. LIGHT FIXTURE SHOWN ABOVE "WALL MERCHANDISE UNIT" AT WINDOW LOCATION SHALL BE SURFACE MOUNTED IN RECESSED SOFFIT AND LIGHTING CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE WITH FURNITURE VENDOR PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 1. COOPER. 2. C7042E - C74000 3. FIXED r COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNUGHT. 1. COOPER. 2. L530039ESCPL /L250/L2R09P 3. FIXED ACCENT UGHT WITH MINI - SPREAD LENS AND ROUND CANOPY COVER - WHITE FINISH. 1. LIGHTOLIER (OR SIMIALAR). 2. 1127CD/1102P1 3. FIXED 7" COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNUGI-T(. 1. COOPER - L530034ESCMBL /L250 2. TRACK MOUNTED ACCENT LIGHT MINI SPREAD LENS - BLACK FINISH, SUPPLY TRACK WITH ALL NECESSARY FEEDS, JOINERS AND CAPS NECESSARY FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. 1. COOPER 2. HALO POWER -TRACK 3. SINGLE CIRCUIT SURFACE MOUNTED BLACK TRACK - SUPPLY L NEC CE ESSSARYY / FOR COMPLETE EIINSTALLA`TION JOINERS AND 1. 8201 WH; MANUFACTURER: UGHTOUER (OR SIMILAR) 2. 79 WAIT HALOGEN WITH 8247WH -BEZEL SHADE. 1. LIGHTOLIER (OR SIMILAR) 2. LIGHTOLIER TRACK 3. SINGLE CIRCUIT SURFACE MOUNTED WHITE TRACK - CAPS SUPPLY / FOR COMPLETE EALIAefIONINERS AND 1. LOCATION AND LOCAL REQUIREMENT TO BE DETERMINED BY ELECTRICAL ENGINEER. BATTERY BACK -UP ON "A" FIXTURES APPROVED ALTERNATE. 1. LIGHTOLIER (OR SIMILAR) 2. DPA2G18LS332UNV -CI 3. 2X4 18 CELL /UNIVERS BALLAST, INCLUDING BULB 1. UTHONIA 1. 2GT8 3 32 Al2 MVOLT. GEB10IS 3. 2X4 LAY -IN FLUORESCENT UGHT FIXTURE W/ ACRYLIC LENS. 1. ELECTRICAL ENGINEER TO LOCATE ALL EXIT SIGNS AND VERIFY POWER /SELF POWER, LETTER AND FIELD COLOR, MOUNTING CONFIGURATION (WALL OR CELING), ETC. 2. EDG 1 120 ELN; MANUFACTURER: LITHONIA. 3. LITHONIA LIGHTING EDGE LIT EXIT LIGHT, SINGLE FACE LETTERS. II e j G h1, fl �4r •X34 , f+ I r '- s •,u O a+r3 -� Mfr +i.li f k df 4 'r lu' R ✓ 1w7. a 3 sa 1 a ,. N is '''',',.= �rx,4• vx' . - ., --4- .ib .r5..'u ,,. ..:...: k�• it '' 31+�m». , "Lll -- !Ga vy4y. `rr .., - 'r 7'1�,- rE5n '✓+ �yhrc�Jx.. � rM -� ,- x,3 rgg ..r. •m' .Rpz.F.S - a4: 1u GENERAL NOTES . THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ARE COMPLEMENTARY, AND WHAT IS REQUIRED BY ONE SHALL BE AS BINDING AS IF REQUIRED BY ALL THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL PORTIONS OF THE WORK AS DESCRIBED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT FOR RESOLUTION OF ALL DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. ALL DIMENSIONS SPECIFIED SHALL GOVERN. DIMENSIONS ARE TO THE STRUCTURAL GRID OR TO FINISH SURFACES, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 4. THE ARCHITECT SHALL BE NOTIFIED IMMEDIATELY OF ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THESE DOCUMENTS AND ANY APPLICABLE CODES BY THE AGENT INVOLVED WITH THE GOVERNING AGENCY HAVING JURIDICI1ON. R 15 UNDERSTOOD THAT THE "FIELD INSPECTOR "FOR SUCH AGENCY HAS FINAL AUTHORITY TO APPROVE /DISAPPROVE PROJECT CONSTRUCTION AND CORRECTNESS OF ALL CODE RELATED ITEMS. EACH SUBCONTRACTOR IS CONSIDERD A SPECIALIST IN THEIR RESPECTIVE FIELD OR TRADE AND SHALL NOTIFY, PRIOR TO PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK, THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND THE ARCHITECT OF ANY WORK CALLED OUT IN THE DRAWINGS WHICH CANNOT BE FULLY GUARANTEED OR CONSTRUCTED AS DESIGNED OR DETAILED. 6. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSION AND LOCATIONS OF ALL OPENINGS, BASES, AND SPECIAL PROVISIONS REQUIRED FOR EQUIPMENT, DUCTS, PIPING, CONDUITS, FINISH HARDWARE, ECT., AND IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT IN WR111NG OF ANY DISCREPANCIES. . WHERE CONTRUCTION DETAILS ARE NOT SHOWN OR NOTED FOR ANY PART OF WORK, DETAIUNG SHALL BE THE SAME AS FOR OTHER SIMILAR FIRST CLASS WORK FOR THE TRADE INVOLVED. THE ARCHITECT SHALL BE NOTIFIED IMMEDIATELY OF ANY ALTERNATE NON- STANDARD OR UNTESTED METHOD(S) PROPOSED. THE AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS AND FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS SHALL BE IN A SEPARATE PERMITS. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE TO SUBMIT A COMPLETE DESIGN TO MEET FIRE DEPARTMENT'S STANDARD CODE AND APPROVAL 9. DRAWINGS & CALCULATIONS SHALL BE SUMBMITTED TO BUILDING AND FIRE DEPARTMENT FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL PRIOR TO FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION FOR ANY MODIFICATIONS TO THE AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER AND FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS. 10. ENSURE MAT ANY AREA, BUILDING MATERIAL OR ASSEMBLY, WITHIN THE BUILDING ENVELOPE, 15 THOROUGHLY CLEANED AND DRY BEFORE COVERED OR CONCEALED BY CONSTRUCTION. ANY MOLD, MILDEW OR OTHER MOISTURE CONDITION DEVELOPED WITHIN THE SCOPE OF WORK OF THIS CONTRACT (DEMOLITION OR NEW CONSTRUCTION) SHALL BE CORRECTED AND /OR MITIGATED BY THE CONTRACTOR. DRAWING INDEX ARCHITECTURAL A -000 COVER SHEET A -001 A -101 A -102 A -103 A -104 A -105 A -301 A -501 A -502 A -503 A -801 A -802 A -803 A-804 ELECTRICAL E.001 E.002 E.003 E.004 E.101 E.102 E.103 E.104 GENERAL INFORMATION EXISTING DEMO FLOOR PLAN & CEILING PLAN FLOOR PLAN REFLECTED CEIUNG PLAN FINISH PLAN AND FINISH LEGENDS FURNITURE AND FIXTURING PLAN INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS PARTITION DETAILS, RESPONSIBILITY CHART DETAILS CASEWORK DETAIL SALES FLOOR FIXTURING ELECTRICAL GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS & ABBREVIATIONS LIGHTING COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLAN ELECTRICAL POWER AND COMMUNICATIONS PLAN ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULES, DETAILS AND SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM ELECTRICAL DETAILS PROJECT INFORMATION SEIE ADDRESS: AT &T STORE TUKWILA, WA 188 CENTER PKWY OWNER: ARCHITECT: ELECTRICAL: MECHANICAL/ PLUMBING: CONTRACTOR: AT &T MOBILITY 1920 CUSTOMER CARE WAY ATWATER, CA 95301 CARTER CENTRE S IRIVE . STE. 800 SANTA ANA, CA 92707 CARTER UTFON B S, INC. DRIVE STE 800 SANTA ANA, CA 92707 CARTER HU1TTON BURGESS DRIVE STE. 800 SANTA ANA, CA 92707 TBD D0084-317 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED JUN 1 6 2008 City Of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION 209- 631 -3344 PH NE) 209 -381 -7180 FAX) CONTACT: PELTO F R 714 - 327 -4054 714 - 327 -1601 CONTACT: HIEP N CITE) 714 -327 -1600 (PHONE) 714 - 327 -1601 (FAX CONTACT: ROSANNA RY 714 -327 -1600 (PHONE) 714- 327 -1601 FAX CONTACT: MIKE COPYAIGtrr 0 2008 CARTER & BURGESS, INC. Carter:Burgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (714) 327 -1600 FAX: (714) 327 -1601 NO. DATE - 06 -05 -08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT ISSUES /REVISIONS 16415 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 DRAWN BY: PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE: at &t DESIGNED BY: CHECKED BY: GENERAL INFORMATION DESCRIPTION APPROVED BY: 444017.011.037.0001 NONE A -001 Q GENERAL NOTES 1. THESE DEMOLITION PLAN DRAWINGS WERE CREATED FROM EXISTING WORKING DRAWINGS AND ARE INTENDED TO SHOW THE GENERAL CONDITIONS WHICH ARE EXPECTED TO OCCUR. VERIFY ALL CONDITIONS BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE DEMOLITION WORK IN ANY AREA. DEMOLITION OF DOORS, WINDOWS, CABINETRY, FINISHES, PARTI11ONS, OR ANY OTHER NON - STRUCTURAL ITEMS MAY PROCEED AS INDICATED. WHERE DISCREPANCIES INVOLVE STRUCTURAL ITEMS, REPORT SUCH DIFFERENCES TO THE ARCHITECT AND SECURE INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE PROCEEDING IN THE AFFECTED AREA. 2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE TO SALVAGE OF LIGHT FIXTURES, FURNISHING, DOORS, AND MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT. 3. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE EXISTING WALLS AND OTHER ASSOCIATED CONSTRUCTION AS INDICATED ON THE DEMOLITION PLANS WITH DASHED LINES. 4. REFER TO MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDED DEMOLITION NOTES AND INFORMATION. 5. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY BARRICADES AND OTHER FORMS OF PROTECTION AS REQUIRED TO PROTECT THE OWNER'S PERSONNEL, OTHER TENANTS AND GENERAL PUBLIC FROM INJURY DUE TO DEMOLITION WORK. 6. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ENSURE THAT DEMOLITION WORK OPERATIONS DOES NOT WITHIN INTERTHE FERSTRUCTUE WIfH RE. OR THIS PROHIBIT THE CONTINUING OCCUPATION OF ADJACENT INCLUDES BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO THE SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OF PARTITIONS, ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INFORM THE OWNER OF A MINIMUM OF 72 HOURS BEFORE DEMOLITION ACTIVITIES THAT WILL AFFECT THE NORMAL OPERATION OF BUILDING. 7. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REPAIR DAMAGES CAUSED TO ADJACENT FACILITIES BY DEMOLITION WORK. 8. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE AND RETURN TO OWNER ALL SHELVING BRACKETS WHERE THEY INTERFERE WITH NEW WORK. 9. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ADEQUATE TEMPORARY VERTICAL AND LATERAL BRACING AT ALL TIMES DURING CONSTRUCTION AND UNTIL STRUCTURE COMPLETELY TIED TOGETHER. 10. ALL RUBBISH AND DEBRIS RESULTING FROM DEMOLITION AND /OR NEW WORK SHALL BE RECYCLED AND /OR DISPOSED OF OFF -SITE AND SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED TO ACCUMULATE. I I I J 1 I 1 L r- -- REMOVE EXISTING WALL COVERINGS, FURNITURE AND FLOOR FINISHES THROUGHOUT \ / _ 4 - r ■ -- 1 - \` 1 r-7) co ` __ - f 1 �` / ��- ~ -��_ \ � 1 / ,\ ,\ � •� \ 1 i Y \ // \ 1 1 -- 1 — I / 1 1 1 � 1 I - -K \ /// \ \ 1 \ \ / _ REMOVE EXISTING DOOR I &WALLS, 1 - - - (E) ELECTRICAL PANEL r - TO REMAIN - • I (SHOWN AS IN DASHED) - ; - - - \ - � . _ _ J _ L- UP I mi.. \ / \ , _MU y / / - -, g _ r 1 \: 1 L J , - �� 1 A ■ 12" ±1' - - - - ±24' -4" ±25' -99) " (E) SINK SEE _ SHEET TO BE REMOVED & RELOCATED A -102 FOR REFERENCE 3" V.I.F. (E) 51' 0 0 / 0 4 LEGEND EXISTING TO BE DEMOLISHED DEMO FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -O" D (E) CEILING TO REMAIN, REPAIR AND REPLACE AS REQUIRED EXISTING TO REMAIN (ER) EXISTING TO BE RELOCATED (E) EXISTING k , ' ' - ,Z'T uX 1 (E) LIGHT TRACK - 0 REMAIN R g yy� ``@N ED E \ cope co��� uki 1 6 '6 J 11.01la :. DIVISI boa._ 3 1 7 >( X I I I L - J Ic-\\ i 1_ I L _`,1 1 I L _ J __-- \� I I L _ J �- X E re . ffi . L _ _ �' - F, / 1 1 x 1 / .- - r 7 1 I L- J_ 1 .. co - - -`_ - _ — ., , _ p� - \ / / - ,i- / / \ i - .- 1 1 L -J 4 Y= \ \ \ L -J — X \ \_ . ■ -... , ■. _., '- \� x 1 1 1 � _� - - -- L J 1 1 L_J - = L J 1 1 L_J . ' L J 1 1 L_J 7 I 1 1 L_J - 1 J •• . r - .7. -- • . . . -'• 1 •.. UP 1 __..._ - 1 I I IEX:T1 ® _ _ T • B I 1-11 I I I �. - _ _ - - . - . r - ±1 I ±24'-4" ±25' -9y" / (E) 51' 3" V.I.F. 0 0 0 4 DEW R CEILING PLAN SCALE 1/4" = 1' -0* Carter::Burgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (714) 327 -1600 FAX: (714) 327 -1601 - 06 -05 -08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT NO. DATE 164.15 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 DESIGNED BY: CHECKED BY: DRAWN BY: COMM* 0 2008 CARTER a BURGESS, R C. PROJECT NUMBER; SCALE: at &t ISSUES /REVISIONS NORTH DESCRIPTION APPROVED BY: 444017.011.037.0001 1/4" = 1' -0" DEMO FLOOR PLAN DEMO CEILING PLAN A -101 1 -H L r L .J r � L L /_ (E) COLUMN E 1 1 1 1 1 1 PROVIDE TACTILE SIGNAGE, SEE DETAIL D7 /A -301 r L 007 a SEE NOTE #8 D1 A -301 SERVICE AREA 1 001 PROVIDE SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY AT 60" A.F.F SEE DETAIL C7 /A -301 ±24' -4" 1 it - - -il Ir u _ — rl - - - -I r - -�I = 1 11 11 11 1 11 I 1 I I I lL 1 L_ -J L —Li -J L r III r �� r 4=3_, IL 1=—=J JI LEGEND EXISTING WALL NEW INTERIOR PARTITIONS. SEE SHEET A -801 �^ ALL WALL MOUNTED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS SHALL IN COMPLIANCE WITH UFC STANDARD FE 10 -1. CONTRACTOR TO V.I.F. EGRESS PATH OF TRAVEL 001 DO0 005 ±25' -9y" 1 003 I 1 0021 MANAGER OFFICE fi -, 11 1 L__J 11 " I\ Lr r -- I ALIGN F _r i o 1) FLOOR PLAN NVENTORY R0011 —.1 1 (SEE NOTE #7)L-- 1 7) L- 1 004 I (E) UNISEX 006 (E) EP. /_\ • ? == : = 006 D00 UP SEE NOTE 19 (V.I.F.) O' B3'7 SCALE 1/e - 1' -0' GENERAL NOTES 1. EXIT DOORS SHALL BE OPERABLE FROM INSIDE WITHOUT THE USE OF A KEY OR ANY SPECIAL KNOWLEDGE OR EFFORT. 2. SEE FINISH PLAN SHEET, A -104, FOR ADDMONAL INFORMATION ON FINISHES. 3. SEE SHEET A -801 FOR PARTfON TYPES. 4. ALL EXISTING FIRE RATING OF DEMISING WALLS TO MAINTAIN & REPAIR AS NECESSARY. 5. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY THE DEMISING WALL PROVIDE FURRING AND DRYWALL ON BOTH SIDE TO UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURE IF REQUIRED. 6. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE WITH at&t'S CONSTRUCTION MANAGER FOR LOCATION OF SECURITY GRILLE LOCATION IF ANY. 7. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE 3/4" RATED PLYWOOD ON ALL WALLS AND CEILING UNDER GYP. BD. INSIDE INVENTORY ROOM, TYP., U.N.O.. 8. ADD SIGN OVER ENTRY DOOR THIS DOOR TO REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS ". USE 1 INCH HIGH LETTERS WITH CONTRASTING BACKGROUND. 9. PROVIDE 180' PEEP HOLE IN BACK EMERGENCY DOOR. 10. DOORS AND CASED OPENINGS INDICATED NEARBY WALL INTERSECTIONS, SHALL BE LOCATED SO THAT THE EDGE OF THE FINISH OPENING IS FOUR INCHES FROM THE FACE OF THE NEARBY WALL UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. ALL OTHER DOORS AND CASED OPENINGS SHALL BE CENTERED BETWEEN ADJACENT WALL INTERSECTIONS. 11. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL BLOCKING AS REQUIRED FOR ALL CASEWORK, SHELVING, COUNTERTOPS & OTHER OWNER PROVIDED EQUIPMENT. 12. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDMONAL INFORMATION. f —O P czi i / / rr., I Ma \ I Ma N w..• Y' TEMPERED SAFETY GLASS TO MATCH ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION A FLUSH SOLID CORE WOOD DOOR B FLUSH HOLLOW METAL DOOR C FLUSH DOOR W/ 12"X12" GLASS PANEL D FLUSH DOOR W/ 7"X22" ONE WAY GLASS PANEL (MIRRORED ON SALES FLOOR SIDE) E STOREFRONT DOOR W/ TEMPERED GLASS FINISH: MATCH ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION DOOR SCHEDULE 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 DOOR LOCATION SALES FLOOR TO OPEN OFFICE MANAGER'S OFFICE INVENTORY ROOM MDF ROOM RESTROOM (E) EXIT DOOR (E) EXIT /ENTRY DOOR DOOR WIDTH 3' -0" 3' -0' 5' -0" 3' -0" 3' -0" 3' -0" HEIGHT 7' -0" 7' -0' 7' -0' 7' -O" 7' -0' 7' -0" 7' -0" THICKNESS 1 3/4" 1 3/4' 1 3/4' 1 3/4" 1 3/4' 1 3/4" 1 3/4' TYPE D C A A A A E MATERIAL WD —SC WD —SC WD —SC WD —SC WD —SC WD —SC GLASS FRAME HEAD DETAIL E5/A802 E5/A802 E5/A802 E5/A802 E5/A802 E5/A802 E5/A802 JAMB DETAIL E5/A802 E5 /A802 E5/A802 E5/A802 E5/A802 E5/A802 E5/A802 MATERIAL STL —KD STL —KD STL —KD STL —KD STL —KD STL —KD STL —KD TYPE F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 HARDWARE GROUP HW2 (IF REPLACE) HW5 HW4 (IF REPLACE) HW4 (IF REPLACE) HW3 (IF REPLACE) HW6A (IF REPLACE) HW1AP (IF REPLACE) REMARKS EXISTING (V.I.F.) EXISTING (V.I.F.) EXISTING (V.I.F.) EXISTING (V.I.F.) EXISTING (V.I.F.) EXISTING (V.I.F.) NOTES 1-THE INVENTORY DOOR HARDWARE GROUP HW4 INCLUDES THE BEST 93KZ7DV15KP -53 -626. SEE HARDWARE GROUP HW4 2 —CLASS 6 OR ANY OTHER LOCATION NEEDING ADDMONAL SECURITY ON REAR DOOR WILL USE THE FOLLOWING ARM —A —DOR EXIT DEVICE: A101002 ARM —A —DOR EXIT ALARM. _ 3 —ALL EXISTING DOORS SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 3' -0' WIDE AND 6' -8" IN HEIGHT. DOOR SHALL BE CAPABLE OF OPENI 9(� €G�RI ED OR AND SHALL BE MOUNTED THAT THE CLEAR WIDTH IS NOT LESS THAN 32". SEC 1003.3.1.3, 1003.3.1.3a, 1005.3.2 C ODE CO PLIANt 4--ALL NEW DOOR SHALL HAVE 2" HEAD FRAME TYPE, U.O.N. 5- -PAINT P -4 FOR ALL SALES FLOOR DOORS AND FRAMES (ALUMINUM STOREFRONT NOT INCLUDED). 6 —PAINT TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL FOR ALL OFFICES, INVENTORY, RESTROOM AND OPEN OFFICE DOORS AND FRAMES. 7— COORDINATE WITH AT&T PROJECT MANAGER IF ALARM IS REQUIRED TO BE AT REMOTE LOCATION. 8 —A MAXIMUM EFFORT OF 5 POUND FOR INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR DOORS. HW2 (PASSAGE WITH CLOSER) 1 -1/2 PR BUTTS 1 PASSAGE 1 CLOSER 1 KICKPLATE 1 STOP 3 SILENCER HW3 (PRIVACY WITH CLOSER) 1 -1/2 PR BUTTS 1 PRIVACY 1 CLOSER 1 KICKPLATE 1 STOP 3 SILENCER HW5 (OFFICE LOCK WITH CLOSER) 1 -1/2 PR BUTTS 1 LOCKSET 1 CLOSER 1 KICKPLATE 1 STOP 3 SILENCER HW6B (EXTERIOR WITH ALARM 1 -1/2 PR BUTTS 1 PANIC 1 TRANSFER 1 HORN 1 CLOSER 1 KICKPLATE 1 THRESHOLD 1 SWEEP 1 SEAL 1 RAIN DRIP 1 VIEWER 1 CYUNDER(I.S.) STA BES STA QUA QUA GJ HW4 (STOREROOM LOCK WITH CLOSER) 1-1/2 PR BUTTS STA 1 LOCKSET 1 CLOSER 1 KICKPLATE 1 STOP 3 SILENCER BES STA QUA QUA GJ STA BES STA QUA QUA GJ FBB179 . 4 -1/2 X 4 -1/2 93K0N15D —S3 -626 D3550 —SB 10. X 2. LDW . 16 GA 431ES GJ64 STA FBB179 . 4-1/2 X 4 -1/2 BES 93KOL15D —S3 -626 STA D3550 —SB QUA 10.X2.LDW.16GA QUA 431ES GJ GJ64 FBB179 -- 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 93KZ7DV15KP —S3 -626 D3550 —SB 10. X 2. LDW — 16 GA 431ES GJ64 FBB179 . 4 -1/2 X 4 -1/2 93K7AB15D —S3 -626 D3550 —SB 10.X2.WW.16GA 431ES GJ64 IiW6A (EXTERIOR WITH LOCAL ALARM) 1 -1/2 PR BUTTS STA FBB179 — NRP -4-1/2 X 4-1/2 1 ALARM LOCK PRE PR- 5101ALK501 -689 (see note below) 1 CYLINDER (I.S.) BES 1E74 1 CLOSER STA D4550 —SB 1 KICKPLATE QUA 10. X 2. LDW . 16 GA 1 THRESHOLD NGP 425 1 SWEEP NGP 102V 1 SEAL NGP 5050 —BN 1 RAIN DRIP NGP 16A + 4. 1 VIEWER IVE 698B The standard alarm system for rear exit doors is the Precision Model 5101ALK501 -689, but in those locations that require fire rated assembly, Precision Model FL 51 O1 ALK5O1 -689 may be substituted. TO REMOTE LOCATION) STA FBB179 — NRP — 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 PRE 5101WALW501- 689— WH495 —WTS PRE EPT -5 ADE WAVE2EX STA D4550 —SB QUA 10. X 2. LDW -16GA NGP 425 NGP 102V NGP 5050 —BN NGP 16A + 4. IVE 698B BES 1E74 HARDWARE GROUPS HW1 P (EXTERIOR -- WOOD /METAL) STA 2 FLUSHBOLT QUA 1 DEADLOCK BES 2 PUSH /PULL SET QUA 2 CLOSER STA 1 THRESHOLD NGP 2 SWEEP NGP 1 SEAL NGP 1 ASTRAGAL BY DOOR SUPPLIER HW1AP (EXTERIOR — ALUM /ALUM) 3 PR BUTTS 2 FLUSHBOLT 1 DEADLOCK 1 CYLINDER 1 THUMBTURN 2 PUSH /PULL SET 2 CLOSER 2 DROP PLATE 1 THRESHOLD 2 SWEEP 1 SEAL 1 ASTRAGAL HW1 S (EXTERIOR SINGLE — 1 -1/2 PR BUTTS 1 DEADLOCK 1 CLOSER 1 PUSH PULL SET 1 'THRESHOLD 1 SWEEP 1 SEAL ERAME__TYPES: F1 2» HEAD F2 4" HEAD A/R BES BES QUA STA STA NGP NGP HW1AS (EXTERIOR SINGLE — ALUM /ALUM) 1 -1/2 PR BUTTS 1 DEADLOCK 1 CYLINDER 1 THUMBTURN 1 PUSH /PULL SET 1 CLOSER 1 DROP PLATE 1 THRESHOLD 1 SWEEP 1 SEAL WOOD /METAL) STA FBB179— NRP -4-1/2 X 44 BES 38H7K -626 STA 484 NU GP 425 NGP 102V NGP 5050 — BN A/R BES BES QUA STA STA NGP NGP MANUFACTURERS LISTING: STA STANLEY HARDWARE QUA QUALITY HARDWARE BES BEST LOCK NGP NATIONAL GUARD PRODUCTS GJ GLYNN— JOHNSON IVE H.B. IVES A/R ADAMS /RITE PRE PRECISION HARDWARE ARM ARM—A—DOR HARDWARE ADE ADEMCO AP !n:, MED JUN 16 2000 City Of Tukwila BUILDING DMSKK FBB179— NRP -4 -1/2 X 4—; 1358 — 12 38H7K -626 Q -484 D4550 —SB 425 102V 5050 — BN MFG STANDARD MFG STANDARD MS1850S — 1 1E76— C181 —RP -626 1E6A4 —C181 -626 Q -484 D4550 —SB P45 -180 425 102V MFG STANDARD MFG STANDARD MFG STANDARD MS1850S — 1 -1/8. 1E76— C181 —RP -626 1E6A4 —C181 -626 Q -484 D4550 —SB P45 -180 425 102V MFG STANDARD N VII Carter:Burgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (714) 327 -1600 FAX: (714) 327 -1601 s cs DRAWN BY: COPYRIGHT 0 2008 CARTER & BURGESS. Wc. NO. DATE PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE: at &t ISSUES /REVISIONS — 06 -05 -08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT NORTH FLOOR PLAN DESCRIPTION 16415 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 DESIGNED BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY: 444017.011.037.0001 1/4" = 1' -0' A -102 TYP. VERTICAL HANGER: 12 GAUGE GALVANIZED WIRE HANGER WIRE AT 4' -0" O.C. MINIMUM 3 FULL TURNS IN 1 1/2" AT EACH END a S S S SS 5555 S S 5 S S5 SS S S S S S5 SS 5555 SS SS SS SS SS S S S S 5555' TYPICAL CROSS RUNNERS AT 2'--0" O.C. #12 GAUGE HANGER WIRE 0 EACH LIGHT FIXTURE CORNER. ATTACH TO PERMANENT STRUCTURE TYPICAL PAINT RED PER SECTION 300 -11 NEC ACOUSTICAL. LAY—IN PANELS TYPICAL MAIN RUNNERS SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM SEISMIC (FOR REFERENCE ONLY) '� 2" MAX. C CEILING SYSTEM SECTION TYPICAL MIDDLE AREA (FOR REFERENCE ONLY) #12 GAUGE 4 WAY DIAGONAL TIES TO UNISTRUT OR CAVITY SHAFT FRAMING CROSS TEE RUNNER LATERAL BRACING: (4)112 GAUGE GALV. WIRES AT 90' TO EACH OTHER. SECURE TO MAIN RUNNER WITHIN 2" OF CROSS RUNNER. MIN. 4 FULL TURNS IN 1 1/2" AT EA. END. MAX. SPACING OF 8 FT. x 12 FT. O.C. FOR ANCHORAGE TO STRUCTURAL ACOUSTICAL LAY —IN PANELS, TYP. MAIN RUNNERS AT 4' -0" O.C. 3 5/8" STRUT SCREW INTO T —BAR (2) PLACES OPPOSITE CORNERS LIGHTING FIXTURE CONNECTION SEISMIC (FOR REFERENCE ONLY) NTS MAIN RUNNER OF SUSPENDED CEILING. #12 GAUGE VERTICAL HANGER WIRE ON MAIN RUNNER r FROM 4 CORNERS OF UGHT FIXTURE, TYPICAL NTS COMPRESSION STRUTS: WT H L/R RATIO OF 200 MAXIMUM, 3 5/8' X 20 GA. UNPUNCHED METAL STUD ATTACHED TO MAIN RUNNERS WITH (4) 18 SCREWS TO STRUCTURE COMPRESSION STRUT SHALL NOT REPLACE HANGER WIRE LATERAL BRACING: (4)112 GA. GALVANIZED WIRES AT 90' TO EACH OTHER. SECURE TO MAIN RUNNER WITHIN 2' OF CROSS RUNNER. MINIMUM 4 FULL TURNS IN 1 1/2' AT EACH END. MAXIMUM SPACING OF 8 FT. x 12 FT. 0.C. B� (2) i8 SCREWS TYPICAL CROSS RUNNERS u m (R) (E) (E) LIGHT TRACK, TYP. X NIGHT UGHT, TYP. 5ti555S5tiSSSti5tiSSStiS5515S SSS5SSSStiSti5ti5SStiS55SSS5tiSSSSStiSSSSSStiSStiStitiISSStiSStiSSS" IEX.TI CEILING SYSTEM SECTION @ RESTRAINED PERIMETER (FOR REFERENCE ONLY) (E) B2 (R) (R) ±24' -4" • 001 SERVICE AREA (E) ACT CEILING (V.I.F.) z 12 GAUGE GALVANIZED WIRE HANGERS AT 4'--0" O.C. � MINIMUM 3 FULL TURNS IN 1 1/2' AT EACH END. FOR ANCHORAGE TO STRUCT. r----- 8* MAXIMUM OR 1/4 THE LENGTH OF THE END RUNNERS, WHICHEVER IS LEAST, TYP. MAIN RUNNERS AT 4' -0' O.C. OR CROSS RUNNERS AT 2' -0' O.C., TYP. ACOUSTICAL LAY —IN PANELS, TYP. 16 GAUGE CONTINUOUS ANGLE BY CEILING GRID INSTALLER. ANCHOR TO WALL STUDS WITH 110 SELF TAPPING SCREWS. POP RIVET TO CEIUNG RUNNERS. FINISH ANGLE AND RIVETS TO MATCH CEILING SYSTEM. TYPICAL GYPSUM BOARD & METAL STUD WALL REFER ALL TYPES FOR EXACT MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION. CASHWRAP POWER & DATA POLE, TYP. B B (TOP AND BOT) (R) (R) x X (E) 51' -3" V.I.F. B (R) (R) (R) NTS r MDF ROOM (E) ACT CEILING (V.LF.) 1 005 I N X ±25' -9y' 002 12 GAUGE GALVANIZED WIRE HANGERS — SEE DESCRIPTION IN DETAIL 2/A -3.2 ADD ONE PAIR LATERAL BRACE WIRES SIMILAR TO DETAIL 3/A -3.2 AT 8' -0" 0.C. RUNNING PARALLEL TO WALL AT 45' TO CEILING PLANE. CONCEALED METAL STRUT OR 16 GA. WIRE INTERLOCK BY CEILING GRID INSTALLER. TIE TO ENDS OF RUNNERS. 16 GAUGE CONTINUOUS ANGLE BY CEILING GRID INSTALLER. ANCHOR TO WALL STUDS WITH 110 SELF TAPPING SCREWS. POP RIVET TO CEILING RUNNERS. FINISH ANGLE AND RIVETS TO MATCH CEILING SYSTEM. TYPICAL GYP. BD. & METAL STUD WALL REFER ALL TYPES FOR EXACT MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION. N (E) WALL LIGHT TO REMAIN MANAGER OFFICE (E) ACT CEIUNG (V.I.F.) CEILING SYSTEM SECTION © UNRESTRAINED PERIMETER (FOR REFERENCE ONLY) x 1 006 1 (E) UNISEX (E) G.B. CEILING GENERAL NOTES ler 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 11 l 11 l l l t l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l 1111111 l l l l l l l l l l 1111111114 1- W 4 8' (MAX.) INVENTORY ROOM (E) ACT CEILING (V.I.F.) 1 004 1 NIGHT LIGHT, TYP. UP 1. SEE SHEET A -001 FOR UGHTING LEGEND AND FIXTURE SYMBOLS. 2. LIGHT SWITCHES TO BE MOUNTED AT 42' A.F.F., U.O.N. 3. SEE SHEET A -104 FOR FINISH SCHEDULE 4. SEE DETAIL El /A -802 FOR A.C.T. SUPPORT INFORMATION. 5. NOT ALL FIXTURES SHOWN IN THE FIXTURE SCHEDULE MAY BE USED IN THIS PROJECT — CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY QUANTITIES PRIOR TO ORDERING. 6. GRID, GRILLES AND TYPE 'A" FIXTURES TRIM TO BE PAINTED P -6 AT SALES AREA, ALL CLOUD ELEMENTS TO REMAIN WHITE. OPEN OFFICE (E) ACT CEILING (V.I.F.) FOOT' 3/8' NTS 8317 REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE CODE CC�N�P PP YE JUN 1 6 2008 TUiia BUILDING : S 7 . PROVIDE WALL ANGLE AT ALL CEILING TO WALL/SOFFIT CONNECTION POINTS INCLUDING "FLEX' ANGLE AT THE RADIUS SOFFITS. 8. GRID TO BE FRAMED OUT TO ACCEPT 'A' LIGHT FIXTURES. 9. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE 3/4" RATED PLYWOOD ON ALL WALLS AND CEILING UNDER GYP. BD. INSIDE INVENTORY ROOM, TYP., U.N.O.. 10. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDCTIONAL INFORMATION. 11. SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. DRAWN BY: COPYRIGHT 0 2008 CARTER & BURGESS, INC. PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE: REFLECTED CEILING PLAN at &t Carter::Burgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (714) 327 -1600 FAX: (714) 327 -1601 ISSUES /REVISIONS 06-05-08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 16415 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 NORTH DESIGNED BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY: 444017.011.037.0001 1/4" = 1' -0" A -103 C A op WIREMOLD TYP. 4' -0" ±24' -4" SERVICE AREA FLOOR CPT -1 BASE RB -1 WALL P -2 TO 1O' -0" AFF. P -1 ABOVE 01 1 (E) 51' -3" V.I.F. (E) MDF ROOM 1 0051 (NO WORK) ±25' -9y" 1 003 OPEN OFFICE FLOOR BASE WALL VCT-1 RB -1 PAINT P -5 002 E9 —B A -802 MANAGER OFFICE FLOOR BASE WALL CPT-1 RB -1 PAINT P -5 004 INVENTORY ROOM FLOOR BASE WALL VCT -1 RB -1 PAINT P -5 (E) UNISEX 1 0061 (NO WORK) f UP CODE C.OMPLIANCE APP JUN 1 6 2008 8 3e7 Of �i�k950 BUILDIN GENERAL NOTES 1. FLOOR BASE WALL CPT,VCT,WF,L,WM RB,SV P INDICATES TYPICAL FINISHES 2. FOR ALL FINISHES OF MILLWORK /CABINETRY ITEMS, REFER TO ELEVA11ONS, SHEET A -301. 3. FOR ALL WALLS WHERE NO FINISH OR BASE IS INDICATED, SEE INTERIOR ELEVA11ONS SHEET, A -301 4. ALL WALLS, SOFFITS AND DOORS /FRAMES TO BE BRUSH & ROLL ONLY. 5. ALL PAINT SURFACE TO BE PRIMED AND 2 FINISH COATS. 6. MOISTURE TEST SHALL BE COMPLETED PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF WOOD FLOORING. 7. PROVIDE EXPANSION TRIM 0 STOREFRONT MUWON FOR WOOD FLOORING. 8. FLOOR BOXES FOR EXPERIENCE TABLES & INTERACTIVE PODIUM SHOULD BE WIREMOLD BRAND (OR APPROVED SIMILAR) 881RC4ATCBK. FOR ASSISRANCE PLEASE CALL ED COMMINS WTTH WIREMOLD AT 800 -338 -1315 EX. 3210. 9. PROVIDED CONDUIT UNDER SLAB TO CONNECT INTERACTIVE PODIUM TO HIVE WALL 10. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. FINISH LEGEND INTERIOR ARCHITECTURE: ACT -1 ACT -2 ACT -3 CPT -1 CPT -2 WF -1 FRP RB -1 P -1 P -2 P -3 P -4 P -5 P -5b P -6 P -7 VCT -1 SV ST -1 INTERIOR CASEWORK - RETAIL STORE M -1 M -2 PL -1 PL -2 PL -3 PL -4 SS -1 FINISH PLAN USG FROST SIZE: 2' X 2' NUMBER: *414 EDGE: SLB COLOR: CHARCOAL *534 GRID: DONN DX 15/16" 800 -950 -3839 PAINT GRID TO MATCH: P -6 USG RADAR CLIMAPLUS SIZE: 2' X 4' NUMBER: *2420 EDGE: SQ COLOR: WHITE GRID: DONN DX 15/16" 800-950-3839 USG MARS CLIMAPLUS SIZE: 2' X 2' EDGE: FLB GRID FINELINE i" NUMBER: 86185 TED KELLUM (312) -606 -4428 SHAW *4248V EXPERIENCE SQUARE COLOR: BELL BLUE *L010B CONSTRUCTION: MULTI - SCROLL PATTERN: NO REPEAT MARK LAW, 800- 424 -7429 X5396 SHAW STYLE: C0149 CINGULAR ENTRY COLOR: JET BLACK JB210 24 "X24" MULTILEVEL LOOP QUARTER TURN INSTALL MARK LAW, 800-424 -7429 X5396 SHAW STYLE: ATT PCF WOOD COLOR: BELL GRAY *00400 FINISH: HEAVY TEXTURE INSTALL: GLUELESS, FLOAT, TONGUE & GROOVE MARK LAW: 770- 241 -1345 TARA GRIMSELY 706 - 275 -3329 = REQUIRE EXPANSION STRIP AT EVERY 1,064 S.F. MAXIMUM AREA. USG INTERIORS CLASS "C" TUFLINER *8101 WHITE (RR WAINSCOT) JOHNSONITE SIZE 4" *82 BLACK PEARL BENJAMIN MOORE "SHADOW GRAY" *2125 -40 SEMI -GLOSS FINISH BENJAMIN MOORE "WEDDING VEIL" *2125 -70 SEMI -GLOSS FINISH BENJAMIN MOORE "ORANGE BURST" *2015 -20 SEMI -GLOSS FINISH P -3 FROM COUNTER HEIGHT UP & P -5 FROM COUNTER HEIGHT DOWN BENJAMIN MOORE "STONE BROWN" •2112 -30 SEMI -GLOSS FINISH BENJAMIN MOORE "ICE MIST" *2123 -70 SEMI -GLOSS FINISH BENJAMIN MOORE "ICE MIST" *2123 -70 FLAT FINISH BENJAMIN MOORE "IRON MOUNTAIN" *2134 -30 SEMI -GLOSS FINISH JOHNSONITE SIZE: 4" *178 COLOR: IRON STONE ARMSTRONG - IMPERIAL TEXTURE *51904 COLOR: STERLING 12 "X12 "X1/8" ANTHONY LAWSON: 513 -398 -9448 X8943 ARMSTRONG - SHEET VINYL *88477 LIATRIS COOL GRAY NOTE: EXTENDS SHEET VINYL UPWARD ONTO WALL 6" MIN. TP. IN ALL WET AREAS. GLOBAL GRANITE & MARBLE 3/8" X 12" X 12" SLATE TILE BLACK NATURAL SAM KOONTZ: 314 - 392 -1961 POWDER COAT ALUMINUM *PE9 -6875G "ALUMINUM" BONDED BASE COAT POWDER COAT POLYCHEM *P- BR/773 LOT: *P -4653 "NEW CHAIR BRONZE" 760 - 868 -5282 WILSONART MONTANA WALNUT *7110T -60 LAMINART PEARLESENCE *2300T PLATINUM TEXTURED LAMINART PEARLESENCE *2418T GRAPHITE TEXTURED FORMICA WHITE *949 -58 MATTE FINISH SOLID SURFACE DOVIAN (CAPRI CONCRETE) LEE GARZA 206- 226 -9111 SCALE 1/4 = 1' -0" COPYRIGHT 0 20Oe MIER & BURGESS„ INC. Carter:Burgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (714) 327 -1 600 FAX: (714) 327 -1601 — 06 -05 -08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT NO. DATE at &t ISSUES /REVISIONS DESCRIPTION 16415 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 rTr °5.71 ye DESIGNED BY: CHECKED BY: DRAWN BY: PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE: NORTH FINISH PLAN FINISH LEGENDS APPROVED BY: 4-4- 4017.011.037.0001 1/4" = 1'--0" A -104 C r RSF-005 4' -4" RSF -003 SEE NOTE #5 ±24' -4" FSF -013 R F -00 A RSF -002 RSF -001 RSF -001A ACCESSIBLE COUNTER 1001 SERVICE AREA RSF RSF -001A -001A (E) 51' -3" V.I.F. c.l 4 -0" 3' -4" TYP. N 0 O LL CC E LL � Li VI VJ 0 t25' -9Y2" RSF -007 (E) MDF ROOM 1 005 I 002 MANAGER OFFICE • 10 0 0 2" BLACK ,I_ GROMMET, TYP. SEE NOTE 17 RSF -006 0 L U7 L 0 L L 1 0031 OPEN OFFICE 0 0 0 RSF --012 1 0041 INVENTORY ROOM 60" CLR. (E) UNISEX 0 I 1 006 N_ LL f .F UP CODE RSF -001 RSF -001A RSF-001B RSF -002 RSF -002A RSF -003 RSF -004 RSF -005 RSF -006 RSF -007 RSF -008 RSF -009 RSF -010 RSF -011 RSF -012 RSF -013 GENERAL NOTES 1) FURNITURE IS FOR REFERENCE ONLY AND IS FOIC UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. SEE SHEETS A-803 AND A -804. 2) BACKWRAP GRAPHIC BOARD BY FIXTURE VENDOR. GC TO PROVIDE & INSTALL HALO LIGHTING. ATTACH DIRECTLY TO BACKGARP GRAPHIC BOARD. COORDINATE INSTALLATION WITH FIXTURE VENDOR. 3) FEATURE WALL GRAPHIC BOARD BY FIXTURE VENDOR. GC TO PROVIDE & INSTALL HALO LIGHTING. ATTACH DIRECTLY TO BACKGARP GRAPHIC BOARD. COORDINATE INSTALLATION WITH FIXTURE VENDOR. 4) GC TO PROVIDE 1 ROW OF WHITE MELAMINE SHELVING ABOVE ALL COUNTER. 5) FURNITURE BY OWNER. 6) FOR ACCESSIBILITY SERVICE COUNTER, SEE D3 ON SHEET A -803. 7) GC TO PROVIDE 24 "X30" SHELF AT 4' -6" AFF WITH DOG -EAR IN MANAGER OFFICE. 8) EXACT PLACEMENT OF FREESTANDING FIXTURES TO BE DETERMINED OWNER, TYP. 9) PROVIDE 3/4 "x6 FIRE TREATED PLYWOOD BACKBOARD. 10) SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. FIXTURE LEGEND NAME CASHWRAP - 3 POS (ACCESSIBLE INCLUDED) CASH WRAP LAMP CASH WRAP PROMO PANEL BACKWRAP CABINETS BACKWRAP GRAPHICS iPHONE DISPLAY LAP TOP FLAT PANEL TV CCTV BACKBOARD MICROWAVE REFRIGERATOR UNDER COUNTER LOCKER WATER COOLER STORAGE RACK PRINTER @ BACKWRAP D S- 317 FURNITURE AND FIXTURE PLAN QTY. 2 4 0 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 4 2 SCALE 1/4' = 1' -0" Carter:Burgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (714) 327 -1600 FAX: (714) 327 -1601 - 06- 05-08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT NO. DATE 164.15 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 DESIGNED BY: CHECKED BY: DRAWN BY: PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE: COPYRIGHT 0 zoos CARTER & BURGESS, INC. at &t NORTH ISSUES /REVISIONS DESCRIPTION FURNITURE AND FIXTURING PLAN APPROVED BY: 444017.011.037.0001 1/4" = 1' -0" A -105 CEILING TIES SPACING SIZE MAXIMUM SPAN MAXIMUM SPAN SPACING SPAN _ SPAN / \ • 362S125 -18 16" 8' -9" 24" 7' -g" 3' -6" 362S125 -30 16" 1O' -2" I 9' -2" 3' -6" 600S125 -30 _ 11' -9" 24" 10' -7" L , -� t!i i_ 7 \ MEL CEILING TIES SPACING SIZE MAXIMUM SPAN MAXIMUM SPAN SPACING SPAN SPACING SPAN / \ • 362S125 -18 16" 8' -9" 24" 7' -g" 3' -6" 362S125 -30 16" 1O' -2" 24" 9' -2" 3' -6" 600S125 -30 16" 11' -9" 24" 10' -7" I i_ 7 \ CEILING TIES SPACING SIZE MAXIMUM SPAN MAXIMUM SPAN SPACING SPAN SPACING SPAN 4' -0" 362S125 -18 16" 8' -9" 24" 7' -g" 3' -6" 362S125 -30 16" 1O' -2" 24" 9' -2" 3' -6" 600S125 -30 16" 11' -9" 24" 10' -7" (E) ACT-Q/ AFF 4 5 SEE R_C.PLAN tj EL +o' -o" VANISHED FLOOR SEE R.C.P. P -7 (WIREMOLD) INTERIOR ELEVATION AT SALE AREAS (E) ACT AFF 8' - 0" AFF: _ MARLTTE EL +0' -0" FINISHED FLOOR 6" SHEET VINYL BASE, TYP. P -7 INTERIOR ELEVATION AT SALE AREAS 4" BACKSPLASH, PL -1 r SHELF PL -1 COUNTERTOP MICRO. r 0 ,REF./ X Al OPEN OFFICE ELEVATION A RESTROOM ELEVATION 4/3" SUPPORT, RUBBER BASE (RB -1) PL -1 IF REQUIRED P -3 (FROM 3' -0" AFF. UP) & P -5 (FROM 3' -0' AFF. DOWN) -I P -3 )--� SCALE: 1/4'= 1'-0" SEE R.C.P. MARUTE AND TRAP W /SUP JOINT FITTING "TRUEBRO" MODEL NO. LAV -GUARD (800) 340-5969 OR APPROVED EQUAL 1:1 1-0'-0" I F / FINISHED FLOOR 6" SHEET VINYL BASE, TYP. P -3 (FROM 3' -0" AFF. UP) & P -5 (FROM 3' -0' AFF. DOWN) -I P -3 (WIREMOLD) B RSF -013 J Q U RSF -013 NOTE: ELEVATION SHOWN WITHOUT CASHWRAP FIXTURE NOTE: ELEVATION SHOWN WITHOUT CASHWRAP FIXTURE 4 ) SEE R.C. PLAN V EL +0' -0" FINISHED FLOOR SEE R.C.P. 18" VERTICAL GRAB BAR IF REQUIRED SCALE: 1/4 "= 1'-0" WC RUBBER BASE (RB -1) MARUTE EL +0' -0" FINISHED FLOOR 6" SHEET VINYL BASE, TYP. SCALE: 1/4 "= 1'-0' LOCKER �, OPEN OFFICE ELE. �J SEE R.C.P. EL +0' -0" FINISHED FLOOR 6" SHEET VINYL BASE, TYP. DO 311 SCALE: 1/4 1'-0" GENERAL NOTE: FIXTURES FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER'S FIXTURE VENDOR, SHOWN IN ELEVATIONS FOR COORDINATION ONLY. SEE SHEET A -105 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. DATA EQUIPMENT BY AT &T IT, RACK BY GC. GC TO PROVIDE 4'X6'X" FIRE TREATED PLYWOOD FOR TENANT'S TELCO EQUIPMENT - PAINT TO MATCH ADJACENT WALLS. L - CEILING WHERE OCCURS 4 -18 SCREWS METAL STUDS SEE SCHEDULE CON'. TRACK STUD CEILING JOIST ® 1 6 " O.C. SEE TABLE BELOW IlE �r METAL STUD BLOCKING FLAT CONTINUOS JOIST WITH #8 0 EACH C.J. 0 6' -0" O.C. CEILING DETAIL Ifis DISPLAY CONDITIONS / INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY NTS CEILING JOISTS All THE METAL STUDS USED SHALL BE "S" STUD MEMBER WITH IC80 APPROVE NUMBER 4943P OR APPROVED EQUAL PER SSMA 2. WHERE CEILING SUPPORT TOILET PARTITIONS OCCUR, USE 600S200 -43 ® 16" O.C. UP TO 16' -0" MAXIMUM SPAN 3. SPANS SHALL BE CONTINUOUS LATERAL SUPPORT OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE. 1 4. WEB CRIPPLING SHALL HAVE 31�" BEARING LENGTH © EACH END. 5. JOIST SHALL BE BRACED AGAINST ROTATION AT ALL SUPPORT BY TRACK OR BLOCKING. 6. PROVIDE 4 - #8 SCREWS AT EACH JOIST CROSSING, UNO. 7. BRIDGING RECOMMENDATIONS: SPAN (FT) MINIMUM NUMBER OF ROWS UP TO 14 FT 1 ROW AT MID -SPAN 14 FT TO 20 FT 2 ROWS AT POINTS 20 FT TO 26 FT 3 ROWS AT YY4 POINTS NOTES: 1. ALL NON GLARE FINISHES. 2. CHARARCTERS ON CONTRASTING BACKGROUND. 3. USE CONTRACTED 2 BRAILLE. 4. BRAILLE,* GRADE II, DOTS = O.C. IN EAC CELL WITH " SPACE BETWEEN , RAISED " k TACTILE EGRESS SIGNAGE — REVIE WED, OD: COM SEE SCHEDULE 6 CI ® 11"113 SALES AREA BUILDING DIVISION '. FIELD VERIFY ELEV. UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURE REFER TO RCP FOR HEIGHT 1jtCE PARTITION WALL, EL +O' -0' FINISH FLOOR DETAIL 5 tr TYPE X DRYWALL TAPE FLOAT & PAINT INVENTORY ROOM RESTROOM .... UNISEX .... WALL MOUNTED SIGNAGE NTS Q 2" MIN. TYP. DOOR MOUNTED SIGNAGE MOUNTING FOR SIGNAGE DOOR MOUNTED SIGNAGE UNISEX -12" DIAMETER CIRCLE 1/4" THK. W/1/4" THICK TRIANGLE SUPER IMPOSED WITHIN THE CIRCLE. THE COLOR AND CONTRAST OF THE SIGN SHALL DISTINCTIVELY CONTRAST WITH THE COLOR AND CONTRAST OF THE DOOR. SIGNS ARE CENTERED ON THE DOOR 60" FROM THE FLOOR. WALL MOUNTED SIGNAGE THE INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY IS INSTALLED ON THE WALL ADJACENT TO THE LATCH SIDE OF THE DOOR. THE BORDER DIMENSION OF THIS PICTOGRAM SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 6" IN HEIGHT. WHERE THERE IS NO WALL SPACE ON THE LATCH SIDE, INCLUDING AT DOUBLE LEAF DOORS, SIGNS SHALL BE PLACED ON THE NEAREST ADJACENT WALL, PREFERABLY ON THE RIGHT. A VERBAL DESCRIPTION AS TO THE USE OF THE FACILITY (SUCH AS "MENS") SHALL BE PLACED DIRECTLY BELOW THE SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY. THE CHARACTERS AND BACKGROUND OF THE SIGN IS EGGSHELL, MATTE, OR OTHER NON -GLARE FINISH AND THE COLOR AND CONTRAST OF THE SIGN DISTINCTIVELY CONTRASTS WITH THE COLOR AND CONTRAST OF THE WALL THE COLOR OF THE SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY CONSISTS OF A WHITE FIGURE ON A BLUE BACKGROUND. ALL SIGNS SHALL HAVE GRADE II BRAILLE. r aA 36 "S.M. 18" `L Al 42" S.M. " X 36" /mac 3 co TOII. ET (WAB BAR 18" VERTICAL GRAB BAR IF REQUIRED © o i \ 2.71) N I 7 �- '12' �N N r i \ / MAX �` GRAB RA R, TOILET PAPER, RECESSED ; WIlI DISPENSER WASTE JL/NBG ROLL RECEPTACLE TOILET TISSUE DI SPEI IW ER c —) ct N • I ✓AL 110U1/TCD XIII( TOILE SEA1 COVER DISPENSER 0 MOUNTING HEIGHTS FOR TOILET ACCESSORIES & PLUMBING FIXTURES Nis LIL;HI ,S L ✓ITCH COPYRIGir 0 2006 CARTER & BURGESS. INC. at &t Carter:Burgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (714) 327 -1 600 FAX: (714) 327 -1601 ISSUES /REVISIONS - 06 -05 -08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 16415 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 See DESIGNED BY: CHECKED BY: DRAWN BY: PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE: APPROVED BY: 444017.011.037.0001 AS NOTED INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A -301 Part 1 Bidding and Contract Requirements 00700 General Conditions A. The AIA A201 "General Conditions for Construction," 1987 edition shall govern the work. B. The following supplements the AIA A201 "General Conditions for Construction ", 1987 edition. All unaltered provisions shall remain in effect. 1. Delete subparagraph 3.7.1, and substitute the following: a. "3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner will pay for the general plan check fee. The Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and for all other permits, governmental fees, licenses, and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work." 2. Add the following new subparagraph to 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES: a. "3.12.12 If the Contractor fails to review Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples to determine their responsiveness to the Contract Documents, or fails to substantially respond to Architect's review comments prior to resubmittal, or if he makes submittals which substantially alter the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the charges of the Architect for extra services required to review such submittals." Part 2 Technical Specifications Division 1 General Requirements 01100 Summary A. This specification includes the requirements for several Cingular Wireless LLC Projects; consequently this specification may contain additional elements that do not apply to this particular project. Where noted in the specifications, please refer to the Drawings to determine if the specified element applies to this Project. B. Special Work Requirements: 1. Work shall be phased such that each specific area shall be protected, demolished and complete in least amount of time possible. 2. Daily activities must be respected by the Contractor with the least amount of disturbance to Cingular Wireless LLC and other building occupants. 3. Use of Premises: a. Conform to the requirements of the building owner. C. Separate Work: 1. Items noted "NIC" (Not In Contract) or .FO10. (Furnished by Owner; installed by Owner) will be furnished and installed by others 2. Perform work so as to allow the performance of work by other contractors. 3. The following will be furnished and installed by others: a. Cingular Graphics (other than hard signage installed by the GC, or as required by local code) b. Bill Payment Machine (G.C. to provide and coordinate electrical and data requirements). D. Products Furnished by Owner for Installation by the Contractor (FOIC): 1. Coordinate work to facilitate installation of products furnished by the Owner for Installation by the Contractor. 2. The following are elements which are furnished by Cingular Wireless LLC Wireless for Installation by the Contractor: a. Wall Units. b. Live Bar c. Modular SSA Desks d. Cash Wrap Fixtures e. Others as indicated on Drawings 3. Cingular Wireless LLC Wireless Responsibilities: a. Arrange and pay for owner supplied fixture(s) and product deliveries to the contractor on site. b. Upon delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor. c. Submit claims for transportation damage. d. Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective, or missing items. e. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections, and service where required. 4. Contractor's Responsibilities: a. Review shop drawings, product data, and samples. b. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness, for damage, jointly with Cingular Wireless LLC. GC to coordinate and provide forklift and all labor as required for offloading of owner provided fixtures on site. Coordinate deliveries with FTC. c. Handle, store, coordinate, install, and provide all labor and material to finish product installation. d. Repair or replace items damaged by Work of this Contract. e. Coordinate and provide for the installation of all fixture requirements including power and data, within all new or renovated areas. 5. The following are elements which are to be both provided and installed by the general contractor (FCIC). a. All carpet and VCT (all flooring unless otherwise noted) b. All wood flooring (if applicable) c. All light fixtures d. All signage (other than store graphics provided by Cingular) e. Drop box to be furnished and installed by G.C. (when indicated on plans) Installation includes all modification of Storefront as required. f. Microwave and Refrigerator as specified in section 11450 -13 Applications for Payment: Submit applications for Payment in accordance with the General Conditions Coordination: 1. Coordinate work to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. 2. Coordinate space requirements for mechanical and electrical Systems. Make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently, and maximize accessibility for maintenance, repair, and other installations. 3. Execute cutting and patching to integrate elements of the Work. Remove ill -timed and defective work and replace with new work conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Uncover defective and nonconforming work and furnish samples as required for testing. 5. Seal penetrations through floors, walls, and ceilings. E. F. 01312 Project Meetings A. Preconstruction Meeting(s): Prior to the start of work, Contractor and Cingular Wireless LLC shall have a preconstruction meeting to determine the exact sequencing and phasing of construction. GC shall also schedule a preconstruction meeting with FTC. B. Progress Meetings: Attend progress meetings called by Cingular Wireless LLC or Architect throughout the progress of the work. C. Pre - installation Meeting: Convene a pre - installation meeting when it is specified for a certain portion of the Work. Require attendance of entities directly affecting, or affected by, the work of the Section. 01330 Submittal Procedures A. Submittal Procedure: 1. Identify deviations from Contract Documents. Leave space for Contractor and Cingular Wireless LLC review stamps. 2. Review and sign each submittal prior to submittal to Cingular Wireless LLC. Unsigned submittals may be returned without review. 3. Unless specified otherwise, submit the number of submittals the Contractor requires, plus one that will be retained by Cingular Wireless LLC. 4. Transmit each item to Cingular Wireless LLC, unless directed otherwise. Include project name, Contractor name, subcontractor or supplier name, and drawing sheet, detail number, or specification section number corresponding to the submittal as appropriate. 5. Make submittals as required to cause no delay in the Work. Allow sufficient time for possible revision and resubmittal of rejected submittals. Coordinate submittal of related items. 6. Revise and resubmit rejected submittals as required to obtain approval, identifying changes made since previous submittal. B. Progress and Value Schedules: Submit the following to Cingular Wireless LLC. 1. Progress Schedule: Submit horizontal bar chart with separate bar for each major trade or operation, identifying first workday of each week. 2. Schedule of Values: a. Submit typed schedule on form provided by Cingular Wireless LLC. b. Subdivide into each major trade or category of work. c. Include a line item amount for each Allowance if applicable. d. Include in each line item a directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. 3. Submit progress and value schedules in duplicate within 5 business days after Notice to Proceed. 4. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment; revised schedules shall reflect changes, including change orders, since previous submittal. C. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Submit shop drawings in the form of one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction. b. Unless specified otherwise, shop drawings shall show quantities, materials, methods of assembly, adjacent construction, dimensions, and all other appropriate information to fully illustrate the work. 2. Product Data: a. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options and other data; supplement manufacture's standard data to provide information unique to the work. b. Submit the number of copies that Contractor requires, plus 2 copies that will be retained by Cingular Wireless LLC. 3. Samples: a. Submit samples as specified in the technical sections. b. Include identification on each sample giving full information. c. Submit three samples, one of which will be retained by Cingular Wireless LLC, unless indicated otherwise in the technical section. D. Certificates: Submit the original signed version to Cingular Wireless LLC. 01450 Quality Control A. Standards: Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Perform all work to meet or exceed the requirements of all applicable codes, ordinances, laws, regulations, safety orders, and directives from authorities having jurisdiction over the work. 2. Accessibility: All equipment, accessories and work shall be in accordance with all Federal, State and local codes with respect to handicap accessibility, and with The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and/or the .Texas Accessibility Standards. as required. The more restrictive code shall apply. C. Perform work with persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. D. Install products in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Where conflict exists between manufacturer's recommendations and the specified requirements, notify the Architect immediately. E. Examination Prior to Installation: 1. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. 2. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls A. Temporary Utilities: Provide temporary utilities, services, and construction as required to perform the work. Coordinate all temporary facilities and controls with Cingular Wireless LLC and the building owner. 1. Electricity and Gas: Connect to existing service. Cingular Wireless LLC will pay costs of energy used. Take measures to conserve energy. 2. Lighting: Permanent lighting may be used during construction. Provide additional temporary lighting as required. Maintain lighting and make routine repairs. 3. Heating and Ventilation: Permanent system may be used. Cingular Wireless LLC will pay for the cost of energy used. Maintain system during operation. 4. Telephone. 5. Water: Utilize existing facilities. Cingular Wireless LLC will pay for water used. B. Controls: 1. Dust Control: Provide positive methods and apply dust control materials to minimize raising dust from construction operations, and provide positive means to prevent airborne dust from dispersing into the atmosphere. 2. Water Control: Comply with applicable jurisdictional requirements regarding water usage, conservation, detention, pollution, and permits. C. Maintain pedestrian and vehicular access to site and within site to provide uninterrupted access: 1. To temporary construction facilities, storage and work areas. 2. For use by persons and equipment involved in construction of Project. 3. For use by emergency vehicles. 4. To minimize impact on adjacent operations. D. Fire Safety: Comply with applicable provisions of UFC Article 87 for fire safety during demolition and construction operations. E. Temporary Construction: 1. Obtain approval from Cingular Wireless LLC for all modifications to existing systems or facilities not indicated. 2. Remove temporary systems or facilities when use is no longer required_ Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary systems or facilities. F. Construction Cleaning: 1. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish. Periodically dispose of off -site. 2. Maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations_ 3. Sweep & clean site daily 01600 Product Requirements A. Delivery, Storage, and Handling: 1. Transport and handle products by methods to avoid product damage. 2. Manufactured products shall remain in manufacturer's containers or packaging, until ready for installation. 3. Unless specified otherwise, store manufactured products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Product Options and Substitutions: 1. Furnish products specified, except where "or approved" is used, substitute products may be submitted to the Architect, through Cingular Wireless LLC for approval. 2. Substitutions will be considered only for the following reasons: a. A product becomes unavailable due to no fault of the Contractor. b. Subsequent information or changes indicate that the specified product will not perform as intended. c. A substitute product will be in Cingular Wireless LLC's best interest. 3. Document each substitution request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with contract documents. 4. A substitution request constitutes a representation that Contractor: a. Has investigated proposed product and has determined that it meets or exceeds, in all respects, the specified product. b. Shall provide the same warranty for substitution as for specified product. c. Will coordinate installation and make other changes that may be required for work to be complete in all respects. d. Waives claims for additional costs that may subsequently become apparent. e. Agrees to pay all costs of redesign related to the substitution. 5. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals. 6. Architect will determine acceptability of proposed substitution, and will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection within a reasonable time. 01735 Patching and Repair A. Repair existing surfaces and construction as necessary to make Work complete, with all components matching and consistent. B. Provide a smooth, even, and invisible transition to new construction. When finished surfaces are cut so that an invisible transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along the nearest break line, joint, or corner. o Procedures Closeout P edures c A. Final Cleaning: 1. Thoroughly clean all surfaces prior to final acceptance. 2. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. B. Closeout Procedures: General Conditions o the 1. Comply with procedures stated in en I rid f Contract for Substantial and a PY p Final Completion. 2. Submit all certificates of approval issued by the governing authorities, including, without limitation, the following: a. Certificate of occupancy. 3. Prior to final payment, submit the following affidavits using the forms listed below: a. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims AIA Document G706. b. Consent of Surety to Final Payment AIA Document G707. c. Contractor's lien release, and lien releases from each subcontractor; Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens AIA Document 0706A 4. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted contract sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. C. Project Record Documents: 1. Maintain a complete set of record drawings that clearly and neatly indicate exact installed locations of items that will be concealed in the work such as conduit, piping, ducts, reinforcing, mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar items. Show all changes from the contract documents, and all uncovered existing conditions that will be subsequently concealed. 2. Record drawings shall be used for no other purpose and shall be stored separately from those used for construction. 3. Documents shall be in same format as the Construction Documents. 4. Keep documents current; do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded. 5. At Contract Closeout, submit documents with transmittal letter containing date, Project title, Contractor's name and address, list of documents, and signature of Contractor. D. Submittals: In addition to submittals required by the Conditions of the Contract, and submittals required by Section 01330, furnish submittals required by goveming authorities, and submit a final statement of accounting giving total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit complete data for each piece of equipment and component used in the work. 2. Submit operation and maintenance data for mechanical and electrical systems. 3. Arrange in a binder with a section for each system. F. Warranties, Guarantees and Bonds: 1. Submit all manufacturer warranties. 2. Furnish written guarantee, from each subcontractor performing work covered by the additional guarantee requirements specified in the technical sections. Unless specified or approved otherwise, the guarantee shall commence on the date of the Certificate of Occupancy. 3. Each guarantee shall be signed, and shall state that the work under guarantee was installed in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that the work will be free from defects in workmanship and material for the period of time specified, and that all defects will be promptly repaired without additional cost to Cingular Wireless LLC. G. Spare Parts and Maintenance Manuals: Furnish products, spare parts, and maintenance materials in quantities specified in each Section, in addition to that used for construction of Work. Coordinate with Cingular Wireless LLC; deliver to Project Site and obtain receipt prior to final payment. Division 2 Site Work 02225 Selective Demolition A. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner as required to accommodate the work. Where demolition exceeds that indicated, verify such demolition with the Architect prior to proceeding. B. Protect existing structural members. Contact the Architect prior to modifying structural members beyond the extent indicated. Cease operations and notify the Architect immediately if continued demolition operations might endanger the existing structure. C. During demolition operations, notify the Architect of all conditions that differ substantially from those indicated, specified, or expected. Notify the Architect if previously unknown operational, or potentially operational elements, are uncovered during demolition operations. Perform no demolition in such areas, unless approved by the Architect. D. Provide temporary shoring as required to support existing construction against movement or overload during demolition operations, until permanent supports are in place. e take possession n materials bein E. Except where noted or specified otherwise, tak p n f g demolished and immediately remove from site. Do not overload existing construction to remain with demolished materials. F. Carefully remove, store, and protect all materials and components to be reused. G. Where possible without damage, remove, store, and protect existing materials and components not noted for removal, which if removed, would facilitate the new construction and reconditioning. H. Carefully remove, protect, and turn over as directed, materials and components claimed by Cingular Wireless LLC or the building owner for salvage. Prior to demolition, contact Cingular Wireless LLC to determine which items will be claimed. I. Where cut edges of the existing construction will be visible in the completed work, cut in uniform straight lines. Concrete and masonry shall be saw cut or core drilled. J. Repair all demolition performed in excess of that required, at no additional cost to the Cingular Wireless LLC. Division 3 Concrete 03547 Cementitious Underlayment A. Summary: 1. Leveling of existing cast -in -place concrete slabs. 2. Ramps and tapers to align finish materials. B. Unit Price: 1. Item: State the price for leveling and filling existing exposed floor substrate to specified tolerance. Price shall include all labor materials and equipment necessary to recondition the floor including preparation, priming and filling as specified. 2. Unit Measure: a. Per square foot to a depth of % inch. C. Submittals: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data and installation instructions. D. Materials: 1. Fast - Setting Self Leveling Underlayment System: Self- leveling, pourable, cement based material, minimum 28 day compressive strength 4, 500 p si when tested in accordance with ASTM C109; minimum bond strength 200 psi; one of the following. a. "Ultra /Plan" by Mapei Corporation.; 800 -42- MAPEI. b. "SDL" Self - Leveling Underlayment Concrete by Ardex Inc.; 412 - 264 -4240. c. "Level -Right FS -10" by Maxxon; 800 - 356 -7887. 2. Fast - Setting Trowelable Underlayment System: a. "Quickcem Top 102" or "Novo /Plan 1" by Mapei Corporation; 800 -42- MAPEI. b. "SD -P" Fast- Setting Underlayment. by Ardex Inc.; 412 -264 -4240. c. "Euco- Speed" by Euclid Chemical Company; 800- 321 -7628. 3. Accessories: Furnish primers, patching compounds, and sand fillers as recommended by the underlayment manufacturer for the conditions of the project. E. Mixing 1. Thoroughly mix underlayment materials for each type of product in proper proportions to achieve smooth homogeneous mix, free of lumps. F. Preparation: 1. Ensure that subfloor is clean, dry, hard, sound, and free of oils, or other substance that would affect proper bonding and curing. Shotblast surface as necessary to achieve clean surface. 2. Verify that all areas to be leveled are at or below final design elevation. G. Application: 1. Install trowelable underlayment at locations where slopes are indicated and at other locations as appropriate to installation conditions. Install self - leveling underlayment at other locations as necessary to correct slab flatness and levelness. 2. Set screeds, markers, and reference blocks. Set screeds at all construction and control joints to establish weakened plane joints in underlayment. 3. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Where subsequent finishing of the material is required, float to level surface. Do not over trowel. 4. Apply primer to all areas to receive underlayment; repeat application if necessary to achieve proper build. 5. Mix materials and pour or pump and squeegee into place to achieve appropriate thickness. At areas to receive epoxy terrazzo flooring, provide fill thickness as necessary to align epoxy terrazzo flooring with crush line of adjacent carpet surfaces. 6. Cure in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Use no curing compounds that would affect the bond of subsequent finish materials. 7. Tolerances: "Very flat "; level to within 1/8" in 10 feet. FF 50, FL 30, over test area; FF 25, FL 15, local minimum. Division 4 Masonry Not used Division 5 Metals 05500 Metal Fabrications* A. Summary: Steel fabrications indicated on the Architectural Drawings and not specified in other sections. B. Materials: 1. Steel Plate, Bars, Shapes: ASTM A36. 2. Tubes: ASTM A500 or A501. 3. Pipe: ASTM A53, seamless, Type S, plain end; schedule 40 unless indicated otherwise. 4. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307 C. General Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate as follows, unless specified or indicated otherwise. 1. Verify all dimensions and fabricate to detail with accurate sizes and shapes, straight lines, smooth curves, and sharp angles. 2. Welds shall have sufficient strength to withstand the loads applied. D. Installation: 1. Install metal fabrications in accurate locations shown. Unless indicated otherwise, fabrications shall be installed plumb and level. 2. Provide all anchorage devices as indicated and required for a secure installation. 05700 Ornamental Metal* A. Summary: Poster frame and support indicated on the Drawings. B. Materials: 1. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221. 2. Sheet: ASTM B209. 3. Aircraft Cable: 3/16 inch diameter, plain galvanized steel strand; vinyl covered strand is not acceptable. 4. Ferrules: Aluminum; crimpable; size to match aircraft cable diameter. C. General Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate as follows, unless specified or indicated otherwise. 1. Verify dimensions, and fabricate to detail with accurate sizes and shapes, straight lines, smooth curves, and sharp angles. 2. Fabricate end caps from aluminum sheet; grind and polish caps to low lustre finish. D. Installation: 1, Install poster frames in accurate locations indicated, plumb and level. 2. Cut aircraft cable to appropriate lengths to result in posters provided by others hanging in appropriate positions. Apply ferrules to aircraft cable by crimping once the final position is obtained. 3. Trim cable so as to eliminate unraveling during handling; leave no exposed frayed ends in the finished installation, and with no kinks or twists. 4. Remove and replace any aircraft cable assembly that does not result in a proper finished installation per these conditions. 5. Provide all anchorage devices as indicated and required for a secure installation. Division 6 Woods and Plastics 06100 Rough Carpentry A. Summary: 1. Blocking and nailers. 2. Terminal backboards. B. Dimension Lumber: 1. Lumber shall be manufactured in accordance with PS 20, and shall be stamped and graded in accordance with WWPA, WCLIB, or NLGA grading rules. 2. Moisture Content: Kiln dried to 19% maximum moisture content, except for material whose least dimension is 4 inches thick or greater. 3. Species: Hem -Fir, Spruce- Pine -Fir (SPF), or Douglas Fir Larch, unless indicated or specified otherwise. 4. Architectural Lumber Grades: Unexposed non - structural wood framing and blocking indicated on the Architectural Drawings shall be graded as follows: a. (2" to 4" thick, 2" to 4" wide): No 2 - Structural Light Framing," or better; "Stud" grade may be used at stud applications. b. (2" to 4" thick, 5" and wider): "No. 2 - Structural Joists and Planks," or better. 5. Treated Wood Blocking a. Provide alkaline copper quaternary (ACQ) treated wood blocking in dimensions noted on the Drawings for all blocking, nailers, etc. called out as treated. Products shall be arsenic - and chromium -free pressure - treated wood produced in accordance with Quality Control Standard ACQ -94. C. Panel Materials: 1. Terminal Backboards: APA AC grade exterior; fire retardant treated. D. Accessories: 1. Fasteners: a. Hot - dipped galvanized or copolymer coated steel for treated wood locations. 2. Treated Wood Fasteners a. Hot -Dip Galvanized conforming to ASTM -A153 (for Hot -Dip fastener products) and ASTM -A653 (Coating Designation G -185 for Hot -Dip connector and sheet products). b. Other fasteners and hardware as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Blocking and Nailers: 1. Wood Blocking: Install wood blocking to receive mechanical fasteners for support of plumbing and electrical fixtures and equipment, cabinets, doorstop plates, toilet and bath accessories, and all other wall and ceiling mounted components. Metal backing may be substituted as specified n Section 09111. F. Interior Plywood: 1. Provide a fire retardant treated plywood terminal backboard for systems where indicated on the drawings. 06400 Architectural Woodwork A. Summary: 1. Plastic laminate casework. 2. Custom display casework 3. Cement countertops. 4. Ornamental metal elements related to custom casework. 5. Standing and running trim, including doorframes. B. Quality Assurance 1. Fabricator: A minimum of 5 years experience in the fabrication of custom architectural woodwork thereof type specified. 2. All Architectural Woodwork shall be under the responsibility of a single fabricator. 3. Qualifications of Installers: Use only journeyman finish carpenters who are thoroughly trained and skilled in the work, and who are completely familiar with the materials and quality standards specified allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of workmen. 4. Unless specified otherwise, perform work in accordance with AWI "Custom" grade standards. C. Referenced Standards 1. American Plywood Association (APA) 2. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI): a. Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program (Current Edition). D. Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings. Indicate materials, components, profiles and configurations, dimensions, fastening methods, jointing details, colors and finishes, and accessories. Details shall be at a minimum sca1le- of 1/2 inch per foot. 2. Product Literature: Submit literature of each hardware component proposed. 3. Samples: a. Painted MDF: Submit 8 x 10 inch samples of each paint color and sheen combination. b. Opaque Finish Wood: Submit 12 -inch long doorframe samples showing the maximum range of graining and surface imperfections to be expected. c. Veneer Paneling: Submit 8 x 10 inch samples of each species, cut, and finish combination for each veneer; include core material. d. Stainless steel: Minimum 12 -inch long tube section with proposed finish. e. Perforated Metal Panel: Minimum 8x 10 with single stiffening angle. E. Materials: 1. Opaque Finish Lumber: AWI Grade II Poplar; optimum moisture content per AWI recommendations. 2. Wood Veneer: Type as scheduled on the Drawings. 3. Plywood: APA rated in accordance with P5 1; 3 /4-inch thick AC exterior grade unless indicated or specified otherwise; touch sanded where plastic laminate veneers are to be applied. 4. Particle Board: ANSI A208.1; grade M -2. Provide quality assurance stamp or manufacturer's certifications as required by local jurisdictional code authorities. 5. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2 Class MD. 6. Prefinished Board: Low - pressure melamine over particleboard or hardboard core; gray color. 7. Plastic Laminate: a. Brands and colors as scheduled on Drawings. b. Exposed: NEMA LD -3; general and vertical grade, c. Backing Sheets: NEMA LD -3; backing grade; undecorated. 8. Metals: a. Aluminum: 1) Extrusions: ASTM B221. 2) Sheet: ASTM B209. b. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167 Type 302 or 304. 9. Paint Systems: a. M -1 and M -2: Powder coat metallic systems as scheduled on the Drawings over metal substrates. Provide spray applied Dupont Imron urethane metallic paint to match at MDF applications. Include primer as recommended by the manufacturer for the substrate. b. M -3 and SF -1: 1) Primer: Tnemec "Series N27 Typoxy" epoxy- polyamide coating or approved. 2) Urethane paint System: Tnemec Series 75 Endura - Shield III Acrylic polyurethane enamel or approved; semi -gloss sheen; custom color as scheduled. F. Accessory Materials: 1. Cabinet Hardware: a. Pulls: 4 inch wire pulls; brushed chrome finish. b. Drawer Slides: Full extension ball bearing; clear zinc finish; rail mount; Accuride, or approved; load rating as required for the application. 1) Light Duty Rating (drawers 12 inches wide or less): Accuride 2632; 65 Ib BIFMA load rating 2) Medium Duty Rating (drawers 32 inches wide or less): Accuride 7432; 100 Ib BIFMA load rating. 3) Heavy Duty Rating (drawers 42 inches wide or less): Accuride 3640; 200 Ib BIFMA load rating. c. Drawer Locks: Olympus Lock or approved; 5 pin tumbler cylinder locks; ANSI Grade 1; configuration to suit condition; keyed alike as directed, and masterkeyed. Furnish two keys for keyed alike group, and four masterkeys; finish to match pulls. d. Concealed Hinges: European style; concealed; self - closing; 125 degree of opening, Blum, Grass or Hafele. e. Cabinet Shelf Brackets: Metal pin style support; chrome finish. 2. Wall Shelf Hardware: As scheduled on Drawings. 3. Contact Bond Adhesive: Water based type. 4. Wiring Grommets: "TG Series" by Doug Mockett and Company, Inc., Manhattan Beach CA.; size to match application; black color, unless indicated otherwise. 5. Wall Shelf Hardware: a. Brackets: Knape & Vogt No. 185 Anochrome finish; length as appropriate for shelving indicated. b. Standards: Knape & Vogt #85 Anochrome finish. 6. Precast Cement Countertops: "Meazza Stone "; available from Gravel Pit Design Studio (Contact 206- 406- 2555); color and texture to match the approved sample. 7. Perforated Metal: Steel; 14 gage with stiffening angles; perforation pattern as indicated; powder coated finish as scheduled and specified above. G. Veneer Panel Fabrication: 1. Fabricate veneer paneling to AWI "Premium" grade standards. 2. Fabricate panels with wood veneer over medium density particleboard core. 3. Provide solid wood edging at veneer panels edges subject to abuse, unless approved otherwise. 4. Arrange veneers in the directions indicated: 5. Unexposed panel backs shall have wood veneer balance sheets with seal coat on the back of each panel. 6. Fabricate panels with joints accurately matched, tightly fitted. H. Standing and Running and Trim Fabrication: 1. Shop cut and mill all lumber to the shapes indicated. 2. Shop fit and assemble to the greatest extent possible. 3. Mill and assemble built-up sections. All glue lines shall be free of squeeze-out where P 9 q transparent finishes are to be applied. 4. Tolerances for overall assembly dimensions shall be within 1/32 of an inch. 5. Fabricate frames from single length pieces, without joints, for each straight length. o solid stock, except composite construction consisting Fabricate from each section from p p g of fabricator selected solid wood clad with specified transparent finish veneer may be used. P P Y Exposed edges shall consist of minimum 1/8 -inch thick solid wood to match the veneer. 7. Back or kerf cut all trim greater than 2 inch in width, except terminate before exposed ends. I. Casework Fabrication: 1. General Fabrication Requirements: a. Fabricate to the configurations indicated, unless approved otherwise on the shop drawings. b. Provide openings in casework for the incorporation of all electrical and mechanical components. Openings for all plumbing equipment shall be cut from templates obtained from the plumbing equipment installer. c. Provide concealed access to casework electrical fixtures and wiring. d. Unless indicated or approved otherwise, provide adjustable base to provide level installation that accommodates variations in floor levelness. e. Shop assemble casework to the greatest practical extent f. Adjustable Shelves: All casework shelves shall be adjustable, unless otherwise noted. Provisions for shelf adjustment shall be by drillings at 2 inches on center in the cabinet body for the placement of shelf support brackets. Provide 4 supports for each shelf. Drillings shall be in straight even lines. g. Provide all hardware, fasteners, and exposed trim. 2. Plastic Laminate Casework Construction: a. Fabricate casework in accordance with AWI standard section 400; custom grade. b. Design: AWI Flush Overlay design, unless indicated otherwise. Joint between exposed doors, drawer faces, and countertop edges shall be 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16. c. Exposed Surfaces: Plastic laminate clad with PVC or self edging as necessary to exactly match plastic laminate, unless otherwise indicated; provide hardwood trim at locations indicated. d. "Inside" Exposed Surfaces of Shelving Units and Cabinets Without Doors: Plastic laminate finished board, with exposed edges banded with plastic laminate self edging or PVC tape to match face color. e. Semi - Exposed Surfaces: Prefinished board, unless indicated otherwise. f. Provide vertical grade plastic laminate, except use general purpose grade at countertops. g. Backs of Doors and Drawers: Plastic laminate. h. Particleboard shall be minimum 314" thick unless indicated otherwise. Shelves shall be 1" thick, minimum. 3. Plastic Laminate Countertops: a. Fabricate countertops from particleboard and general purpose grade plastic laminate in the shapes indicated. b. Where countertops are indicated with sinks, use exterior grade plywood in lieu of particleboard. 4. Wall and Closet Shelf Fabrication: Fabricate from plastic laminate finished plywood; edge banded with matching plastic laminate edging, unless indicated otherwise. 5. Hardware: a. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all drawers shall be equipped with standard full extension slides. b. Install hardware straight and true and in perfect alignment horizontally and vertically with adjacent casework and hardware. 0. Carefully fit and securely attach cabinet hardware in accordance with manufacturers' printed instructions, and exercise caution not to mar or injure finish surfaces. J. Shop Applied Transparent Finish: 1. Shop finish wood surfaces and wood doors indicated to receive transparent finish. 2. Sand exposed and semi - exposed wood surfaces smooth, always sanding in the direction of the wood grain. 3. Sand exposed transparent finish wood surfaces to AWI "Premium" grade standards. Sand all semi - exposed transparent finish wood surfaces to AWI "Custom" grade standards. 4. Fill depressions and imperfections with color matched putty, except imperfections shall not exceed AWI Premium grade standards. 5. Transparent Finish Coating: Spray apply in accordance with AWI Finish System TR -2, Premium Grade (catalyzed lacquer) or AWI Finish System TR -4, Premium Grade (conversion varnish); satin sheen; stain colors as scheduled. K. Metal Fabrication: 1. Accurately fabricate work to the configurations indicated; fit to field conditions. 2. Fabricate with clean lines, and free of bends and twists. Curved surfaces shall have smooth and uniform radiuses. Flat surfaces shall form true planes, free of ail canning. 3. Leave no open joints, except where indicated or required for expansion and contraction. Exposed joints shall be uniform, straight, and hairline. 4. Welding and Brazing: a. Limit welding and brazing to locations or methods where weld and brazing marks will not be visible in the finished work. b. The use of paint coatings to conceal welding or brazing discoloration is not acceptable, c. Finish brazed and welded areas to match adjacent surfaces. 5. Unless indicated otherwise, provide concealed fasteners wherever possible_ Where not possible, exposed fasteners shall match material and finish of adjacent finish materials. 6. Use compatible materials, or provide isolation of dissimilar materials. 7. Material thicknesses indicated are minimum. Provide heavier material as necessary to meet the specified fabrication requirements. 8. Finishes: a. Aluminum: Paint finishes as indicated and specified above. b. Stainless Steel: #4 finish in accordance with the NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual. L. Casework Installation: 1. Coordinate casework installation with work of other trades for final electrical and mechanical connections. 2. Install all casework accurately, scribed plumb, square, and level, and permanently secured in precise position as indicated on the Drawings. 3. The casework installation shall be made complete with all required fastenings, clip angles, braces, anchors, adjustable levelers, and other fittings as required to render the work rigid and secure. 4. All fasteners securing casework shall be in concealed or semi - concealed locations, unless approved otherwise. 5. Avoid damaging finished surfaces. Repair or replace all damaged materials and surfaces in a manner approved by the Architect. 6. Upon completion of work, (and if requested; in the presence of the Cingular manager), demonstrate hardware to work freely as intended. Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection 07210 - Building Insulation A. Summary: This Section includes building insulation. B. Submittals 1. Product Data: Submit product data for each product indicated. C. Quality Assurance 1. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source. 2. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire - test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface- burning characteristics by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. D. Products 1. INSULATING MATERIALS General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards and, for preformed units, in sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. 2. Foil- Faced, Flexible Glass -Fiber Batt Insulation: Complying with ASTM C 665, Type III; faced on one side with foil- scrim -kraft vapor retarder; with maximum flame- spread and smoke - developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; and of the following properties: a. Nominal density of not less than 1.5 lb /cu. ft. (24 kg /cu. m) nor more than 1.7 lb /cu. ft. (26 kg /cu. m), thermal resistivity of 4 deg F x h x sq. ft. /Btu x in. at 75 deg F (27.7 K x mIW at 24 deg C). 3. Auxiliary Insulating Materials a. Vapor Retarder Tape: Minimum 5 mil tri- directional, reinforced, dead soft, aluminum foil faced tape with minimum 2 mil rubber or acrylic based adhesive, flame spread rated class A (25 or Less) per ASTM E84 and Classified to UL STD 723 General Use Tape. 4. GC to patch & repair spray fire proofing on structural steel as necessary E. Installation 1. General: Install insulation to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with installation of insulation. 2. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow. 3. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. 4. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Set vapor - retarder -faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces. 6. Maintain integrity of insulation with vapor retarders by taping joints, ruptures and edges of units adjoining other surfaces. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes and similar items penetrating vapor retarder by taping to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor barrier. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work using tape. 7. Install glass fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: a. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. b. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. Delete subparagraph below if no metal - framed wall construction c. For metal- framed wall cavities support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs. 07840 FIRESTOPPING A. Summary: Firestopping material for penetrations in fire -rated construction. B. System Description: 1. Each firestopping system shall be selected to maintain fire rating of the assembly in which it used. 2. Firestopping systems shall be resilient as necessary to accommodate differential movement between assemblies. 3. Where firestopping is used to seal penetrations through floors with waterproof membranes, system shall be selected for compatibility with membrane material. C. Quality Assurance: 1. Prior to installation of fire stopping systems obtain approval from the jurisdictional code PP 9 Y PP jurisdictional for the fire stopping systems and applications proposed. Notify the Architect if approval cannot be obtained. 2. Firestopping: Tested in accordance with ASTM E119, ASTM E814, or UL 1479 to meet the hourly fire ratings of the construction being sealed. Provide F rated assemblies, except where T rated assemblies are required by the code authority. 3. Firestopping systems shall be UL listed assemblies. D. Products: 1. Firestopping Systems: Systems meeting the requirements specified and suitable for the conditions indicated. E. Installation: 1. Provide firestopping at mechanical, electrical, and plumbing penetrations through fire rated floors, walls, and ceilings, and other locations as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Install firestopping in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as necessary to meet the specified fire rating requirements. 3. Where firestopping is used to seal around penetrations through waterproof membranes, install to maintain integrity of waterproof barrier. 4. Patching of Holes in Existing Construction: a. Fill open holes which remain after removal of existing mechanical, electrical, and plumbing components, patch and repair holes as necessary to match the adjacent construction and to maintain the fire rating of the assemblies. Firestopping systems may be used to fill holes which will be concealed in the finish construction. b. Where firestopping systems are used to fill floor openings in occupied areas, provide minimum 16 gage sheet metal covers as necessary to support floor loads and to prevent damage to the fire stopping assemblies. Secure sheet metal as necessary to prevent irregularities from telegraphing through the floor finishes over the sheet metal. 07850 FIRE RATED JOINTS A. Summary: 1. Fire rated construction joint assemblies in fire -rated construction, including joints at the following locations: a. Where partition heads meet the underside of overhead floor or roof construction. b. Where floor and roof construction meets exterior perimeter wall construction. c. Joints in fire rated concrete or masonry walls. 2. Requirements for fire rated construction joint assembly components provided in other Sections. B. References: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a.E119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials a. 2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) a. Standard 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. C. Submittals: 1. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01330. 2. Submit product data for proprietary fire rated materials and components. 3. Submit drawings of each fire rated construction joint assembly proposed, showing all components and installation details. Include test number. D. System Description: 1. Each fire rated construction joint assembly shall be selected to maintain fire rating of the assembly in which it used. 2. Each fire rated construction joint assembly shall be resilient as necessary to accommodate differential movement between assemblies E. Quality Assurance: 1 Fire Rated Construction Joint Assemblies: Successfully tested in accordance with ASTM E119 or UBC Standard 7 -1, including hose stream test, to meet the hourly fire ratings of the construction being sealed. 2. Fire rated construction joint assemblies at partition heads shall have been successfully tested in accordance with the dynamic requirements of UL 2079, including hose stream test, to meet the hourly fire ratings of the construction being sealed. F. Fire Rated Construction Joint Assemblies: One of the following as applicable: 1. Metal Stud Partition Head Construction Joint Assembly: a. System: Based on UL assemblies listed on the Drawings. b. Fire Rated Runner: "Fire Trak" by Fire Trak Corporation, Kimball MN (612- 398 - 7800). c. Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 09250. d. Mineral wool packing material and void fill material per UL rated assemblies for dynamic wall head conditions as detailed in the drawings. 2. Metal Stud Partition Head Construction Joint Assembly: Based on UL assemblies listed on the Drawings. a. Fire Rated Runner: Conform to Section 09111; minimum 20 gage; minimum 2 inch legs. b. Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 09250. c. Restraining Angles: As specified in Section 09111. d. Fill, Void, or Cavity Material: USG Type FC "Fire Code" compound. e. Forming Material: 4 Ibs /cf density; "Thermafiber" Safing insulation by USG Interiors, Inc.; preformed mineral fiber; flame spread of 25 or less and a smoke developed of 50 or less test • accordanc Li AST 84 J.s /cf USG CW40. comma m zoos tem & BURGESS, etc. Carter:43urgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (714) 327 -1600 FAX: (714) 327 -1601 REV:ZAD FOR JUN 1 6 1008 pp City Tukwila - 06-05-08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT NO. DATE 16415 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 DRAWN BY: PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE: at &t ISSUES /REVISIONS DESCRIPTION DESIGNED BY: CHECKED BY: ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS APPROVED BY: 444017.011.037.0001 AS NOTED A -501 3. Concrete or Masonry Wall Partition Head Construction Joint Assembly at Metal Deck with Concrete Fill: a. System: UL System No. HW -D- 0022, or approved; 2 hour fire rating at floors; 1 hour fire rating at roof deck. b. Forming Material: Preformed mineral fiber as listed in the UL assembly; minimum 4 PCF density. c. Fill, Void, or Cavity Material: "Firedam Spray" or "Fire Barrier Spray" by 3M. 4. Concrete or Masonry Wall Partition Head Construction Joint Assembly at Concrete Deck: a. System: UL System No. HW -D- 0023, or approved; 2 hour fire rating at floors; 1 hour fire rating at roof deck. b. Forming Material: Preformed mineral fiber as listed in the UL assembly; minimum 4 PCF density. c. Fill, Void, or Cavity Material: "Firedam Spray" or "Fire Barrier Spray" by 3M. G. Installation: 1. Install construction joint assemblies in accordance with the fire rated assemblies listed, and as necessary to meet the specified fire rating requirements, 2. Coordinate installation of integral components as necessary to ensure the fire rating of the assemblies. 07920 Joint Sealants A. Sealants: 1. Type A - ASTM C834; Tremco "Acrylic Latex Caulk ", Pecora "AC -20", Sonneborn "Sonolac" or approved; standard colors to match adjacent construction. 2. Type S - Neutral Cure Silicone Sealant: Dow Corning "790 Silicone Building Sealant ", or approved. 3. Type Mildew Resistant stant 5' • p Silicone Sealant: Dow Corning "786", approved; or roved USDA approval required; clear. pp B. Accessory Materials: 1. Joint Cleaner: Non - corrosive and non - staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. 2. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyethylene foam; round profile; thickness: 130% of joint width. 3. Bond Breaker: Pressure - sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. C. Preparation: 1. Clean and prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove any loose materials and other foreign matter that might impair adhesion of sealant. 2. Apply masking tightly around joints to protect adjacent surfaces from excess sealant. 3. At wide joints, place backing materials to achieve proper sealant width /depth ratios. Use bond breaker where there is insufficient depth for backing materials. D. Installation: 1. Perform work as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 2. Sealant beads shall have a sectional width to depth ratio of 2 to 1, except no bead shall have a depth greater than 3/4 inch 3. Tool joints concave, unless indicated otherwise. Finish free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. E. Protect sealant in joints subject to dirt, moisture, and traffic during the sealant curing process. Protection shall be able to resist traffic while remaining securely in position. F. Schedule: 1. Type A: Provide at all interior joints, unless specified otherwise. 2- Type S Provide at all exterior joints, unless specified otherwise; custom colors to match the Architect's samples. 3. Type SM: Provide at joints around countertops in wet locations. Division 8 Doors and Windows 08115 Welded Hollow Metal Frames A. Summary: Exterior hollow metal doors and frames, B. References: 1. Steel Door Institute (SDI): SDI -105 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A250.8 - SDI -100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. A366 - Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. b. A569 - Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality. C. Submittals: 1- Product Literature: Submit manufacturer's published literature for doors and frames. D. Quality Assurance: 1. Conform to requirements of ANSI A250.8. 2. Regulatory Requirements: a. Installed frame and door assembly shall conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class indicated. E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Members of the Steel Door Institute and of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturer's, subject to compliance with the specified requirements. F. Materials: 1. Steel Sheet: Cold rolled ASTM A366, or hot rolled pickled and oiled sheet conforming to ASTM A569. G. Doors: 1. ANSI A250.8; Seamless. 2- Minimum 18 -gage face sheets for interior doors; minimum 16 gage face sheets for exterior doors. 3. Core: a. Exterior Doors: Polystyrene or polyurethane foam core. 4. Provide continuously welded seamless edges. No plastic fillers will be accepted. 5. Close top edges of exterior doors flush with steel filler cap; seal joints watertight. 6. Cut mortises for butts using appropriate templates; universal non - handed preparation of doors is not acceptable. H. Frames: 1. Design: Double equal rabbet, unless indicated otherwise; fully welded. 2. Gages: a. Interior Frames: Minimum 16 gage for frames of door openings up to and including 4 feet in width; 14 gage for frames mes re g g greater than 4 feet in width. I. Finish: 1. Exterior Units: Hot dip galvanized zinc coating conforming to ASTM A653 A60 (.60 oz /sq ft. coating weight), with manufacturer's standard rust inhibiting primer. J. Installation of Frames: 1. Install frames in accordance with SDI -105 and in accordance with labeling requirements. 2. Coordinate with wall construction for anchor placement. 3. Where acoustical insulation is indicated, coordinate for installation of acoustical insulation at hollow metal frames as specified in Section 09820. 4. Install accessories. 5. Installation Tolerances; Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 6. Door and hardware installation is specified in Section 08730. 08122 Knock -Down Hollow Metal Frames A. Summary: Interior knock -down prefinished hollow metal frames. B. Submittals: 1. Product Literature: Submit manufacturer's published literature for doors and frames. C. Quality Assurance: Conform to requirements of SDI -100. 1. Regulatory Requirements: a. Installed frame and door assembly shall conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class indicated. Where doors are noted with an hourly fire resistance rating, provide door and frame assemblies labeled by Underwriter's Laboratory, or any other testing laboratory approved by the local code authorities, to meet the hourly fire rating noted. Assemblies shall meet code requirements for positive pressure. D. Knock Down Metal Frames 1. Prefinished Steel Door frames by Timely, Pacoima, CA (818- 896- 3094). 2. Fabrication: a. Frames: ASTM A366; cold rolled sheet steel; 18 -gage minimum. b. Casings: Steel to match frame. c. Roll or break form frame to the shapes indicated. If not otherwise indicated, supply Timely TA -8 standard steel casing. d. Size frame as required to fit wall construction indicated with additional clearance as required to accommodate tile waterproof membrane installed at the wall base. e. Provide 14 gage multi - purpose reinforcing brackets to receive field installed door hardware. Finish: Factory applied baked -on polyester coatings; color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of pre- matched custom finishes. E. Installation of Knock -Down Frames: 1. Install frames in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 2- Coordinate with wall construction to allow secure fastening of frame. 3_ Install roll formed steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to structure and floor. 4. Installation Tolerances: a. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 5. Install casing beads and other accessories. All joints shall be tightly fitted and accurately aligned. 6- Where acoustical insulation is indicated, coordinate for installation of acoustical insulation at hollow metal frames as specified in Section 09820. 1. b. 08210 Wood Doors A. Submittals: 1_ Submit product literature. B. Solid Core Flush Doors: 1. AWI Section 1300, Premium grade. 2- Core: Solid particle board core, unless required otherwise for fire labeling requirements. 3. AWI PC-5 or PC -7. 4. Face Veneer: Paint grade birch. 5. 1 -3/4 Inch thick, unless scheduled otherwise. C. Fabrication: 1. Fabricate doors, to the configurations indicated, in accordance with the AWI standards specified, and to fire rated labeling requirements. 2. Bevel lock and hinge edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches on all single acting doors. 3. Bond edge banding to solid core with hot melt or RF cured adhesive. 4. Prefit and premachine doors for hardware in accordance with AWI 1300 -8 -6. Locate as specified in Section 08739. 5. Flush Door Blocking: For flush doors, provide solid lock blocks and special blocking as required for the hardware components specified elsewhere. Blocking for fire rated doors shall meet the door manufacturer's labeling requirements. 6. Special 'Dutch' Door: Coordinate with specified hardware in Section 08710. D. Installation: 1. Fit and prepare doors for installation in accordance with the door manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Provide clearances of 1/8 inch at jambs and heads and 3/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering, except where threshold is shown or scheduled provide 1/4- inch clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. 08305 ACCESS DOORS A. Quality Assurance: 1. Where access doors are installed in construction with an hourly fire resistance rating, provide door and frame assemblies labeled by Underwriter's Laboratory, Warnock Hersey, or any other testing laboratory approved by the local code authorities to meet the requirements of the fire rated assembly. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Milcor, Inc., Lima, OH. 2. J.L. Industries, Bloomington, MN. 3. Karp Associates, Inc., Maspeth, NY. 4. MM Systems Corporation, Tucker, GA. 5. Nystrom, Minneapolis, MN C. Door Types: 1. Fire Rated Metal Access Door: a. Flush type design. b. 16 gage frame; minimum 20 gage steel welded pan door panel insulated with non- combustible filler c. Self closing and self latching, with interior latch release d. Fully concealed pin type hinges or continuous piano hinge, 175 degree opening. e. Ring turn latch. 2. Non Rated Concealed Drywall Access Door: a. Recessed type design. b. Minimum 13 gage steel frame; minimum 16 gage steel door panel recessed to receive drywall. c. Integral attachment flange and drywall bead for flush installation. d. Fully concealed pivot rod hinge. e. Latches: Screw driver operated cam latch. 3. Toilet Room Faucet Power Supply Access Doors: Non -rated wall type; 12 "W x 12" H; stainless steel, #4 finish; one piece frame; concealed hinge. D. Minimum Sizes: Provide access doors in sizes indicated. When not indicated provide 12" x 12" size for hand access, and 24" x 24" size for man entry. E. Installation: 1. Provide access doors in the locations indicated, and for access to balancing and fire dampers, trap primers, valves, fans, terminal units, and other equipment requiring periodic inspection through finished walls or ceiling, whether indicated or not. 2. Coordinate access requirements with other trades. 3. Provide concealed drywall access doors unless fire rated access doors are required because of fire rated construction. 08331 Overhead Coiling Counter Door* A. System Description: 1. Assembly: Provide curtain, curtain guides, brackets, counterbalance, hood, motor operator, push button station, and steel structural support. 2. Accessories: Provide all other accessories required for a complete installation. B. Submittals: 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's complete product literature indicating specified items and method of installation. connection points and details, and locations of operating components. 3. Closeout Submittals: a. In accordance with Section 01770. b. Submit maintenance manual and spare parts list, and name of nearest service representative. C. Quality Assurance: 1. Installers: Trained and authorized by the door manufacturer. D. Counter Door: 1. Manufacturer: The Cookson Company (704/866 -9146) is specified as the standard of approval, similar and equal products from Overhead Door Corporation, Atlas Door Subsidiary Clopay, Wayne - Dalton Corporation, Cornell Corporation, R &S Rolling Door, and Pacific Rolling Door Company may be used. 2. Product: Cookson "Type CD8 -2M Manual (non- motorized) Counter Door"; provide lock mechanism with latch on interior face of the door, and key outside; between -jambs mounting; clear anodized aluminum finish. a. Provide crank operation for use of the door. b. Provide bottom deadlock to accept (1) interchangeable core as identified in Section 08710. E. Support Framing: 1. Provide tube steel framing as indicated to support the overhead coiling counter door. 2. The support framing shall be Contractor designed. 3. Provide bracing, attachments, and anchors to adjacent structure to maintain the installation firmly in position. 4. Framing shall be designed to accommodate deflection from the structure above without transmission of the load to the structure below. 5. Design framing system to meet the seismic requirements of the jurisdiction having authority. F. Installation: 6. Install door assembly in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 08334 Overhead Coiling Grille' A. System Description: Overhead coiling grille assembly includes grille, guides, brackets, counterbalance, hood, control mechanisms, and all other accessories required for a complete installation. B. Quality Assurance; 1. Installers: Installation shall be performed by a factory trained and authorized representative. C Submittals: ittals• 1. Submit product data. 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate details and dimensions of fabrication and installation, including closures, supports, tracks, locations cations of control boxes. 3. Closeout Submittals: a. In accordance with Section 01770. b. Submit maintenance manual and spare parts list, and name of nearest service representative. D. Coiling Grille: 1. Manufacturer: The Cookson Company (704/866 -9146) is specified as the standard of approval, similar and equal products from Overhead Door Corporation, Atlas Door Subsidiary Clopay, Wayne - Dalton Corporation, Cornell Corporation, R &S Rolling Door, and Pacific Rolling Door Company may be used. 2. Product: Cookson "Type JMG - Manual Rolling Grille." a. Curtain: G5015 design aluminum curtain. b. Finish: Clear anodized finish. c. Provide "Featheredge" pneumatic safety door bottom. d. Hardware: Provide bottom deadlock to accept (2) interchangeable cores as identified in Section 08710. d. Hardware: Provide bottom deadlock to accept (2) interchangeable cores as identified in Section 08710. E. Installation: 1. Install grille and operating equipment complete with accessories in accordance approved shop drawings, and manufacturer's recommendations, F. Field Quality Control: 1. Verify that moving parts operate smoothly, coiling grilles are free from warp, twists, or distortion, grilles remain in required position, and safety features function properly. 2. Repair damage to overhead coiling grilles to match manufacturer's original finish. Replace components that cannot be properly repaired. G. Adjust: Adjust mechanism so moving parts operate smoothly. 08410 Aluminum Storefront* A. Summary: 1. Provisions for new materials to match existing when indicated on the Drawings, including retrofit of aluminum storefront systems indicated to remain. 2. Provisions for new storefront when indicated on the Drawings. 3. Provisions for interior storefront assemblies when indicated on the Drawings. 4. Glazing and accessories required for aluminum storefront systems. 5. Fabricate brake metal shapes of materials to closely match storefront finish where such shapes are indicated on the Drawings. Provide rigid mechanical attachment of brake metal to storefront without compromising the weather integrity of the installation. 6. Finish: Interpon® D2000 Powdercoat Finish - Color: Sandstone B. Manufacturer's Warranty: One year with no limitations; include existing materials. C. System Components: 1. Storefront Framing: Kawneer TRIFAB VG 451T; 2 x 4 -1/2 inch extruded aluminum section; front set flush design. 2. Doors: Kawneer 190 or approved; extruded aluminum frame; narrow stile; 10 -inch bottom rail. 3. Door Hardware: a. Hinges: Match existing storefront hinges. b. Weather stripping: Manufacturer's standard. c. Threshold: Extruded aluminum; match storefront finish. d. Closer: Concealed overhead closer. e. Other hardware: As specified in 08710. 4. Glass: Match existing adjacent storefront glazing. 5. Glazing Beads: Furnish manufacturer's standard EPDM or neoprene glazing beads, for a complete weatherproof seal. D. Storefront Framing Fabfcation: 1. Rigidly fit joints and corners. Make corner joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. Seal joints with sealant. 2. Provide drainage holes to allow water to flow to exterior. 3. Provide internal reinforcement in mullions with members to maintain rigidity. Provide reinforcing at all door strike jambs. 4. Fabricate storefront system to accommodate hardware. 5. Finish: Match existing. E. Glass Framing Fabrication: 1. Insulating Glass Units: a. Dual light units; 1/2 -inch nominal airspace; dual seal system with outer seal compatible with glazing system. b. Provide ten year manufacturer's warranty, covering seal failure, interpane dusting or misting. 2. Tempered Glass: a. Comply with ANSI 297.1, and applicable codes. F. Storefront Installation: 1. Install frames, doors, and hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Align frames plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. 3. Install water diverters at exterior jamb conditions, under extruded aluminum sill section. 4. Provide end dams. Apply sealant to end dams, and screw penetrations. 5. Protect aluminum from dissimilar materials with a coating of bituminous paint, minimum 1 mil thickness zinc chromate primer, plastic separator materials, or isolation tape. Isolation materials are to be concealed. G. Glazing: 1. Glaze in accordance with the current edition of GANA. 2. Adjust glazing gaskets for uniform sightline. H. Special Requirements for Interior Storefront Application: 1. Provide storefront configured with 1/2 inch thickness tempered glazing at interior applications in lieu of insulated glazing units required at exterior applications. 08710 Door Hardware A. Submittals: 1. Hardware Schedule: Submit to the Architect, in triplicate, a complete schedule of proposed finish hardware. Schedule shall be completely detailed, showing all items, numbers and finishes for all hardware for each separate opening. B. Supplier Qualifications: Finish hardware shall be supplied by recognized builders' hardware supplier who has been furnishing hardware in the same area as the project for a period of not less than five years. The supplier's organization shall include consultants who are available at all reasonable times during the course of the work to meet personally with the Cingular Wireless LLC, Architect, or Contractor for hardware consultation. The supplier shall maintain a parts inventory of items supplied for future service for Cingular Wireless LLC C. Keys & Keying: 1. All cylinder items shall be keyed as directed by the Cingular Wireless LLC. 2. Keys: Furnish 3 for each cylinder unit. D. Finish: Brushed stainless steel typical E. Installation: 1. Mark each item of hardware as to description and location of installation in accordance with approved hardware schedule. 2. Exposed surfaces of hardware shall be covered and well protected during installation, so as to avoid damage to finishes. 3. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Wherever cutting and fitting are required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finishes in another way, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish operation. After completion of the finishes, reinstall each item. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. 4. Hardware Mounting Heights: Mounting heights are based on recommendations of the National Builders Hardware Association (NBHA). Generally, mount hardware units at the following locations on each door or door opening, except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings or required to meet code and handicapped requirements- Verify any conflicts with location of other hardware for proper clearances for installation prior to cutting or milling for specified hardware. Notify Architect immediately if such conflicts are determined. a. Latch and Locksets: 38 inches finish floor to center of knob. b. Dead Locks: 52 inches finish floor to center of cylinder. c. Emergency Exit Cross Bar: 36 inches from finish floor, d. Push /Pull: 42 inches finish floor to centerline of push /pull. e. Push Plate: 1/2 inch from edge of door; 42 inches to centerline of plate, except 45 inches where independent of the push /pull. f. Kick Plates: Mount at bottom edge of door and 1/2 inch from outside edge of door.; g. Top Hinge: 5 inches from top of door to top of hinge. h. Bottom Hinge: 10 inches from finish floor to bottom of hinge. i. Center Hinge: Equal distance between top and bottom hinges. j. Multiple hinge locations shall be equally spaced between top and bottom hinge. k. Wall Stops: Centerline of knob or point of first contact. I. Thresholds: Mount at exterior doors such that slope breakpoint on threshold is at lead edge of door. Set in full bed of caulking material. m. Closers: Mount for maximum degree of opening obtainable considering other hardware provided and opening conditions. Size closers for conditions and code requirements. n. Trim /Protection: Kickplate shall be 2" LDW x height indicated. o. Other hardware items shall be located as recommended by NBHA, or as may be shown or required otherwise. Dutch Door Bolts: Centerline of bolt placed vertically 4 inches from latch edge of door, strike plate mortised flush in shelf on lower leaf, and face plate mortised flush in bottom edge of upper leaf. 5_ Adjusting and Cleaning: Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation, Clean door and hardware. p. Division 9 Finishes 09111 Light -Gage Metal Support Systems A. System Description: 1. Structural Design: a. Select framing systems, gages, supports, bracing, and connections as necessary to meet the structural requirements specified. b. Partition framing shall conform to the widths indicated, unless approved otherwise. Provide thicker gages and increased stud spacing as necessary to meet the design requirements. 2. Design Loads: a. Interior Ceiling Assemblies: 5 pounds per square foot uniform live load, plus dead Toads. b. Interior Partitions: 5 pounds per square foot uniform live lateral load. c. Seismic Loads: Conform to the requirements of the Uniform Building Code for the appropriate seismic zone of the specific store location. d. Folding Security Grille: Design framing members to support weight of folding security grille. Design members to support the load concentrated in the folded position. 3. Deflection Requirements: Maximum of 1/240 the span. 4. Soffit Framing: Provide sufficient fasteners and framing elements to adequately resist the combined dead and live loads of suspended overhead construction. Base the design on the working capacities stated in 9 the manufacturer's n ufact urer's tec hnical data for the components, unless required otherwise by jurisdictional Code authorities. B. Submittals. 1. Product Data: a. Schedules: Proposed manufacturer's tables of partition heights and stud gages, as applicable to the work. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Assemblies Suspended from Overhead Construction: Show framing configurations and fastening systems for overhead soffits and other suspended assemblies; include applicable technical data for fasteners; indicate existing overhead construction to be attached to. C. Code Requirements: 1. Provide assemblies meeting the hourly fire ratings indicated and specified. Assemblies shall been tested in accordance with ASTM El 19, and shall be approved by the local jurisdictional code authorities. Coordinate installation of other materials that are a part each assembly. 2. Fire rating requirements take precedence over the construction requirements indicated. In the event of conflict, notify the Architect, and do not begin construction in the area of conflict until the conflict has been resolved. 3. Provide all calculations, drawings, product data, and other verification as required by the jurisdictional code authority to obtain approval of the light gage metal framing installation. D. Materials: 1. Light Gage Metal Framing: ASTM C645; galvanized; provide "C" shaped studs, U shaped runners, hat and "Z" shaped furring channels, and other sizes and shapes as indicated on the drawings, and required in the standards referenced. Minimum 20 gage, except provide thicker gages as required to meet deflection requirements. 2. Cold Rolled Channels: Rust inhibitive paint coating; sizes in accordance with ASTM C754. 3. Screws: Self- tapping; low profile head. 4. Other Framing Materials: Furnish in accordance with ASTM C754. E. Partition Framing: 1. Runners: a. Secure runners with fasteners at maximum 24 inches o.c. b. At concrete floors, use powder driven fasteners or drilled in concrete anchors. c. Where indicated, attach top runner to acoustical ceiling grid with screws at 24 inches on center. Provide spacer strip between runner and ceiling suspension system to allow tegular or reveal edge acoustical panels to clear partition. 2. Unless indicated otherwise, install studs vertically at 16 inches o.c., and not more than 2 inches from abutting construction, at each side of openings, and at corners. 3. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs at spacing of wall studs. 4- Brace partition framing system and make rigid. Provide diagonal stud bracing at 8 ft on center at all framing that does not extend to structure. 5. Install double studs continuous from floor to ceiling track at the jamb of each doorframe and cased opening- Studs shall be the same gage as the adjacent studs, but no less than 20 gauge. Provide diagonal steel stud bracing to structure at each jamb at partitions that do not extent to structure. 6. Coordinate erection of studs with installation of service utilities. Align stud web openings. 7. Coordinate erection of stud system with requirements of door and window frames, fire extinguisher cabinets, access doors, and other construction within mounted partition construction. 8. Coordinate the installation of framing with the gypsum board installer to ensure support at all board edges. Provide framing immediately either side of expansion joints. 9. Stud splicing not permissible. 10. Stud Bridging: a. At interior partitions greater than 4 feet in length, and with rigid facing material on one stud flange only, provide 3/4" bridging channels in horizontal rows at a maximum of 5' -0" on center for the full height of the partition. b. Interior full height partitions (studs extending from the floor to the structure above) with rigid facing material stopping 3' -O" or more below top of studs - Provide one row 3/4" bridging channel horizontally at termination of gypsum board material, and one additional row for each 5' -0" of exposed studs. c. Install stud bridging channels in long lengths, wire tying and lapping the joints a minimum of 12 ". Attach bridging channel to each stud as shown in manufacturer's printed instructions. F. Soffit Framing: 1. Secure runners to structure above. Provide reinforcing washers at each fastener to prevent the fastener from being pulled through the top runner due to the applied loads. 2. Screw fasten framing at each joint. 3. Provide detailing as indicated to allow for deflection of building structure. 4. Provide bracing to meet seismic requirements. G. Backing: 1. Provide steel backing for support of wall mounted items. 2, Unless indicated otherwise, steel backing shall consist of minimum 4-inch wide 16 gage steel plate screwed rigidly to the studs. 3. Coordinate all required blocking for furniture, shelving, cabinets, wall stops, etc., with the appropriate vendor, H. Installation Tolerances: 1. Install members to provide surface plane with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. 2. Locate assemblies within 1/4 inch of required locations. 09235 GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CASTINGS (GRG) A. Summary: 1. Section Includes: Precast glass fiber reinforced cast (GRG) components. 2. Related Sections: a. 09250 - Gypsum Board: Requirements for joint tape and compounds. b. 09900 - Painting: Finish coatings. B. Submittals 1. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product literature. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Indicate component configurations and cross sections, location and type of supports and reinforcing, and methods of fastening to surrounding construction. b. Obtain approval before proceeding with the fabrication of the mock -up. C. Quality Assurance 1. Design Criteria: a. Design the shapes to withstand a uniform surface load of 10 PSF, with a maximum deflection of 1/360 of the span. b. Anchorage: Design secure method of concealed anchorage to the adjacent construction indicated. 2. Seismic Design: a. Provide anchorage and bracing of components to meet the seismic requirements of the jurisdictional Code authorities. b. Seismic bracing and anchorage shall be subject to inspections by the Owner's Structural Engineer. c, Correct bracing and anchorage systems determined not to be in compliance by the Owner's Structural Engineer, or furnish structural calculations verifying compliance from a Contractor paid structural engineer licensed to practice in the State of where the Project is located. D. Prefabricated Cast Systems: 1. Manufacturers: As scheduled on the Drawings. 2. Materials: a. Matrix: Manufacturer's proprietary mixture of crushed minerals and resins. b. Reinforcement: Chopped glass fibers; woven or non- directional glass fiber mat. 3- Fasteners: Self- drilling, self- tapping bugle head drywall screws, length as required for each assembly. 4. Taping and Finishing Materials: As specified in Section 09250, except that open mesh glass fiber joint tape may be used in lieu of paper joint tape at the Contractor's option. E. Fabrication: 1_ Casting: Provide shapes as indicated on the drawings. Units shall be true to dimensions and have clean accurate arises and smooth and even curves. All details shall be faithfully executed to Architect's design. Paired components shall be fabricated for installation in perfect alignment. 2. Fabrication Tolerances: a. Curves: No point on the surface of the curve shall vary from the prescribed arc more than 1 percent of the radius. b. Arises and Surfaces: No point on a surface plane or arise shall vary more than 1/8 inch under a 10 foot straight edge. c. Shapes: No shape shall vary from its prescribed location more than 1/8 inch in any direction. 3. Finishes: Smooth finish. Prepare surface as required to allow paint adhesion. F. Examination 1. Verify conditions are satisfactory to receive work. Report all discrepancies to the Architect. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. 2. Field Measurements: Verify prior to fabrication and erection. G. Installation / Erection 1. Install components in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Where connection to structure is required, connect to structural steel components only. 3. Tape and finish joints between prefabricated members, in accordance with requirements of Section 09250. Maintain continuous radius at column joints. 4. Installation Tolerances: a. Variations from Plumb: 1/4 inch in 10 feet. b. Variations from Position: 1 /4 inch in any direction. c. Offsets in Alignment of Adjacent Members At Any Joint: 1/16 inch maximum. H. Cleaning And Repairing 1. After work is completed, repair or replace damaged surfaces and components to Architect's satisfaction. Sections shall be uniformly clean and free from soil or stain which would impair adhesion or bleed through finish paint coating. 09250 Gypsum Board Construction A. Quality Control: Provide assemblies meeting the hourly fire ratings indicated. Assemblies shall be approved by the local jurisdictional code authorities B. Materials: 1. Gypsum Board: a. 5/8 inch thick unless noted otherwise. b. Radius Walls: Use thickest board that will readily conform to the radius indicated on the Drawings. c. Standard Board: ASTM C36; type X in fire rated partitions where indicated. 2. Accessories: a- Trim: Concealed flange screw -on type; metal or PVC at Contractor's option; GA 216. b. Joint Compound, Tape, and Finishing Compound: ASTM C475 and GA 216. c. Screws: ASTM C1002. C. Installation: 1. Installation Standard: Unless specified otherwise, perform work in accordance with Gypsum Association 216, "Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Wallboard." 2. Screw fasten board to framing, unless approved otherwise. 3. Control Joints: a. Position control joints to intersect light fixtures, air diffusers, door openings, and other areas of stress concentration. b. Position control joints at locations where expansion or control joints occur in the building structure. c. Locate control joints to form rectangular or square sections, in "L," "U," "T," or other irregularly shaped areas. 4. Finishing: a. 3 coat smooth wall finish. b. Gypsum board surfaces shall form a smooth surface free of ridges, joint marks, fastener depressions, and joint filler lines. Tapered board joints shall be taped, filled, and feathered to 12 inches either side of the joint. Non - tapered board joints shall be taped, filled, and feathered to 18 inches either side of the joint. c. Skim coat all gypsum board surfaces in public areas (FOR EXISTING CONDITIONS ONLY, AS REQ.D). D. Special Requirements at Graphic Wall Covering: 1. Apply an extra layer of gypsum wall board to area indicated on the Drawings adjacent to graphic wall covering. 2. Provide vertical reveals at gypsum wall board surfaces adjacent to graphic wall covering indicated on the Drawings. 3. Coordinate wall finishing with requirements for graphic wall covering installation identified in Section 09720. 09253 Gypsum Soffit Board A. Summary: Fully- Embedded glass -mat gypsum sheathing board and sheathing joint -and- penetration treatment. B. Reference 1. ASTM B 117 - Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Testing Apparatus. 2. ASTM C 514 - Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board. 3. ASTM C 954 - Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.33 inch (0.84 mm) to 0.112 inch (2.84 mm) in Thickness. 4. ASTM C 1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self- Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs. 5. ASTM C 1177 - Standard Specification for Nails for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. 6. ASTM C 1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing. 7. ASTM E 84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 8. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 9. ASTM E 136 - Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 degrees C. 10. GA -216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association. 11. GA -253 - Application of Gypsum Sheathing; Gypsum Association. 12. GA -600 - Fire Resistant Design Systems; Gypsum Association. 13. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. C. Submittals 1. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: a. Preparation instructions and recommendations. b. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. c. Installation methods. D. Manufacturers 1- Acceptable Manufacturers: a- BPB (Base Bid) b. USG c. National Gypsum 2. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain gypsum board products, joint treatment products, and textured coatings from a single manufacturer. E. Gypsum Soffit Board 1. GlasRoc Sheathing: Conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 1177 and the following: a. Flame spread: ASTM E 84 (CAN /ULC- S102): 0 maximum. b. Smoke developed: ASTM E 84 (CAN /ULC - 5102): 0 maximum. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick where GlasRoc® Sheathing indicated. 3. Width: 48 inches (1219 mm). 4. Length: 96 inches (2438 mm) and 108 inches (2743 mm) standard. Custom lengths available. 5. Edges: Square. F. Sheathing Joint -And- Penetration Treatment Materials 1. Glass -Fiber Mesh Sheathing Tape: Self- adhering glass -fiber tape, minimum 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads /inch (390 by 390 or 390 by 780 threads /m), of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass -mat gypsum sheathing board. G. Accessories 1. Fasteners: Steel drill screws, in lengths recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing board to be attached and as follows: 2. Provide all fasteners with an organic - polymer or other corrosion- protective coating. H. Installation 1. Install soffit board in accordance GA -253, ASTM C 1280 and manufacturer's written instructions. 09260 Gypsum Board Assemblies on Metal Framing A. Summary: Pre - engineered drywall suspension system consisting of straight main tees along with straight furring cross channels or cross tees, that join together to support screw attached gypsum panels and independently supported light fixtures and air diffusers. Installed systems must conform to U.L. and other applicable codes where applicable. B. References A. ASTM C635, Standard Specifications for Metal Suspension Systems. B. ASTM C636, Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Suspension Systems. C. CISCA Ceiling Systems Installation Handbook. D. GA 216 Installation & Finish Gypsum Panels. E. ASTM C645, Standard Specification for Non -Load Bearing (Axial) Steel Studs, Runners, (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. F. ASTM C754, Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw - Attach Gypsum Boards. C. Submittals 1. Samples: Submit actual samples and technical data for suspension system main tees and cross tees for review. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Reflected ceiling plans: Submit ceiling suspension system layout indicating dimensions, lighting fixture locations, and related mechanical components. b. Assembly drawings: Indicate installation details, accessory attachments and installation of related lighting fixtures and related mechanical system components. 3. Manufacturer's Data: a. System details: Submit manufacturer's catalogue cuts or standard drawing showing details of system with project conditions clearly identified and manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. D. Acceptable products: Drywall Suspension System by USG. E. Materials 1. Commercial quality, cold rolled steel, hot dipped galvanized finish. 2. USG Flat Drywall Suspensions Systems: a. Main Tees: Fire -Rated Heavy Duty classification 1 -1/2" high, integral reversible splice with knurled face. DGL -26 15/16_ Face or DGLW -26 1 -1/2_ Face b. Cross Members: Fire -Rated members with knurled face. Cross Tees: DGLW -424 cross tee 1 -1/2" high x 48" long with 1 -1/2" wide face. Tees must have quick release cross tee ends to provide positive locking and removability without the need for tools. or Furring Channel: DGCL -4 furring channel 7/8. high x 48. long with 1 -1/2. face. c. Accessory Cross Tees: Cross tees must have knurled faces. Cross tees have quick release cross tee ends to provide positive locking and removability without the need for tools. d. Wall moldings: Single web with knurled face. DGWM -24 1"x 1 -1/2" x length wall molding. DGCM -25 144" x 1- 9/16" x 1"x 1" channel molding, F. Accessories 1. Transition Clip DGTC -90 2. Splice Clip DGSC -180 G. Fasteners 1. Conventional Gypsum Panel fasteners (ASTM C1002). No. 6 Type -S, HiLo bugle head, self - drilling, self- tapping steel screws. H. Installation 1. Standard reference: Install in accordance with ASTM C636, CISCA installation standards, and other applicable code references. 2. Manufacturer's reference: Install in accordance with manufacturer's current printed recommendations. 3. Drawing reference: Install in accordance with approved shop drawings and locate ceiling in accordance with main tee dimensions relative to elevations. 4. Component and hanger wire installation: a. Flat Ceilings: Main tees shall be spaced a maximum of 48" on center and supported by hanger wires spaced a maximum 48" on center and as specified by UL Fire Resistance Directory attaching hanger wires directly to structure above. Cross tees shall be spaced per manufacturer's recommendations and as specified by UL Fire Resistance Directory. b. Transitions: Changes in Elevation in Soffit and Fascia Ceiling Applications. c. When constructing stepped soffits, bracing of the drywall suspension system and /or additional hanger wires may be necessary to ensure stability and structural performance during and after drywall attachment. d. The maximum vertical soffit height is 48 ". (Maximum unsupported drywall area shall not exceed 48. x 24.). e. Intermediate cross tees are not necessary when soffit dimensions do not exceed 24 ". f. Cross tee spacing in horizontal soffit plane is not to exceed 24 ". g. Intermediate cross tees may be necessary to maintain visually acceptable drywall planes and drywall corners. h. General hanger wire notes: Hanger wires are required within 12" on both sides of a pivoted splice clip. At least 1 hanger wire is required within 12" of a transition clip. Limitations: Do not support wires from mechanical and /or electrical equipment occurring above ceiling. . 9 I. Accessories: Install accessories as applicable to meet project requirements. J. Expansion Joints 1. Provide a separation in the suspension system at expansion joints as shown on the drawings and carry the joint through the gypsum panels. 2. Expansion joints are installed to separate the suspension system and allow for movement in large ceiling areas. 09305 Tile Setting Materials & Accessories A. SUMMARY: Provide tile installation materials and accessories as indicated on drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for complete and proper installation. B. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1. Quarry tile and base installed using latex modified Portland cement mortar over a plastic Portland cement mortar bed or over a cured (pre - floated) Portland cement mortar bed with epoxy grouted joints. C. SUBMITTALS 1. Submit shop drawings and manufacturers' product data under provisions of Section 01300. 2. Submit manufacturers' installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 3. Submit manufacturer's certification under provisions of Section 01450 that the materials supplied conform to ANSI A137.1. 4. Submit proof of warranty. 5. Submit sample of installation system demonstrating compatibility /functional relationships between adhesives, mortars, grouts and other components under provision of Section (01300.) (01340.) D. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Installation System Manufacturer (single source responsibility): Company specializing in adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials with ten (10) years minimum experience and ISO 9001 certification. Obtain installation materials from single source manufacturer to insure consistent quality and full compatibility. E. WARRANTY 1. The Contractor warrants the work of this Section to be in accordance with the Contract Documents and free from faults and defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 10 years. The manufacturer of adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials shall provide a written ten (10) year warranty, which covers materials and labor - reference LATICRETE Warranty Data Sheet 230.12 for complete details and requirements. F. EXTRA MATERIALS STOCK 1. Upon completion of the work of this Section, deliver to the Owner extra stock of adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials for the Owner's use in replacement and maintenance. Extra stock to be from same production run or batch as original tile and installation materials. G. PRODUCTS 1. CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION MATERIALS MANUFACTURER a. Base Bid: LATICRETE International, Inc., 1 Laticrete Park North, Bethany, CT 06524- 3423 USA Phone 800- 243 -4788, (203) 393 -0010 support@laticrete.com; www.laticrete.com b. Substitutions: See Section 1600 2. Summary: Cement backer board for stone tile wall cladding a. Backer Board: Cementitious, water durable, board; surfaced with fiberglass reinforcing mesh on front and back; long edges wrapped; and complying with ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1325. 1- Thickness: '/ in. 2. Width: 4 ft. 3. Length: 8 ft. 4. Edges: Tapered 5. Compressive Strength: Not less than 2250 lbs. per sq. in. when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2394. 6. Water Absorption: Not greater than 8 percent when tested for 24 hours in accordance with ASTM C 473. H. PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION - TILE INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES 1. Waterproofing Membrane to be thin, cold applied, single component liquid and load bearing. Reinforcing fabric to be non -woven rot -proof specifically intended for waterproofing membrane. Waterproofing Membrane to be non - toxic, non - flammable, and non- hazardous during storage, mixing, application and when cured. It shall be certified by IAPMO as a shower pan liner and shall also meet the following physical requirements: a. Water Permeability @ 30ft.hydro /0.9 atmos /91.2kPa (Fed. Spec.TT -C -00555 Modified): Nil b. Elongation @ break (ASTM D751): 20 -30% c. Service Temperatures (LIL 1016): -20° to 280 °F( -28° to 137 °C) d. Breaking Strength (ASTM D751): 2950 psi (20.4 MPa) e. Thickness (LIL 1013): 20 mils (0.5 mm) f. Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.4):250 PSI (1 -7 MPa) g. Service Rating (TCA/ASTM C627): Extra Heavy /cycles 1 -14 2. Crack Suppression Membrane to be thin, cold applied, single component liquid and load bearing. Reinforcing fabric t non - wove. of -pr.- pecifically i ded fo crack suppression membrane. Materials to be non- xi , n -fl,, Sabll;'.' -haza o durin at &t Carter::Burgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (714) 327 -1 600 FAX: (714) 327 -1601 DRAWN BY: .,...11 "< PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE: ISSUES /REVISIONS CODE C®� ° 1� �.Aa�Cj� 141 JUN- 6 U08 City ()Mk- - 06 -05 -08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 16415 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA WA 9 8188 rf E \‘ DESIGNED BY: CHECKED BY: ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS APPROVED BY: 444017.011.037.0001 AS NOTED A -502 storage, mixing, application and when cured. Crack Suppression Membrane shall also meet the following physical requirements: a. Elongation at break (ASTM D751): 20 -30% b. Service Temperatures (LIL 1016): -20° to 280 °F( -28° to 137 °C) c. Breaking Strength (ASTM D751): 1700 psi (11.7 MPa) d. Thickness (LIL 1013): 20 mils (0.5 mm) e. Service Rating (TCA/ASTM C627): Extra Heavy /cycles 1 -14 3. Wire Reinforcing: 2 inch x 2 inch (50 x 50 mm) x 16 ASW gauge or 0.0625 inch (1.6mm) diameter galvanized steel welded wire mesh complying with ASTM A185 and ASTM A82. 4. Cleavage membrane: 15 pound asphalt saturated, non - perforated roofing felt complying with ASTM D226, 15 pound coal tar saturated, non - perforated roofing felt complying with ASTM D227 or 4.0 mils (0.1 mm) thick polyethylene plastic film complying with ASTM D4397. 5. Cementitious backerboard units: size and thickness as specified, complying with ANSI A118.9. I. PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION - TILE INSTALLATION MATERIAL 1. Latex Portland Cement Thin Bed Mortar for thin set and slurry bond coats to be weather, frost, shock resistant, non - flammable and to meet the following physical requirements: a. Compressive strength (ANSI A118.4): 2400 psi (16.5 MPa) Min. b. Bond strength (ANSI A118.4): 500 psi (3.5MPa) Min. c. Smoke & Flame Contribution (ASTM E84 Modified): 0 2. Organic Adhesive shall be non - flammable, water resistant, latex adhesive and shall meet the following physical requirements: a. Open Time (ANSI A136.1): 70 minutes @ 75 °F (24 °C) b. Color: White c. Density (ANSI A136.1): 13.2 Ibs /gal (1.6 kg /I) 3. Epoxy Grout (Commercial /Residential) shall be non - toxic, non - flammable, non - hazardous during storage, mixing, application and when cured and shall meet the following physical requirements: a. Compressive Strength (ANSI A118.3): 3500 psi (24 MPa) b. Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.3): 1000 psi (6.9 MPa) c. Water Absorption (ANSI A118.3): < 0.5 d. Cured Epoxy Grout to be chemically and stain resistant to ketchup, mustard, tea, coffee, milk, soda, beer, wine, bleach (5% solution), ammonia, juices, vegetable oil, brine, sugar, cosmetics, and blood, as well as chemically resistant to dilute acids and dilute alkalis. 4. Latex Portland Cement Grout to be weather, frost and shock resistant, as well as meeting the following physical requirements: a. Compressive Strength (ANSI A118.7): 3500 psi (24 MPa) b. Water Absorption (ANSI A118.7): < 5% c. Linear Shrinkage (ANSI A118.7): < 0.1 % d. Smoke & Flame Contribution (ASTM E84 Modified): 0 5. Expansion and Control Joint Sealant to be a one component, neutral cure, exterior grade silicone sealant meeting the following requirements: a. Tensile Strength (ASTM C794): 225 psi (1.5 MPa) b. Hardness (ASTM D751; Shore A): 25 (colored sealant) /15 (clear sealant) c. Weather Resistance (QUV Weather - ometer): 10000 hours (no change) 6. Spot Bonding Epoxy Adhesive for installing tile, brick and stone over vertical and overhead surfaces shall be high strength, high temperature resistant, non -sag and shall meet the following physical requirements: a. Thermal Shock Resistance (ANSI A118.3): 2600 psi (17.9 MPa) b. Water Absorption (ANSI A118.3): 0.1 % c. Compressive Strength (ANSI A118.3) 8379 psi (57.8 MPa) d. Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.3 Modified): 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) J. Installation - General 1. SUBSTRATE EXAMINATION: Verify that surfaces to be covered with tile, mosaics, pavers, brick, stone, trim or waterproofing are: a. Sound, rigid and conform to good design /engineering practices; with maximum deflection under all live, dead and impact loads, including concentrated loads, of L/360 for ceramic tile, mosaics, pavers or brick and L/480 for stone; b. Clean and free of dust, dirt, oil, grease, sealers, curing compounds, laitance, efflorescence, form oil or loose plaster, paint and scale; 0. Level and true to within 34 in 10. (6mm in 3m), and no more than 1/16" in 1' (1.5mm in 0.3m) variation from substrate high points, for applications by the thin bed method over substrate, thin waterproof membrane or thin crack suppression membrane; d. Not leveled with gypsum or asphalt based compounds; e. Dry as per American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D4263 "Standard Test for Determining Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method ". 2. ACCESSORIES: a. Waterproofing: 1. Install waterproof membrane in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.1 (A- 1 through A -3) and ANSI A108.13. K. INSTALLATION - TILE, BRICK & STONE 1. General: Install in accordance with current versions of American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) "A108 American National Standard for Installation of Ceramic Tile" and TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation ". Cut and fit ceramic tile, brick or stone neatly around corners, fittings, and obstructions. Perimeter pieces to be minimum half tile, brick or stone. Chipped, cracked, split pieces and edges are not acceptable. Make joints even, straight, plumb and of uniform width to tolerance +/- 1/16" over 8. (1.5mm in 2.4m). Install divider strips at junction of flooring and dissimilar materials. 2. Thin Bed Method: Install latex Portland cement mortar in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.1 (A -1 through A -3) and ANSI A108.5 (A -4.3). Use the appropriate trowel notch size to ensure proper bedding of the tile, brick or stone selected. Work the latex Portland cement mortar into good contact with the substrate and comb with notched side of trowel. Spread only as much latex Portland cement mortar as can be covered while the mortar surface is still wet and tacky. When installing large format ( >8. x 8. /200mm x 200mm) tile /stone, rib/button /ug back tiles, pavers or sheet mounted ceramics /mosaics, spread latex Portland cement mortar onto the back of (i.e. .back-butter.) each piece /sheet in addition to troweling latex Portland cement mortar over the substrate. Beat each piece /sheet into the latex Portland cement mortar with a beating block or rubber mallet to insure full bedding and flatness. Allow installation to set until firm. Clean excess latex Portland cement mortar from tile or stone face and joints between pieces. 3. Polymer Modified Cement Grout (ANSI A118.7): Install polymer modified cement grout in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.1 (A -1 through A -3) and ANSI A108.10 (A- 4.7.3.5.4, A -4.7.4 through A- 4.7.8). Dampen dry surfaces with clean water. Spread using a sharp edged, hard rubber float and work grout into joints. Using diagonal (at 45° angle to direction of grout line) strokes, pack joints full and free of voids /pits. Hold float face at a 90° angle to grouted surface and use float edge to "squeegee" off excess grout, stroking diagonally to reduce pulling grout out of filled joint. Initial cleaning can begin as soon as grout has become firm, typically 20 -30 minutes after grouting depending on temperature. Drag a clean towel dampened with water, or wipe a clean, dampened sponge, diagonally over the veneer face to remove any grout haze left after 'squeegeeing". Rinse towel /sponge frequently and change rinse water at least every 200 ft2 (2 m2). Repeat this cleaning sequence again if grout haze is still present. Allow grout joints to become firm. Buff surface of grout with clean coarse cloth. Insect j oint for pinholes/voids and repair them with freshly mixed grout. Within Inspect 1 p p Y g 24 hours, check for remaining haze and remove it with warm soapy water and a nylon scrubbing pad, using a circular motion, to lightly scrub surfaces and dissolve haze /film. Do not use acid cleaners on latex Portland cement mortar grout less than 7 days old. 4. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide control or expansion joints as located in contract drawings and in full conformity, especially in width and depth, with architectural details. a. Substrate joints must carry through, full width, to surface of tile, brick or stone. b. Install expansion joints in tile, brick or stone work over construction /cold joints or control joints in substrates. c. Install expansion joints where tile, brick or stone abut restraining surfaces (such as perimeter walls, curbs, columns), changes in plane and corners. d. Joint width and spacing depends on application - follow TCA .Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. Detail "EJ -171 Expansion Joints" or consult sealant manufacturer for recommendation based an project parameters. e. Joint width: > 1/8" (3mm) and a 1" (25mm). f. Joint width: depth -2:1 but joint depth must be a 1/8" (3mm) and a %" (13mm). g. Layout (field defined by joints): 1:1 length:width is optimum but must be 2:1. h. Remove all contaminants and foreign material from joint spaces /surfaces, such as dirt, dust, oil, water, frost, setting /grouting materials, sealers and old sealant/backer. Install appropriate Backing Material (e.g. closed cell backer rod) based on expansion joint design and as noted in the Drawings. Apply masking tape to face of tile, brick or stone veneer. Use caulking gun, or other applicator, to completely fill joints with sealant. Within 5 -10 minutes of filling joint, "tool" sealant surface to a smooth finish. Remove masking tape immediately after tooling joint. Wipe smears or excess sealant off the face of non - glazed tile, brick, stone or other absorptive surfaces immediately. 5. Adjusting: Correction of defective work for a period of one (1) year following substantial completion, return to job and correct all defective work. Defective work includes, without limitation, tiles broken in normal abuse due to deficiencies in setting bed, loose tiles or grout, and all other defects which may develop as a result of poor workmanship. L. INSTALLATION - CEMENT BOARD 1. Fasteners: a. Screws: Drill point screws (No. 8) wafer head, corrosion- resistant, 1 -1/4 in. or 1 -5/8 in. long, and complying with ASTM C 1002. 2. Joint Treatment: a. Tape: Alkali- resistant fiberglass mesh tape intended for use with cement board. 3. Bonding Materials: a. Mortar: Dry -set portland cement mortar in accordance with ANSI A118.1. b. Mortar: Latex - portland cement mortar in accordance with ANSI A118.4. c. Adhesive: Organic adhesive in accordance with ANSI A136.1, Type 1. 4. Installation a. General: In accordance with the following reference standards and manufacturer's recommendations: ANSI A108.11. M. CLEANING 1. Clean excess mortar /epoxy from veneer surfaces with water before they harden and as work progresses. Do not contaminate open grout/caulk joints while cleaning. Sponge and wash veneers diagonally across joints. Do not use acids for cleaning. Polish with clean dry cloth. Remove surplus materials and leave premises broom clean. 09510 Acoustical Ceilings A. Submittals: 1. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. 2. Submit product literature for each acoustical ceiling tile and suspension system proposed. B. Quality Assurance: 1. Codes: Comply with all pertinent requirements of the jurisdictional code authorities. C. Products: 1. Ceiling Tile: As scheduled on the Drawings. 2. Suspension System: ASTM A635; intermediate or heavy duty classification; exposed T system; 9/16 exposed face; factory painted white to match ceiling tile. D. Installation: 1. Installation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, provide secondary carrying members for indirect support of the suspensions system, or reinforce the nearest adjacent hangers and related carrying channels as required to span the required distance. 3. Do not anchor system in any manner that might cause damage to the structural system. 4. Align system with window mullions as indicated on the Drawings. 5. Hold -Down Clips: Install hold -down clips within 20 feet of an exterior door, 6. Tolerances: a. Variation form Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. b. Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: Two degrees maximum. 09648 Wood Flooring" Must be installed per manufacturer's specifications to maintain full warranty. 09650 Resilient Flooring A. Submittals: 1. Submit product literature for each product proposed, including resilient flooring, transition strips, and adhesives; Includes L -1 and VCT -1 scheduled on the Drawings. B. Materials: 1. Resilient Flooring: a. L -1: Forbo Linoleum, Inc. "Marmoleum FRESCO ", (570)459 -0771; 2.5 mm sheet; colors as scheduled on the Drawings. b. VCT -1: As scheduled on the Drawings. 2. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex filler, mixed with water to produce a cementitious paste. 3. Primers and Adhesives: Types as recommended by resilient flooring manufacturers for specific application. 4. Flash Cove Accessories: a. Strips: Wax, wood, or plastic cove fillet strips; approximately 1 -inch radius. b. Cap Trim: Aluminum. 5. Transition Strips: Rubber or vinyl reducer strip, one inch wide x thickness to match flooring; square one edge, tapered opposite edge; color as selected by Architect. C. General Resilient Flooring Installation Requirements: 1. Install subfloor filler to fill low spots, cracks, construction joints, holes and other defects, and as required to adjust level to meet adjacent finishes. Feather to maximum slope of 1/8 inch in 3 feet; float to smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic over filler. 2. Install all resilient flooring where scheduled in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Unless indicated otherwise, install resilient flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines. 4. Terminate resilient flooring at centerline of door at door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar, and where no threshold is indicated. 5. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates. 6. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 7. Clean substrate. Spread cement evenly in quantity recommended by manufacturer to ensure adhesion over entire area of installation. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of flooring before initial set. 8. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to ensure full adhesion. 9. Seal joint between flooring and adjacent materials at restrooms, bathrooms, kitchens, and other moist areas with clear silicone sealant. D. Special Requirements for Resilient Tile: 1. Open floor tile cartons, enough to cover each area, and mix tile to ensure shade variations do not occur within any one area. 2. Unless indicated otherwise, lay tiles parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern. 3. Install with minimum tile width 1/2 full size at room or area perimeter. 4. Arrange to square grid pattern with all joints aligned. E. Special Flashed Coved Base Requirements: 1. Provide cove fillet at intersection of floor and wall to ease transition. 2. Miter cut, fit, and heat weld. Extend flooring to 4 inches above finished floor level. 3. Cut top exposed edge straight and level. 4. Cap top edge with cap trim. Miter all trim corner joints. Install trim in maximum possible lengths with no piece shorter than 18 inches for continuous runs longer than 18 inches. F. Cleaning 1. Remove excess adhesive from floor and wall surfaces without damage. 2. Clean floor in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 09678 Resilient Base A. Materials: 1. Resilient Base: As scheduled on the Drawings. 2. Primers and Adhesives: Types as recommended by resilient base manufacturer for specific application. B. Installation: 1. Adhesive install base materials in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Adhere tightly to wall and floor surfaces. 2. Use manufacturer's longest lengths. Where cutting is necessary, maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints. 3. Miter or cope inside corners for accurate fit. 4. Install base to walls, columns, and to wood casework toe kicks in all areas where rubber base is scheduled. 5. Score back of base material with grooving tool, at all outside corners; maintain minimum leg length 18 inches where wall length permits. Mount base so that scored groove is accurately aligned with corner, and with base tightly adhered to wall at both sides of corner, with no visible gaps at top of base. Where cove base is formed around outside corners, stretch toe of cove for smooth transition around corner, with toe in uniform contact with the finish flooring. 6. Scribe and fit to doorframes and other obstructions. 7. Install straight and level to variation of plus or minus 1/8 inch over 10 feet. 8. Coordinate installation of base with work of Section 09680. 9. Fit joints tight and vertical. C. Cleaning 1. Remove excess adhesive from base and wall surfaces without damage. 2. Clean base in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 09680 Carpeting A. Summary: Installation of carpet tiles, and roll carpeting scheduled on the Drawings. General Contractor to purchase carpet tiles and roll carpeting as scheduled on the Drawings. B. Submittals: 1. Samples: a. Samples of each type of carpet edge strip; three inches minimum. 2. Installation Instructions: Submit for each type of carpet provided. C. Quality Assurance: 1. Carpet Installer: Minimum of 3 years experience in carpet installations of similar size and scope. Able to show evidence of experience when requested by the Architect. D. Warranty: Furnish manufacturer's standard 5 -year warranty against wear and deterioration. E. Materials: 1. Carpet Tile: integral padded backing. 2. Roll Carpeting: As scheduled on the drawings; no pad. 3. Accessories: a. Adhesives: As recommended by the carpet manufacturer for installation under conditions of this project. b. Use release type adhesives at carpet tile locations. c. Latex Underlayment: White premix latex filler. d. Edge Strips: Vinyl reducer strips; size and configuration as appropriate for conditions; color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line. F. Preparation: 1. Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster, and other substances that would be detrimental to the proper performance of adhesive and carpet. 2. Fill low spots and cracks over 1/8 inch in width with latex underlayment. G. Carpet Installation: 1. Install carpet tiles in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations; install roll carpeting in accordance with Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) recommendations. 2. Floor adhesive shall be applied in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's recommendations using a roller to ensure maximum contact. Roll stock carpet, and carpet tile shall be fully adhesively bonded. 3, Orient carpet tiles in the same direction, unless scheduled or directed otherwise. 4. Lay out area such that cut perimeter tiles will be not less than 8 inches wide. Commence laying tile in center of room or space and work toward perimeters; cut border tile after field tiles have been installed. Cut carpet evenly and accurately to fit neatly at walls, columns, and projections. Lay tile square with area of installation. Joints shall be tight and unnoticeable upon completion. 5. Cut carpet for telephone and electrical outlets. 6. Carpet tile installation shall be rolled and re- rolled on the day following installation to assure complete transfer of adhesive. 7. Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. Use full length pieces only. Butt tight to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be avoided, butt ends tight, flush, and accurately aligned. H. Remnants: Upon completion of the installation, package all remaining carpet tiles. G.0 to leave onsite with the store manager 1 box of carpet tiles, and /or 2 sq. yds. of roll goods, for future use in onsite maintenance. Remove and dispose of all other additional remainder at a legal off -site location. I. Cleanup: 1. The premises shall be kept free from unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment and surplus materials during the progress of the work. 2. Remove threads with sharp scissors. Remove spots with manufacturer's recommended spot remover. 3. Thoroughly power vacuum entire surface using equipment with motor driven brushes. 09820 Acoustical Insulation and Sealants A. Materials: 1. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I; unfaced glass fiber batts, blankets, or rolls; minimum fire hazard classification rating of 25/50 per ASTM E84; minimum 3 -inch thick, unless required otherwise to meet the STC requirements indicated or specified; widths to friction -fit between studs, where indicated for installation in stud walls. 2. Acoustical Sealant: Non - hardening, non - skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board; similar to USG "Acoustical Sealant." 3. Accessories: Furnish other accessories such as fasteners and retainers, not specifically described, but required for a complete installation. B. Installation: 1. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as indicated. 2. Install insulation without gaps or voids. 3. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use insulation materials free of damage. 4. Acoustical Insulation at Ceilings: a. Lay acoustical insulation over each acoustically insulated partition that terminates at the ceiling. Insulation shall extend a minimum of 24" each side of the centerline of the acoustical partition b. Acoustical insulation batts shall be tightly butted. c. Cut and fit neatly around mechanical and sprinkler drops. d. Fill spaces between wall batts (at top plate line) and ceiling batts to ensure complete sound closure. 5. Sealant: a. Install acoustical sealant around perimeter of all acoustically insulated partitions; one continuous bead at each side of framing member interface with substrate. b. Seal all penetrations through acoustical assemblies, except for penetrations in fire rated construction to receive fire- stopping. 09900 Painting A. Submittals: 1. Submit a list of each paint system to be used in the work. 2. Submit a minimum of 3 each 8 x 10 inch sample of each paint color and sheen proposed for the work. B. Quality Assurance: 1. Paint coatings shall be free of dust, dirt, flow lines, streaks, sags, blisters, pinholes, bugs, runs, or other surface imperfections. 2. In addition to the coats specified, provide additional coats as required to obtain adequate hide. C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish a minimum of one gallon of each color paint to Cingular Wireless LLC for future touch -up work. D. Materials: 1. Unless specified otherwise, furnish manufacturer's highest grade coating systems by one of the following manufacturers. Materials to be VOC compliant: a. Benjamin Moore Paint Company. b. Pittsburgh Paints. c. Pratt & Lambert. d. The Sherwin- Williams Company. e. ICI Paints North America. f. Kelly -Moore Preservative Paint Company 2. Paint Selections P -3 and P -4: Provide custom Sherwin Williams colorways for the Cingular Wireless LLC national account. 3. Overhead Dry Fall Paint: Tnemec "Uni- Bond" Series 16, or approved; modified alkyd dry -fall interior overhead paint; VOC compliant. E. Surface Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces by removing all dirt, dust, grease, oil, moisture, and other contaminants that will impair the proper adhesion of the finish. 2. Wood - Opaque paint finish: a. Spot coat knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. b. Fill all nail holes and cracks. Sand filler smooth and level with wood surface. 3. Gypsum Board: Remove all light dust and dirt. 4. Existing Finished Surfaces To Be Repainted: a. Remove loose, blistered, scaled, or crazed finishes to bare substrate; feather new work into existing work. Prepare surfaces to the nearest break line if necessary to blend new finishes with old finishes. b. Wash and rinse surfaces with trisodium phosphate and water or other solution required to remove remaining film, wax, oil, grease, smoke or foreign matter which will impair bond, or cause bleed through, of newly applied finishes. c. Lightly sand, or apply a liquid deglosser on existing semi -gloss and high -gloss finishes before refinishing. F. Special Application Requirements: 1. Unless specified or indicated otherwise, follow paint manufacturer's label directions for general application procedures and coverage rates. 2. Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Make sure each coat of finish is dry and hard before a following coat is applied unless the manufacturer's directions state otherwise. 3. Tint filler to match stain when clear finishes are specified; work filler well into grain and, before setting, working perpendicularly to the grain, wipe the excess from the surface. 4. Opaque Finishes: a. Apply number of coats scheduled for each application, except that additional finish coats shall be applied as necessary for complete hiding of substrate colors. b. Apply primer coats un- tinted. Where more than one coat of paint is required, tint each succeeding coat up to the final coat similar in tint, but slightly lighter in value (shade). c. Sand lightly between coats if necessary to achieve required finish; sand between all coats applied to wood substrates. 5. Rollers for application and backrolling of latex paints shall have a nap of 3/8 inch or less. 6. Where roller texture is scheduled for application to plaster and gypsum board surfaces, finish coats may be roller - applied, or spray applied and backrolled at Contractor's option. 7. Factory Primed Surfaces: Apply scheduled finish system, less primer coat, except as necessary to for patching damage to factory prime coating. G. Systems: 1. Gypsum Board - Latex System: a. 1 coat PVA primer, 2 coats of latex paint. Apply to interior gypsum board surfaces, unless specified or scheduled otherwise. 2. Ferrous Metals - Latex System: a. System: Three coats; first coat rust resistant primer, second and third coats latex enamel. The primer may omitted at factory primed surfaces, except as necessary to recoat damaged or abraded preprimed surfaces. b. Sheen: Semi - gloss, unless indicated otherwise. c. Application: Interior ferrous metal surfaces including welded hollow metal doors and frames, electrical panels, fire extinguisher cabinets, and access doors. 3. Wood: a. Wood - Opaque Latex System: 1 coat quick dry primer and 2 coats of latex paint. b. Sheen: Semi - gloss, unless indicated otherwise. c. Application: Interior plywood at Inventory Room, and paint grade wood doors. 4. Overhead Exposed Surfaces - Opaque Alkyd System a. System: One coat overhead dry -fall paint. b. Sheen: Eggshell, satin, or flat. c. Application: Overhead elements as indicated on the Drawings; restrict painting where indicated on the Drawings. H. Color Schedule; As scheduled on the Drawings. Division 10 Specialties 10400 Signage A. Section Includes: Installation of pin- mounted foam letters provided by General Contractor (F.C.I.C.). B. Installation: 1. Accurately measure and mark location for installation of each pin- mounted letter; coordinate approved locations with the Owner's Representative. 2. Install each pin- mounted letter in succession, and in accordance with the pin manufacturer's instruction for the substrate the letters are being installed on. C. Cleanup: 1. Take precautions to assure adjacent surfaces remain free from dust, and adhesive. 2. Immediately clean surfaces that become soiled during installation of the letters. 3. Upon installation, clean the letters and pin mounts of dust with a damp cloth, taking care not to damage underlying surfaces. 4. Leave the installation clean, and completely free of foreign material that would detract from visual appearance of the letters. 10520 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets A. Larsen Extinguisher Cabinet - V -2709 B. Extinguishers: 1. Multi- Purpose Dry Chemical Type (FE): Heavy Duty DOT Steel tank; UL rating 2A 10B:C, 5 lb capacity, with pressure gage; red enamel finish; metal valves and siphon tubes. C. Cabinets: 1. Provide surface mounted models in locations as indicated on the drawings 2. Provide sizes as necessary to accommodate extinguishers. 3. Trim: Formed Sheet Steel, minimum 20 gauge, 1 -1/4 to 1 -3/4 inches wide face. 4. Door: Formed Sheet Steel, minimum 20 gage; reinforced for flatness and rigidity; satin zinc or aluminum pull, roller catch, and continuous hinge; clear glass vision panel. 5. Cabinet Finishes: a. Cabinet Trim and Door: Manufacturer's standard primed finish to receive paint coatings as specified in Section 09900. b. Cabinet Interior: Manufacturer's standard white epoxy or white baked enamel. D. Accessories: 1. Fire Extinguisher Brackets: Manufacturer's standard J -type. Provide at fire extinguisher locations where no cabinet is indicated. E. Installation: 1. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings in locations as indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, install 30 inches from finished floor to inside bottom of cabinet. 2. Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. When recessed cabinets are installed in fire rated walls, maintain fire resistance rating continuously behind the cabinet. 10800 Toilet Accessories* A. NOTE: All fixtures and mounting heights must be installed in full compliance with all TAS (Texas Accessibility Standards) or ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act); depending on geographic project location. B. Provide the following accessories as manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company, unless approved otherwise. C. Accessories available from Cingular approved vendor: 1. Grab Bars (GB): Bobrick B -550 (36 ") B-550 (42 "). 2. Paper Towel Dispenser (PTD): B -262 3, Sanitary Napkin Vender (SNV): B- 3500; 25 cent operation. 4. Sanitary Napkin Disposals (SND): a. B -4354 (Partition Mounted Dual Unit): For installation between each two toilet stall enclosures in Women's toilet rooms, except where wall mounted units are shown. b. B -4353 (Recessed Single Unit): For installation in end wall locations at accessible toilet stall enclosures at women's toilet rooms. 5. Toilet Paper Dispenser (TPD): B -264. 6. Toilet Paper Dispenser /Seat Cover Dispenser /Napkin Dispenser (TPD2): B -3574 7. Soap Dispenser (SD): B -156. 8. Seat Cover Dispenser (SCD): B -3013. 9. Door Coat Hook (DCH): B -6707. 10. Mop and Broom Holder: B -224 x 30. 11. Mirrors: 5- 293 -2436 D. Fold Down Baby Counter: 1. Manufacturer: Koala Corporation, St. Paul, MN (8001666- 0363). 2. Construction: White HDPE shell with steel hinges, counterbalance, safety straps and integral bed liner dispenser. 3. Design: "Koala Bear Kare Baby Changing Station "; furnish horizontal, and vertical designs as appropriate for installation at locations indicated on the Drawings. 4. Bed Liners: Provide one box of 500 - three ply liners per installed baby counter. 10999 Miscellaneous Specialties A. Shelf Standards and Brackets: 1. Shelf Standards: Capitol Hardware, Niles, MI (800/327 -6083) "No. 1903 A -Line Heavy Duty Standard ", or approved; zinc finish; length as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Shelf Brackets: Capitol Hardware, Niles, MI (800/327 - 6083) " No. 973 A -Line Heavy Duty Double Bracket ", or approved; for use with "No. 1903" Shelf Standard; zinc finish; size as indicated on the Drawings. Division 11 Equipment 11450 Kitchen Appliances* A. Submittals: Submit product data. B. Appliances: 1. Under Counter Refrigerator: Model No. CO29FF by U -Line, Milwaukee, WI; (414 - 354 - 0300); white vinyl facing. 2. Microwave: Model No. Model #: JE1160WD by GE Division 13 Special Construction Fire Protection is Design /Build Division 14 Conveying Systems Not Used Division 15 Mechanical Refer to MEP Project Specifications Division 16 Electrical Refer to MEP Project Specifications Where indicated on drawings - REVIEWED O CODE COMPLIANCE APP VE JUN 1. 2088 Cif Of Tukwila BUILDING D.SI, 317 NO. DATE DRAWN BY: PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE: COPYRIGHT 0 2008 CARTER & BURGESS. INC. at &t Cartereurgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (714) 327 -1600 FAX: (714) 327 -1601 ISSUES /REVISIONS - 06 - 05 - 08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT DESCRIPTION 16415 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 DESIGNED BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED a 444017.011.037.0001 AS NOTED ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS A -503 S I Z E MAXIMUM PARTITION HT. MAXIMUM PARTITION HT. SPACING HEIGHT SPACING HEIGHT 362S125-18 16" 12' -5" 24" 1O' -10" 362S125 -30 16" 15' -O' 24" 13' -1" 600S125 -30 16" 23' -1" -- - 600S125 -43 16" 26' -0" - - 600S125-54 16" 27' -11" - - 1. SEE FLOOR PLANS FOR WALL RATINGS EXISTING NON -RATED 1 HR RATED 2 HR RATED poratalllalasaimalalall l IHatlauIHallauatIIIH:IIaI 1 2. SEE SPECS FOR STUD SPACING AND GAUGE 3. COORDINATE CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE -RATED WALLS/PARTi11ONS WITH DESIGN NUMBER SPECIFIED AT EACH PARTITION-I'VE DETAIL 4. FRAME AND FINISH OPENINGS FOR MECHANICAL, AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AS REQUIRED AND AS SPECIFIED ON MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS /SPECIFICATIONS. 5. ACOUSTICAL PARTITIONS SHALL BE CONSIDERED ANY PARTITIONS CONTAINING ACOUSTICAL INSULATION. NOTE: ALL METAL STUD TO COMPLY WITH LAC- RR•25529 THE PARTMON /WALL DESIGNATION IS A THREE -UNIT CODE THAT DENOTES THE INSULATION OF 4 S FOLLOWS: INSULATION PARTTfION/WALL CONSTRUCTION PARTITION/WALL CONFIGURATION PARTITION /WALL NOTES NO SCALE 1 2 3 CONT. TRACK W/ (2) #8 PER BLOCK 2X4 BLOCKING 0 32" O.C. W/ (2) 16d EACH END (E) 2X4 SUB -PURUN 0 24" O.C. 2X4 BLOCKING W/ (2) 16d EACH EN (E) PURUN BEYOND 0 5' -0" O.C. MAX. SPACING 4X4 EACH SIDE IN "U" HGRS BETWEEN PURUNS INSULATION IF NOTED 3 5/8" METAL STUDS 6" METAL STUDS 3 5/8" METAL STUDS — TYPE "X" GWB #10 WIRES EACH WAY 0 EACH STUD W/ 4 TIGHT TURNS IN 1 )¢" EACH END CONT. 6"X16 GA. (CUT FLANGE FOR RAD.) W/ (3) #8 PER STUD 3 5/8" 20 GA. HUNG METAL STUD 0 �� 16" O.C. W/ (3) #10 SCREWS TO 4X4 S1SP. OWNS 6"Xl 6 GA. METAL BRACE 0 48" O.C. W/) (3) #10 METAL SCREWS EACH END 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD EACH SIDE 20 GA. METAL STUDS 0 16" O.C. SOFFIT SUPPORT C1010FP -01 r - u SUSPENDED G.B. CEILING REFERENCE ARCHITECTURAL PROVIDE KICKER AS REQUIRED NO SCALE TYPICAL PARTITION CONFI FULL HEIG :l G WHERE CURS (E) SUB -PURUN ON - ISH MATERIALS BOTH SIDES E3 PARTITIONS / WALL DESIGNATIONS p� 4 6 1 C 3 PARTITION U NO SCALE CONT. TRACK W/ (2) #8 0 32" O.C. (E) PLYWOOD SHEATHING 2X6 0 16" O.C. IN "U" HANGERS (E) PURUN 0 5' -0' O.C. MAX. SPACING 3 5/8" 20 GA. HUNG METAL STUD 0 16" O.C. W/ (3) #10 SCREWS TO 4X6 6"X16 GA. METAL BRACE STUD BRACING 0 ANGLE TO ROOF W/ (2) #8 PER STUD & (3) #10 TO ROOF BLOCKING 6'X16 GA. METAL BRACE 0 48' O.C. W/ (3) #10 METAL SCREWS EACH END SUSPENDED G.B. CEIUNG REFERENCE ARCHITECTURAL PROVIDE KICKER AS REQUIRED 2 1/2" METAL STUDS 3 5/8" METAL STUDS 6" METAL STUDS SOFFIT SUPPORT 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD 20 GA. METAL STUDS 0 16 O.C. INSULATION IF NOTED i B PARTITION CONFIGURATION - FULL HEIGHT FINISH MATERIALS ONE SIDE PARTIAL HEIGHT FINISH MATERIALS ONE SIDE C1010FP -21 NO SCALE WHERE (WHERE CURS) CCURS)� C1010FP -02 NO SCALE INSULATION PARTIAL HEIGHT a CURES) 3 5/8' 20 GA. HUNG METAL STUD 0 16' O.C. W/ (3) #10 SCREWS TO 4X6 C a C d e PARTITION WALL INSULATION 4X4 IN SIMPSON "U" HANGERS 2X4 BLOCKING W/ (2) 164 EACH END (E) PURUN BEYOND 0 5' - " - O.C. MAX. SPACING 6"X16 GA. METAL BRACE 0 48' O.C. W/ (3) #10 METAL SCREWS EACH END SUSPENDED G.B. CEILING REFERENCE ARCHITECTURAL PROVIDE KICKER AS REQUIRED PARTITION CONFIGURATION - PARTIAL HEIGHT FINISH MATERIALS BOTH SIDES NO INSULATION BAIT ACOUSTICAL INSULATION EXTEND 6" FINISHED CEILING 0 MANAGER OFFICE, RESTROOM. RIGID INSULATION BATT THERMAL INSULATION (E) SUB -PURUN ONT. TRACK (E) PLYWOOD SHEATHING PARTITION CONFIGURATION - FULL HEIGHT FINISH MATERIALS ONE NO FINISH MATERIAL ONE SIDE C1010FP -03 NO SCALE SOFFIT SUPPORT 3 5/8" x 20 GA. DIAGONAL MTL BRACE 0 32' OC W/ 3 -18 SMS EA. END ALTERNATE DIRECTIONS UNDERSIDE OF DECK EXISTING ROOF FRAMING ACT CEILING ACT CEILING ca F � GYP. BD. END I��1A 0 6" ABOVE CEILING _ C 3 5/8 "x20 GA. METAL STUDS iI 0 16" O.C. W/ 5/8' TYPE 'X" GYP. BD. BOTH SIDES ( ICBO #1601) e ►J INSULATION PARTIAL HEIGHT sto (WHERE OCCURES) Z O. CONT. UNPUNCHED TRACK F� W/O.145'x1 1/2" EMB. HILT! 3 X-DNI SHOT PINS 0 24 O.0 W /7/8 1 x 14GA DISC. (MIN. 2 PINS PER TRACK.) r� ( I.C.B.O. #2388 ) PARTITION CONFIGURATION - GRID HEIGHT FINISH MATERIALS BOTH SIDES 3 - 18 SMS TO EA. TRUSS BOTT. CHORD NOTE PROVIDE FIRE BLOCKS AND DRAFT STOPS SHALL COMPLY WITH UBC 708. 4 45 ° MAX. Fn. J IMPARISPA NO SCALE 3 5/8 "x20 GA. DIAGONAL MIL BRACE 0 32" 0.C. W/ (3) - #8 SMS. EA. END ALTERNATE DIRECTIONS. EXISTING ACT CEIUNG ON LOADBEARING PARTITION NOTE CONS? OF CEG GRID TO CONFORM TO WITH REQUIREMENTS OF ICBO REPORT #4071 PARTITION LATERAL BRACING C1010FP -33 RESPONSIBILITY CHART (FOR REFERENCE ONLY) DEMISING WADS DMSION OF WORK INCLUDES. BUT IS NOT UMITTED TO THE FOLLOWING : GYPSUM BOARD (AS SPECIFIED) PAINTING VINYL BASE CARPETING NEW CEILINGS FXTLIRING / CABINETRY FIRE PROTECTION (SPRINKLERS) FIRE EXTINGUISHER SAW CUTTING OF EXISTING FLOOR SLAB FOR CONDUIT RUNS DOOR & HARDWARES SALES AREA ELECTRIC VOICE / DATA CONDUIT H.C. TOILET ROOMS NEW WATER COOLER EXISTING ROOF TOP UNITS THERMOSTAT SYSTEMS PROVIDE HONEYWELL T8600 NEW DUCTWORK NEW DIFFUSSERS & RETURN —AIR GRILLS MAIN SERVICE WIRING OUTLET WIRING / JUNCTION BOXES SWITCHES & WIRING & HVAC UNIT (S) CONTROL WIRING (IF REQUIRED) LIMITS TELEPHONE JACKS — ALL IJGH ING PACKAGE VOICE/ DATA CABLING LIGHTING CONTROLLER SIGNAGE: INTERIOR SIGNAGE STORE FRONT SIGNAGE MISC /DECOR TELEPHONE DATA WHITE RECEPTACLE COVERS CASH WRAP / WORKS STATIONS DEMO UNITS & PRINTER /STOWAGE ALL TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES INTERIOR PARTITIONS (NON -LOAD BEARING) 1. ALL THE METAL STUDS USED SHALL BE "S" STUD MEMBER OR APPROVED EQUAL PER SSMA 2. THE BRIDGING, BLOCKING OR END BEARING STIFFENERS SHALL BE AS REQUIRED BY THE MANUFACTURER UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS. 3. ALL THE STUDS SHALL CONFORM TO ICBO APPROVAL #4943P 4. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON THE PLANS, USE THE FOLLOWING GUIDELINE FOR CONTINUOUS STUD SIZE & SPACING FOR INTERIOR PARTITIONS. 5. TOP TRACK SIZE SHALL BE 20 GA. MINIMUM U.N.O. LANDLORD FURN. • INST. • CONTRACTOR FURN. • • • • • • • • • • • • INST. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 1 • • • • • • • at&t OTHERS FURN. • • INST. FURN. • • • • • PLUMBING ALL ITEMS NOT INDICATED 15 SIILL SUB CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY. 0 • 0 • INST. • • ALL ITEMS NOT INDICATED IS STILL SUB CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY. ALL ITEMS NOT INDICATED IS STILL SUB CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY. —R IFWE CODE O FOB COMPLIANCE A I 1 n n n .,.., City Of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISIO EXISTING • • • • 1 J U N 1 U — 00 N REMARKS NEW WALLS NEW THRU —OUT, EXCEPT WHERE NOTED FOR TELECOMUNICATIONS & ELECTRICAL POWER SALES AREA ELECTRIC PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE & INSTALL. MECHANICAL ALL ITEMS NOT INDICATED IS STILL SUB CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY. PROVIDE COMPLETE MAINTENANCE CHECK —UP OF SYSTEM BEFORE START UP. TO WORK W/ CEILING LAYOUT TO WORK W/ CEIUNG LAYOUT ELECTRICAL ALL ITEMS NOT INDICATED IS STILL SUB CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY. TO WORK W/ COUNG LAYOUT CABUNG CONTRACTOR CABUNG CONTRACTOR • • TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT • • • • • • • • 317 coPYRIGHn 0 2oas cmam & BURGESS. INC. at &t Carter:Burgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (714) 327 -1600 FAX: (714) 327 -1601 NO. DATE ISSUES /REVISIONS - 06 -05 -08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT DESCRIPTION 16415 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 • DESIGNED BY CHECKED BY: DRAWN BY: PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE: APPROVED BY: 444017.011.037.0001 AS NOTED PARTITION DETAILS RESPONSIBILITY CHART A -801 8 MAXIMUM O PERIMETER SUPPORT EXISTING STR RE 12 GA HANGER WIRES TO STRUCTURE FLEX WALL ANGLE IF REQUIRED TEE'S TO BE CONTINOUS REFER TO RCP h UK HtIGflT — REFER TO RCP h UK HEIGHT - HANGER WIRE AT EACH PERIMETER MAIN TEE USG COMPASSO DRYWALL CLIPS USG COMPASSO 8" DRYWALL CLIPS STABILIZER BAR TO MAINTAIN PERIMETER TEE SPACING 1 1 / 2 '_1' - O MAIN TEE OR CROSS TEE INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS SALES AREA - SOFFIT 3/4 " -V -0" 3/4" PLYWOOD SHELF W/ PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH TO MATCH COUNTER 1' - 0' 10 METAL BRACKET 0 48" O.C. BLOCKING AS REQUIRED, TYP. 2' - 0" 3/4' PLYWOOD COUNTERTOP WITH PIASTIC LAMINTE FINISH 4' PLASTIC LOOSE SPLASH, SELF -EDGE 2' DIA. PASS -THRU HOLE ' BLOCKING AS REQUIRED, TYP. COUNTER 1 1/2=1'-0' ACT NOTE: COMPLY WITH ALL ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS OF ASTM C635 AND C636 COMPLY WITH LAC -RR *24646 0 GENERAL SUPPORT n O CASHWRAP � ', HANGER WIRES AT 4 OC EACH DIRECTION - NO MORE THAN 1:6 OUT -OF- PLUMB, TYPICAL 1 1/2' THICK P -LAM KNEE BRACE, SEE ELEVATION FOR SPACING NOT TO EXCEED 4' -0' O.C. FASTENERS INTO STRUCTURE SQUARE STUD BRACINGING TO WALL EVERY THIRD STUD RECESSED DOWNLIGHT FIXTURE BEYOND PER RCP a CV O _1 ti P -5 WHERE HANGER WIRES ARE MORE THAN 1:6 ,.,„_,,v7,-- PROVIDE COUNItR- SLOPING WIRES TRAPEZE AS REQD. TO AVOID OBSTRUCTIONS MAINTAIN HANGER WIRE SPACING AND CAPACITY — 2' -3 5/8" 1 . -4 r INVENTORY ROOM TO BE FIVE SHELVES HIGH. BEGIN SHELVES 0 1' -6' A.F.F. AND STANDARDS 0 1' -O" AF.F. i:II ADJUSTABLE SHELF 000 3/4' WHITE MELAMINE 20 GA. METAL CHANEL W/ (2) *8 SCREW 0 EACH STUD REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR SHELVING LENGTHS & SPACING HEAVY DUTY SHELF BRACKETS AND STANDARDS SURFACE MOUNTER STANDARDS 3' FROM EITHER WALL, AND 0 3' -0" O.C. SCREWED TO CONTINUOUS WOOD BLOOKING BLOCKING AS REQUIRED, TYP. 1/2" ijp l DOOR LEAF 2" HOLLOW METAL FRAME- DOOR JAMB (HEAD SIM) LIGHT COVE SOFFIT DETAIL 1 1/2 "-1' -O" BRACE ACT -1 CEILING 5/8" GYP BD 9H 2" 4" STUD DOUBLE STUDS, TYP. PARTITION -TYPE VARIES 12' -0" V.LF. d BOTTOM GYP BD SOFFIT Q WINDOW 6 -0' 10' -0" BOT 'M OF ACT CEILING W GYP -BD. PAINT PER SCHEDULE SHEET A -104 METAL STUD, SEE SHEET A -801 g HORIZ SECTION AT WALL NICHE 6" =1'-0' • RUBBER BASE DETAIL 0 ti 0 b b CONCRETE SLAB 7 - - DUPLEX OUTLET WITH BLACK COVER PLATE FLOORING A9 1 1/2" -1 -0" 7 TBD 9 n ' TBD 1' -4" TYP. CONCRETE SLAB WIREMOLD BASE SOFFIT DETAIL FACE OF WALL WIREMOLD P -7 FACE OF WALL COVED RESIDENT BASE 7 - FLOORING SEE RCP BOTTOM ACT milf CEILING E) MAINTAIN DEMISING WALL FIRE RATING WHERE OCCURES 3 5/8" MTL STUD FRAMING EXTEND TO DECK ABOVE 1 LAYER OF 5/8" GYP BD GC TO PROVIDE ADDITIONAL STELL BLOCKING WITHIN SOFFIT WHERE APPLICABLE FOR OVERHEAD MOUNTING OF MECHANDISE UNITS. (FINAL LOCATION TBD - VERIFY W/ MILLWORK VENDOR AS REQUIRED 3 5/8" MTL STUD FRAMING 8'-0" BOTTOM GYP BD C O - OFFIT 5 :" GYP BD L MO ING BRACKET (USED • HEN THE MECHANDISE UNIT IS ` * UNTED TO THE SOFF 20 GA. METAL CHANEL W/ (2) *8 SCREW EACH STUD PARQLOCOR ALUMINUM T & BASE TRACK (OR MANUFACTURER APPROVED SIMILAR), ORDER CODE: "T" - 'N38, BASE TRACK - =T (SOLD SEPERATELY). c:: EXPANSION JOINT A (C) WOOD FLOOR TO VCT A Q VCT TO CARPET DIMENSION POINT GLUE -DOWN CARPET CONCRETE SLAB Q WOOD FLOOR TO CARPET 6' =1' -0" SEE R.C. PLAN DIMENSION POINT DIMENSION POINT --- • DIMENSION POINT 1 V2 "•1' -0" P III u��t�►u IRIMIw►mmriiMMIU IgIWI M►rmMUIVI TiVIEWm tC) v7 1 1/8" / 1 1/8" AAA AAA A n i . irAAIrn►r rmi ru r� r�� ra r FLOORING TRANSITIONS VARIES SEE R.C. PLAN • JOHNSONITE MTC -00 -A 2' -0" MINIMUM N.T.S. ABET LAMINATI WOOD FLOOR TOP OF CONCRETE TOP OF CONCRETE VCT FLOORING WHERE OCCURS VINYL EDGE TRIP - JOHNSONITE CE -XX -A, COLOR 63 -BURNT UMBER WOOD FLOORING SYSTEM JOHNSONITE MTC -00 -A TOP OF CONCRETE VCT FLOOR VINYL EDGE TRIP - JOHNSONITE CE -XX -A, COLOR 63 -BURNT UMBER GLUE -DOWN CARPET VINYL EDGE TRIP - JOHNSONITE i __________ CE -XX -A, COLOR 63 -BURNT UMBER JOHNSONITE MTC -00-A GLUE -DOWN CARPET ' PET CRUSH LINE LATEX UNDERLAYMENT BUILD UP AS REQUIRED FOR CARPET CRUSH UNE TO ALIGN WITH SCREED HEIGHT \ -- REVitliiEt-tCP_ -I CODE COMPLIANCE ft- Kx f. WED JUN 1 2008 City Of Tukvi i�R 1T1 Dr n G 4" STUD (E) 5/8" GYP BD 12' -0" V.I.F. BOTTOM GYP BD SOFFIT 0 WINDOW 1 LAYER OF 5/8" GYP BD 317 8'_O" BOTTOM GYP BD SOFFIT 5/8" GYP BD LIGHT COVE SOFFIT DETAIL COPYRIGHT 0 ZOOS CARTER & BURGESS, INC. Carter::Burgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (714) 327 -1600 FAX: (714) 327 -1601 NO. DATE DRAWN BY: PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE: DETAILS at8ct ISSUES /REVISIONS - 06 -05 -08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT DESCRIPTION 16415 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 DESIGNED BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY: 444017.011.037.0001 AS NOTED A -802 [D WALL WALL UNIT PERSPECTIVE EQ DIRECT ON OF PATTERN PROVIDE WALL SUPPORT BRAKET AT TOP & BOTTOM IF NO CEILING SUPPORT AVAILABLE NOTE PROVIDE BLOCKING WHERE OCCURS AS REQUIRED AT MOUNTING POINTS. 4 -7" EQ 2" WALL UNIT FRONT ELEVATION WALL UNIT SIDE ELEVATION WALL UNIT: RSF -004 DIRECTION OF PATTERN M -2 M -1 PL -1 PL -4 v2 "=1' -0 GENERAL NOTES 1. FURNITURE AND FIXTURES DETAILS SHOWN ON THIS SHEET ARE FOR INFORMATION ONLY, FIXTURES F.O.I.C. 2. SEE VENDOR LIST ON GENERAL INFORMATION SHEET A -001 FOR CONTACT INFORMATION. D3 1/2"•1' -0" CASHWRAP PERSPECTIVE CASHWRAP: RSF-QQ1/QQ1A/OQ1B k In M tr- M _ N IN CASHWRAP SECTION 4 1/4" n II CASHWRAP SECTION @ ACCESSIBLE COUNTER 2' -sw 10 1/4 " / 1' - 7 3/4" 1/2" 1' -01/2 1' - 9 1/4" 1' 2 1/4" 4 w X r Ol, 2 1 1/4" • I1 • • M CASHWRAP SECTION @ DRAWER COUNTER i 1' \ 1' -9" POWER AND DATA SEE ELECTRICAL PLAN 2 1/4" 1" 1'-8 1/2 4 -2 1/2" 1/2 PL -3 3' -1 1/2" 3' -0 1/2" CEILING 0 10' -D" AFF 3'-1 1/2" 9'-4 1/2" CASHWRAP FRONT ELEVATION 11 3' -1 1/2" 13' -5" 9' - 11" 1" 3' -1 1/2" 12" x 12" ACCESS PANEL 1/2" 3' -1 1/2" CASHWRAP PLAN POWER AND DATA SEE ELECTRICAL PLAN 1 CASHWRAP REAR ELEVATION L 1/4" T7 PL -4 -- 1'-9" 2' -11 1/2" PL -2 w PL -1 td- U7 P-1 ................................................................. ............................... t � (E) ACT *—P -1 BACKWRAP PERSPECTIVE g BACKWRAP: RSF- 002/002A P -1—} RSF -002A P -2-' RSF -002 0 M7 \ '- \ T-3 5/8" 0 0 • OUTER DASH GRAPHICS BY OWNER SOLID LINE OF SUBSTRATE PANEL MIDDLE DASH OF COVE LIGHT FIXTURES INNER DASH OF SUPPORT FRAMEWORK 0 1 0 1 M ev \ -\ I eV BACKWRAP SECTION BACKWRAP ELEVATION BACKWRAP PLAN SECTION / 6 1/2" I L 5' -9 1/2" 13' -6" 12' -5" 1'- - r 0" PL -2 r 5' -9 1/2" —J J 6 1/2" PL 4 PL -1 TYP FRAME CODE COMPLIANCE AAPR SV JUN 16 1O City Of T lay PL -4 TYP DRAWER FACE 3 17 Carter:Burgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (714) 327 -1 600 FAX: (714) 327 -1 601 - 06 -05 -08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT NO. DATE 16415 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 ° �F DRAWN BY: PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE: COPYRIGHT 0 2008 CARTER & BURGESS. INC. NORTH DESIGNED BY: CHECKED BY: CAS EWORK DETAILS at &t ISSUES /REVISIONS DESCRIPTION APPROVED BY: 444017.011.037.0001 AS NOTED A -803 REV RACK: RSF -008 1/2' - 1' -0" PROMO TABLE: RSF -005 1/2' = 1' -0" 4' -6" MDF WITH VACUUM - FORMED VINYL PROVIDE (2) 1/4" D HOLES TO ACCEPT PLEXI -GLASS SIGN HOLDER 16 GA.SQUARE PERFORATED STEEL PANEL1 /4" D HOLES 1" O.C. HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL 3' -5 1/4" PL -1 M -2 PL -1 : PERFORATED STEEL PANEL SEAMS WD -1 (4) 3" D CASTERS, 2 LOCKING !A GONDOLA RSF-009 PROVIDE (2) 1/4" D HOLES TO ACCEPT PLEXI -GLASS SIGN HOLDER SEAMS 3/4" MDF W/ VACUUM - FORMED VINYL 3/4" MDF W/ VACUUM - FORMED VINYL M1 WD -1 16 GA. PERFORATED STEEL PANEL 1/4" D HOLES 1" O.C. HORIZONTALLY & VERTICALLY ROCKLER '76863 TURNTABLE, RATED FOR 220•, 7/74" THICK X 12 -5/8" D WD -1 (4) CONCEALED CASTORS (2) LOCKING. N. 2" v -5 "X17" PLEXIGLASS I SIGN HOLDER SEAMS WD -1 M -1 PERFORATED METAL PANEL EASED EDGES WD -1 REVIEWED FO CODE COMPLIANCE APP VE o JUN 1 2088 City Of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION p S- 317 GENERAL NOTES 1. FURNITURE AND FIXTURES DETAILS SHOWN ON THIS SHEET ARE FOR INFORMATION ONLY, FIXTURES F.O.I.C. 2. FOR FIXTURE ORDERS CONTACT U.S. COMMUNICATIONS, ATTN: JOHN RAGNUSIN AT 770 - 886 -7605 •2 Cartereurgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (714) 327 -1600 FAX: (714) 327 -1601 NO. DATE TASOS Tr „ A 0. DRAWN BY: cOPYR1G rr 0 2000 CARER & BLIRGESS, ENC. PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE: at &t ISSUES /REVISIONS - 06 -05 -08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT DESCRIPTION 16415 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 DESIGNED BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY: 444017.011.037.0001 AS NOTED SALES FLOOR FIXTURING A -804 Carter:Burgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (714) 327-1600 FAX: (714) 327 -1601 NO. COPYRIGHT © 2008 CARTER & BURGESS. INC. at &t DATE EXPIRES 08/26/09 ISSUES /REVISIONS - 06-05-08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT DESCRIPTION 16415 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 DRAWN BY: RT S i t %k° PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE: DESIGNED BY: RT CHECKED BY: BLD ELECTRICAL GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS & ABBREVIATIONS �+R i APPROVED BY: CNB 444017.011:037.0001 NONE E -001 ABBREVIATIONS LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE NOTE: LIGHTING FIXTURES INDICATED MAY NOT NECESSARILY APPEAR AS LEGEND NOTE: SYMBOLS INDICATED MAY NOT NECESSARILY APPEAR AS PART OF PART OF THESE DRAWINGS IF NOT REQUIRED. SEE PLANS. THESE DRAWINGS IF NOT REQUIRED. LIGHTING FIXTURE NOTES: A A AMPERE, ATTIC AC ALTERNATING CURRENT, AIR COND. AIC MINIMUM AMPERE INTERRUPTING CAP. AF AMPERE FRAME OR FUSE AFC AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR ANSI AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INS. ARCH ARCHITECT AS AMPERE SWITCH AT AMPERE TRIP B BOF BOTTOM OF FIXTURE BMS BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM C C CONDUIT CKT CIRCUIT CL CENTER LINE, CEILING CO CONDUIT ONLY CONT CONTINUATION CP CONTROL PANEL CU COPPER CWP COLD WATER PIPE COMM COMMUNICATIONS D DISC DISCONNECT DWG DRAWING E (E) EXISTING EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR (ED) EXISTING TO BE DEMOLISHED EF EXHAUST FAN EL EMERGENCY KIGHT ELEC ELECTRICAL EM EMERGENCY (ER) EXISTING RELOCATED F FA FIRE ALARM FAAP FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR PANEL FACP FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL FF FINISHED FLOOR G GFI GROUND FAULT CURRENT INTERRUPT. GND GROUND H HOA HAND OFF AUTO HP HORSE POWER, HEAT PUMP HTR HEATER J J -BOX JUNCTION BOX L LTG LIGHTING M M MECHANICAL, MC MECHANICAL CON MIN MINUTES OR MINI MGB MAIN GROUND BE MLO MAIN LUG ONLY N (N) NEW NEC NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE NEMA NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUF. ASSO. NETA INTERNATIONAL ELEC. TESTING ASSO. NFPA NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSO. NF NON -FUSED NL NIGHT LIGHT NIC NOT IN CONTRACT P PB PULL BOX PNL PANEL POC POINT OF CONNECTION PVC POLY VINYL CHLORIDE PWR POWER 0 PHASE R RAP REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL RECPT, REC RECEPTACLE RM ROOM S SEC SECURITY SF SUPPLY FAN SFD COMBINATION SMOKE /FIRE DAMPER SPECS SPECIFICATIONS SPST SINGLE POLE SINGLE THROW SWBD SWITCHBOARD SW SWITCH T TBB TELEPHONE BACKBOARD TEL TELEPHONE TOP TOP OF PANEL 1VSS TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRES. TYP TYPICAL U UBC UNIFORM BUILDING CODE UFC UNIFORM FIRE CODE UGPS UNDERGROUND PULL SECTION UG UNDERGROUND UL UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UNO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE UPS UNINTERRUPTED POWER SUPPLY V V VOLT, VOLTAGE W W WATT, WALL W/ WITH WP WEATHERPROOF X XFMR TRANSFORMER CALLOUTS SYMBOL FIXTURE TYPE DESCRIPTION /REMARKS MANUFACT. LAMP WATTS V REMARKS AC -- AIR CONDITIONING - SEE MECH. AHU - AIR HANDLER - SEE MECH. CU - CONDENSING UNIT -- SEE MECH. EF - EXHAUST FAN - SEE MECH. WH - WATER HEATER - SEE PLUMB. HP HEAT PUMP SEE MECH. FLOOR PLAN /DETAIL NO. 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY AND COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECT AND LIGHTING DESIGNER FIXTURE MOUNTING DETAILS, FINISHES AND SIZES BASED ON FIELD CONDmoNS. 2. ALL FIXTURES SHALL BE U.L OR ETL USTED AND LABELED. 3. ALL TRACK AND LOW VOLTAGE STRIP LIGHTING SHALL BE SUPPLIED WITH ALL NECESSARY FEEDS, CONNECTORS, ETC. FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION. 4. FIXTURES TO BE MOUNTED WITH LAMPS AND / OR REFLECTORS ORIENTED AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. 5. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR MOUNTING DIMENSIONS AND / OR DETAILS. ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS SUPERSEDE ALL OTHERS. 6. SUBMITTALS: AS PART OF THIS WORK THE CONTRACTOR SHALL, WITHIN 25 DAYS AFTER AWARD OF THE CONTRACT, SUBMIT A COMPLETE MATERIAL UST OF ALL UGHTING FIXTURES, MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS, AND CONTROLS PROPOSED TO BE FURNISHED AND / OR INSTALLED. THIS SUBMITTAL SHALL INCLUDE MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATIONS, CUT SHELLS, AND OTHER DATA REQUIRED TO DEMONSTRATE COMPLIANCE WITH THE SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS. FURNISH THREE (3) BOUND COPIES 8 1/2" X 11". 7. NO SUBSTITUTION OF SPECIFIED FIXTURE, LAMP OR CONTROL MANUFACTURER WILL BE ACCEPTABLE WITHOUT SPECIFIC PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ARCHITECT AND LIGHTING DESIGNER. IF CONTRACTOR OR DISTRIBUTOR MAKES A SUBSTITUTION WITHOUT SAID PRIOR APPROVAL, CONTRACTOR OR DISTRIBUTOR SHALL REPLACE THE SUBSTITUTED ITEM WITH THE SPECIFIED ITEM AND SHALL BEAR ALL ASSOCIATED COSTS (INCLUDING BU NOT UMITED TO THE ARCHITECT'S AND / OR LIGHTING DESIGNER'S LABOR COSTS INVOLVED IN RE- AIMING FIXTURES, TRAVELING TO THE SITE, ETC.) WITHOUT ANY ADDITIONAL CHARGE TO THE OWNER. 8. CONTACT GRAINGER FOR ALL LIGHTING ORDERS. ATTN: JASON JONES AT 404 - 234 -1425. GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES: 7 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY MC OR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A 1' X 4', 8 CELLS PARABOLIC RECESSED FLUORESCENT UGHTING FIXTURE WITH HIGH POWER FACTOR, HIGH FREQUENCY ELECTRONIC BALLAST AND T8 LAMPS METALUX (COOPER) EP3GX- 232- -S18MI -UNV- EB81. PROVIDE 90 MINUTES EMERGENCY BATTERY FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTS (2) F32T8/841 65W 120- 277 E -10 SHEET NO. al NOTE CALLOUT PER FLOOR PLAN I I FURNISHED BY OWNER I 1 A NL Miiil A W - - VAV - VARIABLE AIR VOLUME RTU - ROOF TOP UNIT - SEE MECH. EQUIPMENT NO. B �� SINGLE LAMP ADJUSTABLE STAGGER LOW PROFILE "FLIP AND SLIDE " LINEAR T5 FLUORESCENT STRIP FOR NOMINAL 4' T5 STANDARD OUTPUT LAMPS, INTEGRAL ELECTRONIC BALLAST, LEVER PIVOT SAFETY STOPSOCKETS, ADJUSTABLE NOMINAL 8' +/- LENGTH PROVIDED WITH FURNITURE (2) GE F28W /835 64W 120 ■ ' CONDUIT (REFER TO PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION) B ", B1 B1 SINGLE LAMP LOW PROFILE LINEAR T5 FLUORESCENT STRIP FOR NOMINAL 3' T5 STANDARD OUTPUT LAMPS, INTEGRAL ELECTRONIC BALLAST, LEVER PIVOT SAFETY STOP SOCKETS PROVIDED WITH FURNITURE (1) GE F21F5/835 27W 120 CONDUIT RUN EXPOSED - 3/4 LION " / /// // Q ' HOMERUN TO PANEL LA, CIRCUITS #1,3,5 & 2 2 -J LA- 1,3,5& COMMA (,) INDICATES SHARED NEUTRAL #10 AMPERSAND ( &) INDICATES SEPARATE NEUTRAL a ■ ■ VERT B1 CONDUIT RUN CONCEALED - 3/4 , UON CONDUIT IN OR BELOW FLOOR SLAB OR GRADE OR ROOF ■ 1 B2 SINGLE LAMP LOW PROFILE LINEAR T5 FLUORESCENT STRIP FOR NOMINAL 4' T5 STANDARD OUTPUT LAMPS, INTEGRAL ELECTRONIC BALLAST, LEVER PIVOT SAFETY STOP SOCKETS PROVIDED WITH FURNITURE (1) GE F28W/835 32W 120 - 3/4" UON I1 I CONDUIT WITH QUANTITY OF CONDUCTORS AS INDICATED BY HASH MARKS. NUMBER ADJACENT TO HASH MARKS INDICATES WIRE SIZE. HASH MARKS WITHOUT NUMBER INDICATES #12 CONDUCTORS. NO HASH MARKS INDICATES 2 #12 CONDUCTORS. (GROUND CONDUCTOR IS NOT INDICATED). 82 o CONDUIT UP �� C 7" DIAMETER RECESSED COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNUGHT WITH SPECULAR CLEAR ALZAK REFLECTOR, LOW IRIDESCENT FINISH, ELECTRONIC BALLAST AND 42W TRIPLE LAMP PORTFOLIO (COOPER) C7042E -- C7400LI CRTR42WGX24q -4 45W 120- 277 • CONDUIT DOWN ] CONDUIT STUB -OUT WITH CAP SYMBOL DESCRIPTION MOUNTING (U.N.O.) REMARKS © C1 C 1 MONOPOINT TRACK ACCENT LIGHT WITH ELECTRONIC BALLAST, 39W CERAMIC METAL HALIDE LAMP AND SPECULAR CLEAR REFLECTOR HALO (COOPER) L5300- 39E -SC -PL /L250 SPREAD L AND W AND W/ 209P SPREAD LENS MONOPOINT A FEED GE CMH39TCU 37W 120 POWER RECEPTACLE - 20AMP, 125V, 3WIRE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE - 20AMP, 125V, 3WIRE QUADRAPLEX RECEPTACLE - 20AMP, 125V, 3WIRE CFI RECEPTACLE - 20AMP, 125V, 3WIRE DUPLEX, ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLE - 20AMP, 125V, 3WIRE QUADRAPLEX, ISOLATED GND RECEPTACLE - FLUSH, CEILING MOUNTED RECEPTACLE - FLUSH, FLOOR MOUNTED RECEPTACLE - SPECIFIC CODE SIZES JUNCTION BOX DISCONNECT SWITCH - NON FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH - FUSED COMBINATION MOTOR STARTER -MOTOR RATED SWITCH - MOTOR RATED BRANCH PANEL RECESSED BRANCH PANEL SURFACE CIRCUIT BREAKER - SINGLE LINE KILO -WATT METER - SINGLE LINE TRANSFORMER - SINGLE LINE MAIN GROUND BU5 (MGB) +18" +18" AS NOTED +18" +18" AS NOTED - +6' -0" TOP +6' -0" TOP +6' -0" TOP AS REQUIRED +6' -0" TOP +6' -O" TOP - - WP INDICATES WEATHERPROOF GFI INDICATES GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTION LP1 -1 INDICATES PANEL & CIRCUIT CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL NEMA CONFIGURATION AS - AMPERE SWITCH AS - AMPERE SWITCH, AF - AMPERE FUSE NUMERAL INDICATES SIZE p, W /PILOT LIGHT - - _ - _� 3 i - _'' 0 C2 C 7" DIAMETER RECESSED COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNUGHT WITH SPECULAR CLEAR ALZAK REFLECTOR, LOW IRIDESCENT FINISH, ELECTRONIC BALLAST AND 42W TRIPLE LAMP PORTFOLIO (COOPER) C7042E - C7400LI CRTR42WGX24q -4 45W 120- 277 hd F1 TRACK IL. I F F1 TRACK MOUNTED ACCENT LIGHT WITH ELECTRONIC BALLAST, 39W CERAMIC METAL HALIDE LAMP AND SPECULAR CLEAR REFLECTOR REMARKS: 1 OORIENT ARCHITECT FIXTURES / SPECY F AS SHOWN 2. FINISH. O ON PLANS. SINGLE CIRCUIT SURFACE MOUNTED BLACK TRACK WITH ALL NECESSARY FEEDS, JOINERS AND CAPS AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION HALO (COOPER) POWER -TRAC L5300- 39E- SC -MBL W/L250 SPREAD LENS HALO POWER -TRAC L650 -2'MB W/ L901 MB GE CMH39TCU 37W . 120 1. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL FLOOR PLANS FOR WALL AND FLOOR FINISHES BEING REMOVED. IN EFFECTED AREAS, REMOVE DEVICE TRIM AND DISCONNECT ITEMS AS REQUIRED FOR REMOVAL OF INDICATED FINISHES. REINSTALL AT NEW FINISHES. FIELD VERIFY QUANTITY OF DEVICES TYPICAL ALL FLOORS. 2. COORDINATE DEMOLITION WORK WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR. FOR DEMOUTION RELATED TO ARCHITECTURAL OR MECHANICAL REFER TO "A" OR "M" DRAWINGS. 3. THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION, MAINTAIN CONTINUITY OF ALL ELECTRICAL AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS WIRING AND SERVICES TO ALL ITEMS WHICH ARE REQUIRED FOR CONSTRUCTION. ANY REQUIRED INTERRUPTION OF THESE SERVICES SHALL BE FULLY COORDINATED WITH THE GENERAL CONTACTOR. 4. DRAWINGS ARE SCHEMATIC. EXTENT OF DEMOLITION SHOWN IS APPROXIMATE. FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS. 5. EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INDICATED TO BE REMOVED SHALL HAVE SERVING BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING AND LOW VOLTAGE CABLING FULLY REMOVED BACK TO POINT OF SERVICE WHICH REMAINS. EXISTING CONDUIT SHALL BE FULLY REMOVED BACK TO POINT WHERE CONFLICT WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION IS FULLY ELIMINATED. 6 LIGHT FIXTURES SCHEDULED FOR REMOVAL AND REUSE SHALL BE CLEANED, RELAMPED AND REPAIRED TO NEW OPERATING CONDITION. MATCH LAMP TYPE AND MANUFACTURER IN USE AT STORE. 7. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR EXACT LOCATION OF CEILING MOUNTED LIGHTS AND DEVICES. 8. UGHT FIXTURES (INCLUDING LAMPS /BALLASTS) THAT ARE SCHEDULED FOR DEMOLITION SHALL BE DISPOSED OF BY THE CONTRACTOR, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON THE LIGHTING PLAN. CERTIFY IN WRITING THAT THE TRANSPORTATION, STORAGE, PROCESSING, AND DISPOSAL METHODS OF ALL LAMPS /BALLASTS ARE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL LOCAL., COUNTY, STATE, AND NATIONAL ORDINANCES AND REQUIREMENTS. 9. DISCONNECTED TELECOMMUNICATIONS /FIRE /SECURITY /SOUND /ETC. CABLES SHALL BE REMOVED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NEC. CABLES SHALL NOT BE LEFT ABANDONED. 10. EXISTING PANELBOARDS WHICH ARE AFFECTED BY THIS PROJECT SHALL BE THOROUGHLY CLEANED AND VACUUMED TO REMOVE DIRT AND DEBRIS PRIOR TO PROJECT CLOSEOUT. CONDUCTORS WITHIN PANELBOARD SHALL BE NEATLY ORGANIZED USING CABLE TIES. SPLICES IN PANELBOARD ARE NOT ALLOWED. REMOVE ALL SPARE CONDUCTORS FROM PANELBOARD. 11. THE EXISTING DEVICE /EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS SHOWN ON THE DEMOLITION DRAWINGS ARE BASED ON THE RECORD DRAWINGS. THE SUB - CONTRACTORS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR VERIFYING THE ACTUAL LOCATIONS FOR ALL EXISTING DEVICES TO DETERMINE THE EXTENT OF THE DEMOU11ON WORK REQUIRED. INCLUDE IN THE SCOPE OF THIS PROJECT, THE VERIFICATION OF ALL BRANCH CIRCUIT NUMBERS SERVING ALL EXISTING DEVICES TO REMAIN AND EQUIPMENT. ELECTRICAL PRE-CONSTRUCTION F F j 6) Q AS NF 1 P AS AF = @ o Sm I) mass H1 TRACK H H 1 TRACK MOUNTED ACCENT LIGHT WITH ELECTRONIC BALLAST, 75W HALOGEN LAMP WITH BEZEL SHADE REMARKS: 1. ORIENT FIXTURES WITH OPTICS AS SHOWN ON PLANS. 2. ARCHITECT TO VERIFY /SPECIFY PAINT FINISH. SINGLE CIRCUIT SURFACE MOUNTED BLACK TRACK WITH ALL NECESSARY FEEDS, JOINERS AND CAPS AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION LIGHTOUER LYTESPAN TRACK SYSTEM 8201WH W/8247WH BEZEL SHADE LIGHTOUER LYTESPAN 6000BK PAR38 75W 80W 120 - H H 1 EE1 EE1 EXTERIOR EMERGENCY EGRESS LIGHT FIXTURE WITH DARK BRONZE FINISH, NICKEL - CADMIUM 90 MINUTES EMERGENCY BATTERY AND TWO XENON LAMPS, LISTED FOR WET LOCATION LITHONIA AFN- DB -EXT (2) 6W WEDGE-BASE XENON 21W/ 35W 120- 277 NOT USED K2 K3 K4 2'--0" X 4'--0" RECESSED FLUORESCENT FIXTURE WITH 18 CELL PARABOLIC LOUVERS, ELECTRONIC BALLAST AND (2) T8 LAMPS (3) T8 LAMPS (4) T8 LAMPS UGHTOUER DPA2G -18LS -232- UNV -HI DPA2G -18LS -332- UNV -H3 DPA2G-18LS-432- UNV -H4 F32T8/841 62W 93W 124W 120- 277 120- 277 120- 277 K2 WIP NL K2 VOICE /DATA/TV ■ D ► COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET W/ SINGLE DEVICE RING & PLATE TELEPHONE OUTLET W /SINGLE DEVICE RING & PLATE PHONE /COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET PHONE /COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED TELEPHONE TERMINAL BACKBOARD CABLE TV OUTLET +18" +18" +18" FLOOR WALL WALL 4S BACK BOX & 3/4" C.D. W/ PULL WIRE TO TBB, UNO. 4S BACK BOX & 3/4" C.O. W/ PULL WIRE TO TBB, UNO 4S BACK BOX & 3/4" C.O. W/ PULL WIRE TO TBB, UNO PROVIDE 3/4" C.O. W/ PULL WIRE TO TBB, UNO 3/4" x 6' x 8' FIRE TREATED PLYWOOD BACKBOARD W/ DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE AND 1 1#6 CND # ND L2 L3 L4 2' -0" X 4' -0" RECESSED FLUORESCENT FIXTURE WITH ACRYLIC LENS, ELECTRONIC BALLAST AND (2) T8 LAMPS (3) T8 LAMPS (4) T8 LAMPS UTHONIA 2GT8 - 232 -Al2 -MVOLT -1/2 GEBIOIS 2GT8- 332 -Al2 -MVOLT -1/3 GEB1OIS 2GT8 - 432 -Al2 -MVOLT -1/4 GEBIOIS F32T8/841 65W 95W 124W 120- 277 120- 277 120- 277 SEE NOTE 4 BELOW L3 WP NL v M 7 -0" X 7 -0" RECESSED MOUNTED FLUORESCENT FIXTURE WITH ACRYLIC LENS, ELECTRONIC BALLAST AND T8 LAMPS LITHONIA 2GT8- 2U31 -Al2- MVOLT-GEB101S F32T8U/841 65W 120- I I M Q UGHTING P P1 1' -O" X 4' -O" SURFACE MOUNTED FLUORESCENT FIXTURE WITH ACRYLIC LENS, ELECTRONIC BALLAST AND (2) T8 LAMPS (1) T8 LAMP LITHONIA SB-- 232- MVOLT- GEB101S M- 132 -Al2- MVOLT- GEB1OIS F32T8/841 65W 32W 120- 277 MOUNT IF NO CEILING $a t a SD [M SWITCH - SINGLE POLE SWITCH - THREE WAY SWITCH - SINGLE POLE DIMMER 60-MINUTE ROTARY TIME SWITCH +46" +46" +46" +46" LOWER CASE LETTER INDICATES SWITCH LEG LOWER CASE LETTER INDICATES SWITCH LEG 20A, 125V RATED NOTE: FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE SYMBOLS SEE FIXTURE SCHEDULE THIS SHEET (P 0 Q 8 DIAMETER RECESSED COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNUGHT WITH SPECULAR CLEAR ALZAK REFLECTOR, LOW IRIDESCENT FINISH, ELECTRONIC BALLAST AND 42W TRIPLE LAMP, USTED FOR DAMP LOCATION PORTFOLIO (COOPER) C8142E - C8400LI CRTR42WGX24q -4 45W 120- 277 MISC -� T THERMOSTAT BY DIVISION 15 PROVIDE BACKBOX AND 1 2 " CONDUIT TO CORRESPONDING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, COORDINATE LOCATION WITH MECHANICAL PLANS 2' -0" SURFACE MOUNTED FLUORESCENT FIXTURE WITH ACRYLIC LENS, ELECTRONIC BALLAST AND (1) T8 LAMP LITHONIA W-1 -17- MVOLT- GEBIOIS F17T8/841 22W 120- 277 I I R I I R SITE REVIEW: �, ❑ FLOOR BOX WITH POWER AND DATA OUTLETS WIREMOLD 881 PVC FLOOR BOX WITH 881 RC4ATCBK INSERT RS EXISTING WALL MOUNTED COMPACT FLUORESCENT LIGHT CRTR42WGX24q -4 45W 120- 277 1. PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION, VISIT PROJECT SITE AND REVIEW ALL AREAS OF THE STORE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, BACKROOMS, UNOCCUPIED SPACES AND ABOVE CEIUNG AREAS TO IDENTIFY THE FOLLOWING ITEMS WHICH MAY NOT BE SHOWN ON THE PLANS: a) EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT THAT MUST BE REMOVED AND/OR / RELOCATED GENERAL N 0 T E S • • 11. DMSION 16 CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE MOTOR STARTERS FOR - 0 �� EXIT EXIT EDGE -LIT LED RECESSED CEILING MOUNTED UNIVERSAL EXIT SIGN WITH UNFINISHED HOUSING PAINTED TO MATCH CEILING AND NICKEL - CADMIUM 90 MINUTES EMERGENCY BATTERY. HOT, UNSWITCHED BRANCH CIRCUIT TO FIXTURE. LITHONIA EDG 1 G 120 277 EL N / LED 5W 120- 277 1. ALL WIRING METHODS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL AND NATIONAL CODES. ALL POWER WIRE ON THE PREMISE SHALL All HVAC EQUIPMENT AS REQUIRED BY DMSION 15. BE INSTALLED IN CONDUIT. CONDUCTOR INSULATION SHALL BE 1 �• FO RECEPTACLE p THAT REQUIRE SURFACE MOUNTING, THW, THHN OR THWN. SEE SPECIFICATION 2.02A3 ON SHEET PRR OVIDE STEEL, RAISED LOCATIONS COVER. VER. MC CABLERS MORE ALLOWED ONLYFOR BRANCH C CIRCUITS 20A OR LESS. 13. REFER AND NIC SPECIFICATIONS. DRAWINGS FOR EXACUI HVAC WIRE EQUIPMENT 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEIUNG CONDUIT SIZES, CIRCUIT BREAKER AND DISCONNECT SIZES WITH EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE PRIOR TO ROUGH --IN. PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATIONS OF ALL DEVICES LOCATED IN CEILING. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING 14. ALL CONNECTIONS TO HVAC EQUIPMENT SHALL BE MADE WTFH COPPER PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATIONS OF ALL DEVICES LOCATED IN CEIUNG. CONDUCTORS ONLY. 4. ALL RECEPTACLES SHALL BE MOUNTED WITH THE GROUND PRONG UP. 15. PROVIDE FUSIBLE DISCONNECT SWITCHES OR HACR CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR ALL HVAC EQUIPMENT. FUSE SIZES SHALL BE AS INDICATED ON 5. ALL BRANCH CIRCUIT CONDUIT SHALL HAVE GROUND WIRE IN ADDITION EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES. THE DMSION 16 CONTRACTOR SHALL TO CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS SHOWN. COORDINATE DISCONNECT SWITCH AND FUSE SIZES WITH DMSION 15 CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO ORDERING MATERIAL 6. SOME ELECTRICAL DEVICES REQUIRE PRECISE POSITIONING TO 16. FIRE SEAL ALL FIRE WALL PENETRATIONS FOR CONDUITS WITH AN COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK AND FINISHES. APPROVED FIRE SEALANT AFTER CONDUIT INSTALLATION. FIRE SEAL SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND DETAILS. SHALL PROVIDE EQUAL FIRE RATING AS WALL. 7. MEANS OF EGRESS IDENTIFICATION AND ILLUMINATION SHALL BE 17. ALL RECEPTACLE CIRCUITS UP TO 100' -0" IN LENGTH SHALL UTILIZE PROVIDED PER APPLICABLE BUILDING CODE #12 CONDUCTORS MINIMUM. ALL RECEPTACLE CIRCUITS FROM 101' -0" TO 150' -0" IN LENGTH SHALL UTILIZE #10 CONDUCTORS MINIMUM. ALL 8. WHEN SPACE ABOVE CEILING I5 INDICATED TO BE A RETURN AIR RECEPTACLE CIRCUITS 151' -0" UP TO 250' - IN LENGTH SHALL PLENUM, PLENUM NONCOMBUSTIBLE CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS UTILIZE 18 CONDUCTORS MINIMUM. CIRCUITS ABOVE 251' - O" SHALL ti TO BE USED ABOVE CEILING, INCLUDING EXISTING AND NEW UTILIZE #6 CONDUCTORS MINIMUM. f WIRING EXCEPT INSULATION OF 25 FLAME SPREAD AND 50 SMOKE t, 18. ALL NIGHT LIGHTS AND EMERGENCY LIGHTS SHALL BE UNSWfFCHED. ' DEVELOPMENT FINISH RATING. LOW VOLTAGE OR LIMITED POWER PROVIDE SEPARATE HOT CONDUCTOR, BY- PASSING CONTROLS, TO I , ' - . WIRING MAY BE LABELED PLENUM RATED TYPE. EMERGENCY BALLAST. 9. UON ALL OUTLET HEIGHT DIMENSIONS SHALL BE TO CENTER OF DEVICE, MEASURED FROM FINISHED FLOOR. 19. ALL LIGHTING CIRCUITS UP TO 100' -0" IN LENGTH SHALL UTILIZE #12 CONDUCTORS MINIMUM. ALL LIGHTING CIRCUITS FROM 101' -D" TO 10. DMSION 16 CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE PULL STRING IN ALL 150' -0" IN LENGTH SHALL UTILIZE #10 CONDUCTORS MINIMUM. CONDUITS. CIRCUITS ABOVE 251' -0" SHALL UTILIZE #6 CONDUCTORS. TO ACCOMMODATE THE NEW WORK. NOTES. 1. SEE LIGHTING PLAN AND GENERAL NOTE 8 ON SHEET E -101 FOR 3. FLUORESCENT FIXTURES SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH HIGH POWER FACTOR, b) EXISTING BRANCH CIRCUITS, ELECTRICAL FEEDERS, AND ASSOCIATED RACEWAY • L FIXT TO BE PROVIDED WITH 90 MINUTES EMERGENCY BATTERY. HIGH FREQUENCY ELECTRONIC BALLASTS. RACEWAY WHICH ARE NOT SCHEDULED FOR REMOVAL, BUT WILL REQUIRE MODIFICATION TO ACCOMMODATE THE NEW WORK. " " " " c EXISTING CABLING AND RACEWAYS FOR LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS WHICH "B", 2. LIGHTING FIXTURES TYPE 81 AND 62 ARE PROVIDED AS PART OF 4. PROVIDE MATCHING SURFACE MOUNTED FIXTURES FOR INVENTORY ROOM. THE FURNITURE BY FURNITURE SUPPLIER. FIELD VERIFY AND COORDINATE. THE FIXTURES SHALL BE SIMILAR TO LITHONIA 2M- 232(OR ARE NOT SCHEDULED FOR REMOVAL, BUT WILL REQUIRE MODIFICATION PROVIDE IF REQUIRED. 332) --Al2- MVOLT- GEBIOIS. TO ACCOMMODATE THE NEW WORK. 2. INCLUDE THE COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH: a) REMOVING AND /OR RELOCATING EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TO ACCOMMODATE NEW WORK. INCLUDE COST ASSOCIATED WITH EXTENDING ASSOCIATED CONDUCTORS, CABLING AND RACEWAY TO MAINTAIN EQUIPMENT FULLY OPERATIONAL b) MODIFYING AND REPLACEMENT (WITH NEW AS REQUIRED) OF EXISTING BRANCH CIRCUITS AND ELECTRICAL FEEDERS TO MAINTAIN CONTINUITY OF CIRCUITS /COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH RE- SUPPORTING AND REPLACEMENT (WITH NEW AS REQUIRED) OF ASSOCIATED RACEWAY. c) MODIFYING AND /OR REPLACEMENT (WITH NEW) OF EXISTING LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEM SYSTEM CABLING TO MAINTAIN CONTINUITY OF CABLING TO EQUIPMENT NOT SCHEDULED FOR REMOVAL. THIS SHALL INCLUDE RE- SUPPORTING AND REPLACEMENT (WITH NEW AS REQUIRED) OF CABLE AND ASSOCIATED RACEWAY. SPLICING OF LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEM CABLE IS NOT ACCEPTABLE. 3. NOTIFY OWNER OF ANY ADDITIONAL COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH EXTRA WORK AS A RESULT OF THE ELECTRICAL PRE - CONSTRUCTION REVIEW. Carter:Burgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (714) 327-1600 FAX: (714) 327 -1601 NO. COPYRIGHT © 2008 CARTER & BURGESS. INC. at &t DATE EXPIRES 08/26/09 ISSUES /REVISIONS - 06-05-08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT DESCRIPTION 16415 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 DRAWN BY: RT S i t %k° PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE: DESIGNED BY: RT CHECKED BY: BLD ELECTRICAL GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS & ABBREVIATIONS �+R i APPROVED BY: CNB 444017.011:037.0001 NONE E -001 Alteration Exceptions ❑ No changes are being made to the lighting (check appropriate box - sec. 1132.3) APPLICABILITY YES, NO, N/A Less than 60% of the fixtures new, installed wattage not COMPONENT ❑ increased & space use not changed Lighting Motor, and Tr n a sformer Permit '' � Plans Checklist LTG -CHK 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Cade Compliance Forms Revised July 2007 Project Address 16415 SOUTHCENTER PKWY Date 5/22/2008 TUKWILA, WA APPLICABILITY YES, NO, N/A CODE SECTION COMPONENT INFORMATION REQUIRED LOCATION ON PLANS BUILDING DEPARTMENT NOTES LIGHTING CONTROLS (Section 1513) YES 1513.1 Local cont /access Schedule with type, indicate locations E -101 OFFICE YES 1513.2 Area controls Maximum limit per switch E -101 0.80 YES 1513.3 Daylight zone control Schedule with type and features, indicate locations E -101 YES 001 Vertical glazing Indicate vertical glazing on plans E -101 "B2" - 4' Fluor. w/ (1) 48" T5 28W lamps, elec. ballast N/A Overhead glazing Indicate overhead glazing on plans YES 1513.4 Display /exhib/ special Indicate separate controls E -101 002, N/A 1513.5 Exterior shut- off : Schedule with type and features, indicate location 8 65.0 N/A 006 (a) timer w /backup Indicate location "RS" - Comp. Fluor. w/ 42W tripl, elec. ballast N/A 45.0 (b) photocell. Indicate location YES 1513.6 Interior auto shut-off Indicate location E -101 N/A 1513.6.1 (a) occup. sensors Schedule with type and locations YES 1513.6.2 (b) auto switches Schedule with type and features (back -up, override capability); Indicate size of zone on plans E -101 N/A 1513.7 Commissioning Indicate requirements for lighting controls commissioning EXIT SIGNS (Section 1514) YES 1514 Max. watts Indicate watts for each exit sign - 5 watts E -001 LIGHTING POWER ALLOWANCE (Section 1530 -1532) YES 1531 Interior Lighting Summary Form Completed and attached. Schedule with fixture types, lamps, ballasts, watts per fixture E -001 N/A 1532 Exterior Lighting Summary Form Completed and attached. Schedule with fixture types, lamps, ballasts, watts per fixture MOTORS (Section 1511) N/A 1511 Elec Motor Efficiency MECH -MOT or Equipment Schedule with hp, rpm, efficiency TRANSFORMERS (Section 1540) N/A 1540 Transformers Indicate size and efficiency Interior Li P . htin Summary 9 Y LTG -INT 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised July 2007 PROJECT Project Address at &t - TUKWILA Date 5/22/2008 INFORMATION 16415 SOUTHCENTER PKWY For Building Department Use TUKWILA, WA Applicant Name JACOBS CARTER BURGESS Applicant Address 4 HUTTON CENTER DRIVE, SUITE 800 SANTA ANA, CA 92707 Applicant Phone (714) 327 -1600 Location (floor /room no.) Occupancy Description Allowed Watts per ft2 Area in ft Allowed X Area 001 RETAIL 1.50 985.0 1477.5 001 RETAIL - DISPLAY (per 15 - footnote 10)** 1.50 56.0 84.0 002, 003, 004 OFFICE 1.00 364.0 364.0 005A, 005B, 006 TOILET, MDF ROOM 0.80 89.0 71.2 ** From Table 15 -1 (over) - document all exceptions on form LTG -LPA Total Allowed Watts 1996.7 Location (floor /room no.) Fixture Description Number of Fixtures Watts/ Fixture Watts Proposed 001 ' "M" - 2'x2' Fluor. w/ (2) 48" T8 32W lamps, elec. ballast 13 65.0 845.0 001 "B" - 4' Fluor. w/ (2) 48" T5 28W lamps, elec. ballast 8 Part of furn. Per 1512.2 001 "B1" - 4' Fluor. w/ (1) 36" T5 21W lamps, elec. ballast 4 Part of furn. Per 1512.2 001 "B2" - 4' Fluor. w/ (1) 48" T5 28W lamps, elec. ballast 2 Part of furn. Per 1512.2 001 "F" - 2' Track Light wl 39W CMH, elec. Ballast 2 100.0 200.0 002, 003, 004, 005 "L2" - 2'x4' Fluor. w/ (2) 48" T8 32W (amps, elec. ballast 8 65.0 520.0 006 "RS" - Comp. Fluor. w/ 42W tripl, elec. ballast 1 45.0 45.0 Total Proposed Watts may not exceed Total Total Proposed Watts Allowed Watts for Interior 1610.0 Project Description Compliance Option 0 New Building 0 Addition - Alteration laps Included Refer to WSEC Section 1513 for controls and commissioning requirements. 0 Prescriptive ighting Power Allowance LPA spaces are indicated on plans 0 Systems Analysis Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage Proposed Lighting Wattage Li htin Motor and Transformer 9 g � Permit Plans Checklist LTG -CHK 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised July 2007 Lighting - General Requirements 1513 Lighting Controls: Lighting, including exempt lighting in Section 1512, shall comply with this section. Where occupancy sensors are cited, they shall have the features listed in Section 1513.6.1. Where automatic time switches are cited, they shall have the features listed in Section 1513.6.2. 1513.1 Local Control and Accessibility: Each space, enclosed by walls or ceiling - height partitions, shall be provided with lighting controls located within that space. The lighting controls, whether one or more, shall be capable of turning off all lights within the space. The controls shall be readily accessible, at the point of entry /exit, to personnel occupying or using the space. EXCEPTIONS: The following lighting controls may be centralized in remote locations: 1. Lighting controls for spaces which must be used as a whole. 2. Automatic controls. 3. Controls requiring trained operators. 4. Controls for safety hazards and security. 1513.2 Area Controls: The maximum lighting power that may be controlled from a single switch or automatic control shall not exceed that which is provided by a 20 ampere circuit loaded to not more than 80 %. A master control may be installed provided the individual switches retain their capability to function independently. Circuit breakers may not be used as the sole means of switching. EXCEPTIONS: 1. Industrial or manufacturing process areas, as may be required for production. 2. Areas less than 5% of the building footprint for footprints over 100,000 ft 1513.3 Daylight Zone Control: All daylighted zones, as defined in Chapter 2, both under overhead glazing and adjacent to vertical glazing, shall be provided with individual controls, or daylight- or occupant- sensing automatic controls, which control the lights independent of general area lighting. Contiguous daylight zones adjacent to vertical glazing are allowed to be controlled by a single controlling device provided that they do not include zones facing more than two adjacent cardinal orientations (i.e. north, east, south, west). Daylight zones under overhead glazing more than 15 feet from the perimeter shall be controlled separately from daylight zones adjacent to vertical glazing. EXCEPTION: Daylight spaces enclosed by walls or ceiling height partitions and containing 2 or fewer light fixtures are not required to have a separate switch for general area lighting. 1513.4 Display, Exhibition and Specialty Lighting Controls: All display, exhibition or specialty lighting shall be controlled independently of general area lighting. 1513.5 Automatic Shut -off Controls, Exterior: Lighting for all exterior applications shall have automatic controls capable of turning off exterior lighting when sufficient daylight is available or when the lighting is not required during nighttime hours. Lighting not designated for dusk -to -dawn operation shall be controlled by either: a. A combination of a photosensor and a time switch; or b. An astronomical time switch. Lighting designated for dusk -to -dawn operation shall be controlled by an astronomical time switch or photosensor. All time switches shall be capable of retaining programming and the time setting during loss of power for a period of at least 10 hours. EXCEPTION: Lighting for covered vehicle entrances or exits from buildings or parking structures where required for safety, security, or eye adaptation. 1513.6 Automatic Shut -Off Controls, Interior: Buildings greater than 5,000 ft and all school classrooms shall be equipped with separate automatic controls to shut off the lighting during unoccupied hours. Within these buildings, all office areas less than 300 ft enclosed by walls or ceiling - height partitions, and all meeting and conference rooms, and all school classrooms, shall be equipped with occupancy sensors that comply with Section 1513.6.1. For other spaces, automatic controls may be an occupancy sensor, time switch or other device capable of automatically shutting off lighting. EXCEPTIONS: 1. Areas that must be continuously illuminated (e.g., 24 -hour convenience stores), or illuminated in a manner requiring manual operation of the lighting. 2. Emergency lighting systems. 3. Switching for industrial or manufacturing process facilities as may be required for production. 4. Hospitals and laboratory spaces. 5. Areas in which medical or dental tasks are performed are exempt from the occupancy sensor requirement. 1513.6.1 Occupancy Sensors: Occupancy sensors shall be capable of automatically turning off all the lights in an area, no more than 30 minutes after the area has been vacated. Light fixtures controlled by occupancy sensors shall have a wall - mounted, manual switch capable of turning off lights when the space is occupied. EXCEPTION: Occupancy sensors in stairwells are allowed to have two step lighting (high -light and low - light) provided the control fails in the high -light position. 1513.6.2 Automatic Time Switches: Automatic time switches shall have a minimum 7 day clock and be capable of being set for 7 different day types per week and incorporate an automatic holiday "shut -off" feature, which turns off all loads for at least 24 hours and then resumes normally scheduled operations. Automatic time switches shall also have program back -up capabilities, which prevent the loss of program and time settings for at least 10 hours, if power is interrupted. Automatic time switches shall incorporate an over -ride switching device which: a. is readily accessible; b. is located so that a person using the device can see the lights or the areas controlled by the switch, or so that the area being illuminated is annunciated; c. is manually operated; d. allows the lighting to remain on for no more than 2 hours when an over -ride is initiated; and e. controls an area not exceeding 5,000 ft or 5% of the building footprint for footprints over 100,000 ft whichever is greater. 1513.7 Commissioning. Requirements: For lighting controls which include daylight or occupant sensing automatic controls, automatic shut -off controls, occupancy sensors, or automatic time switches, the lighting controls shall be tested to ensure that control devices, components, equipment and systems are calibrated, adjusted and operate in accordance with approved plans and specifications. Sequences of operation shall be functionally tested to ensure they operate in accordance with approved plans and specifications. A complete report of test procedures and results shall be prepared and filed with the owner. Drawing notes shall require commissioning in accordance with this paragraph. 1514 Exit Signs: Exit signs shall have an input power demand of 5 Watts or less per sign. Motors - General Requirements 1511 Electric Motors: All permanently wired polyphase motors of 1 hp or more, which are not part of an HVAC system, shall comply with Section 1437. EXCEPTIONS: 1. Motors that are an integral part of specialized process equipment. 2. Where the motor is integral to a listed piece of equipment for which no complying motor has been approved. Transformers - General Requirements SECTION 1540 - TRANSFORMERS The minimum efficiency of a low voltage dry -type distribution transformer shall be the Class I Efficiency Levels for distribution transformers specified in Table 4 -2 of the "Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers" published by the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA TP- 1- 2002). D i is � 317 COPYRIGHT 0 2008 CURTER & BURGESS. INC. at &t Carter:Burgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (714) 327 -1600 FAX: (714) 327 -1601 1 EXPIRES 08/26/09 NO. DATE ISSUES /REVISIONS - 06 -05 -08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT 16415 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 DRAWN BY: RT PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE: ' LIGHTING COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE DESCRIPTION DESIGNED BY: RT CHECKED BY: BLD APPROVED BY: CNB 444017.011.037.0001 NONE E -002 DESCRIPTION LOCATION DRY DAMP WET BRANCH CIRCUITS #6AWG AND SMALLER THHN THWN THWN FEEDER AND BRANCH CIRCUITS LARGER THAN J/6 AWG XHHW XHHW XHHW -2 EXTERIOR FEEDER & BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING XHHW -2 XHHW -2 XHHW-2 FEEDERS CONNECTED TO 100% RATED CIRCUIT BREAKERS XHHW -2 XHHW -2 XHHW-2 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 16050: GENERAL ELECTRICAL THE DRAWINGS, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, AND DIVISION 1 APPLY TO WORK UNDER THIS SECTION. PART 1 GENERAL: 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. GENERAL: FURNISH ALL LABOR, MATERIALS, APPARATUS, TOOLS, EQUIPMENT, TRANSPORTATION, TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AND SPECIAL OR OCCASIONAL SERVICES AS REQUIRED TO MAKE A COMPLETE WORKING ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION, AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS OR DESCRIBED IN THESE SPECIFICATIONS. B. ALL ELECTRICAL MATERIAL & EQUIPMENT SHALL BE NEW AND IN PERFECT CONDITION WHEN INSTALLED. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE U.L. LISTED. MATERIALS SHALL BE MANUFACTURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPUCABLE STANDARDS OF A.N.S.I., N.E.M.A. & N.B.F.U. REPLACE DEFECTIVE OR DAMAGED MATERIALS OR REPAIR IN A MANNER APPROVED BY THE OWNER. KEEP CONDUITS AND OTHER OPENINGS CLOSED TO PREVENT ENTRY OF FOREIGN MATTER. COVER FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT AND APPARATUS AND PROTECT AGAINST DIRT, WATER, CHEMICAL OR MECHANICAL DAMAGE BEFORE AND DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PERIOD UNTIL FINAL ACCEPTANCE. RESTORE TO ORIGINAL CONDITION ANY FIXTURES, APPARATUS OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGED PRIOR TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE, INCLUDING RESTORATION OF DAMAGED SHOP COATS OF PAINT. DELIVER EQUIPMENT AND STORE AT THE SITE, PROPERLY PACKED AND CRATED, UNTIL FINALLY INSTALLED. C. ANY INCONSISTENCY OR DISCREPANCY IN THE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS SHALL BE CLEARED WITH THE ENGINEER. IT IS UNDERSTOOD FURTHER THAT THE CONTRACTOR HAS READ AND UNDERSTANDS FULLY THE PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS AND ALL RELATED DOCUMENTS ON THIS PROJECT. D. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL UNDERTAKE THE WORK IN ITS ENTIRETY IN ACCORDANCE WITH ITS DESIGN AND PURPOSE. ALL WORK SHALL BE CARRIED OUT IN A PROFESSIONAL MANNER WITH MAXIMUM EFFICIENCY AND EXCELLENT WORKMANSHIP. E. PERMITS AND FEES: THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SECURE AND PAY FOR PERMITS AND FEES NECESSARY FOR EXECUTION AND COMPLETION OF ELECTRICAL WORK, INCLUDING ALL CHARGES BY THE LOCAL GOVERNMENT AND CITY AGENCIES. F. SCOPE OF WORK INCLUDES, BUT NOT LIMITED TO: 1. INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLY OF LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS. 2. GROUNDING. 3. INSTALLATION OF DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS. 4. PROVIDE PANELBOARDS AND OVERCURRENT DEVICES. 5. BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING. 6. EXIT SIGNS AND EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM. 7. INSTALLATION OF CONVENIENCE OUTLETS. 8. INSTALLATION OF TELEPHONE BACKBOARD, TELEPHONE AND DATA OUTLETS AND RACEWAYS. 9. FURNISHING, SUPPORT AND INSTALLATION OF NEW TRANSFORMER. 10. ROUGH -IN WIRING FOR DISPLAY CASE LIGHTING. 11. DEMOLTION AND REMOVALS. 12. LIGHTING CONTROLS, AND TIME SWITCHES. 13. CONNECTIONS OF, AND POWER WIRING TO, HVAC EQUIPMENT: 14. CONDUIT FOR DATA, TELEPHONE AND ALARM SYSTEMS. 15. INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLY OF OWNER FURNISHED FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES. 16. OTHER RELATED SERVICES G. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: 1. PERFORM THE FOLLOWING WORK, IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPROPRIATE SECTIONS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS CITED, WHERE AND AS NECESSARY TO FURNISH A COMPLETE, WORKING ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION. A. CONCRETE: DIVISION 3 B. PAINTING: DIVISION 9 C. DOOR HARDWARE: DIVISION 11 D. MECHANICAL DIVISION 15 2. PROVIDE WIRING FOR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS, AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES OR DETAILS FOR INSTALLATION. THE TERM "WIRING" AS USED HEREIN, INCLUDES FURNISHING AND INSTALLING CONDUIT, WIRE, JUNCTION BOXES, DISCONNECTS ETC. AND MAKING CONNECTIONS. CHECK ARCHITECTURAL AND MECHANICAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED BY OTHERS. BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROPER WIRING AND NECESSARY ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS TO EQUIPMENT TO CONFORM TO SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS OF THE EQUIPMENT. H. PENETRATIONS OF WALLS AND WALL MEMBRANES REQUIRED TO HAVE A FIRE- RESISTANCE RATING SHALL BE PROTECTED WITH THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRE STOPS SUITABLE FOR THE METHOD OF PENETRATION. THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRE STOPS SHALL BE TESTED USING U.B.C. STANDARD 7 -5. I. PROVIDE SEISMIC RESTRAINTS AND ATTACHMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM COMPONENTS AS REQUIRED PER THE STATE AND LOCAL JURISDICTIONS. J. PROVIDE 4" CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PAD FOR ALL FLOOR MOUNTED EQUIPMENT. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS: A. SPECIFIC 1. COMPLY WITH ALL CODES ENFORCED BY THE STATE AND LOCAL JU 2. ALL ELECTRICAL WORK SHALL CONFORM TO ALL REQUIREMENTS OF AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION. 3. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS SPECIFIED UNDER THIS DIVISION SHALL STANDARDS WHERE APPLICABLE. A. UL UNDERWRITERS' LABORATORIES. B. ASTM AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS. C. CBM CERTIFIED BALLAST MANUFACTURERS. D. ANSI AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS. INSTITUTE. E. NEMA NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION 1.03 DRAWINGS: RISDICTTONS. THE CURRENT UBC, NEC, AND CONFORM TO THE FOLLOWING A. LAYOUT: GENERAL LAYOUT SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS SHALL BE FOLLOWED EXCEPT WHERE OTHER WORK MAY CONFLICT WITH THE DRAWINGS. B. ACCURACY: 1. ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC. COMPLETE DETAILS OF THE BUILDING WHICH MAY AFFECT THE ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ARE NOT SHOWN. SIZE AND LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND WIRING ARE SHOWN TO SCALE WHERE POSSIBLE BUT MAY BE DISTORTED FOR CLARITY ON THE DRAWINGS. FINAL LOCATIONS OF OUTLETS AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE SHOWN IN ENLARGED DETAILS OR AS APPROVED BY THE ARCHITECT OR HIS REPRESENTATIVE. IT IS NOT WITHIN THE SCOPE OF DRAWINGS TO SHOW ALL NECESSARY BENDS, OFFSET, PULL BOXES AND OBSTRUCTIONS. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE THE INSTALLATION TO MAINTAIN HEADROOM AND KEEP OPENINGS AND PASSAGEWAYS CLEAR. COORDINATE WITH DRAWINGS OF ALL OTHER TRADES. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY LINES, LEVELS AND DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS AND SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE SETTING OUT OF WORK AND FOR ITS STRICT CONFORMANCE WITH EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE SITE. 1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS: SUBSTITUTIONS OF SPECIFIED DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. GENERAL: REFER TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 FOR REQUIREMENTS. B. C. FORMAT: FURNISH SUBMITTAL DATA NEATLY BOUND IN AN 8 -1/2" X 11" FOLDER OR BINDER WITH A TABLE OF CONTENTS LISTING IN ORDER OF SPECIFICATION SECTION AND PARAGRAPH NUMBER. SUBMITTALS SHALL CONSIST OF DETAILED SHOP DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, CATALOG "CUTS" AND DATA SHEETS CONTAINING PHYSICAL AND DIMENSIONED INFORMATION, PERFORMANCE DATA, ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS, MATERIALS USED IN FABRICATION, MATERIAL FINISH AND THOSE OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES WHICH ARE INCLUDED AND THOSE WHICH ARE EXCLUDED. D. EACH SUBMITTAL SHALL BE THOROUGHLY REVIEWED BY THE CONTRACTOR. THE COVER LETTER ACCOMPANYING SUBMITTAL LETTER SHALL LIST IN FULL THE ITEMS AND DATA SUBMITTED AND SHALL CONTAIN A STATEMENT ACKNOWLEDGING THAT THE CONTRACTOR HAS PERFORMED A DETAILED REVIEW OF THE SUBMITTAL DOCUMENTS PRIOR TO SUBMISSION. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS REQUIREMENT SHALL CONSTITUTE GROUNDS FOR RETURN OF DATA FOR RESUBMISSION WITHOUT REVIEW. E. CONTRACTOR AGREES THAT SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS PROCESSED BY THE ENGINEER ARE NOT CHANGE ORDERS, THAT THE PURPOSE OF SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS BY THE CONTRACTOR IS TO DEMONSTRATE TO THE ENGINEER THAT THE CONTRACTOR UNDERSTANDS THE DESIGN CONCEPT, THAT HE DEMONSTRATES HIS UNDERSTANDING BY INDICATING WHICH EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL HE INTENDS TO FURNISH AND INSTALL AND BY DETAIUNG THE FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION METHODS HE INTENDS TO USE. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS SHALL BE PROPERLY STORED AND ADEQUATELY PROTECTED AND CAREFULLY HANDLED TO PREVENT DAMAGE BEFORE AND DURING INSTALLATION. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS SHALL BE HANDLED, STORED, AND PROTECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS AND AS APPROVED BY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. ELECTRICAL CONDUIT SHALL BE STORED TO PROVIDE PROTECTION FROM THE WEATHER AND ACCIDENTAL DAMAGE. PLASTIC CONDUIT SHALL BE STORED ON EVEN SUPPORTS AND IN LOCATIONS NOT SUBJECT TO DIRECT SUN RAYS OR EXCESSIVE HEAT. CABLES SHALL BE SEALED, STORED AND HANDLED CAREFULLY TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THE OUTER COVERING OR INSULATION AND DAMAGE FROM MOISTURE AND WEATHER. DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE ITEMS, IN HE OPINION OF THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE, SHALL BE REPLACED WITH NEW ITEMS AT THE EXPENSE OF THE CONTRACTOR. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT APPUCABLE) PART 3 EXECUTION: 3.01 TESTS AND GUARANTEES: A. TESTS SHALL BE CONDUCTED DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PERIOD AND AT COMPLETION TO DETERMINE CONFORMITY WITH APPLICABLE CODES AND WITH THESE SPECIFICATIONS. TESTS SHALL BE PERFORMED IN THE PRESENCE OF THE ARCHITECT AND SHALL INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO, THE FOLLOWING: 3.02 INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS A. REFER TO DIVISION 1. B. AT THE TIME OF COMPLETION, AN ADEQUATE PERIOD SHALL BE ALLOTTED BY THE CONTRACTOR FOR INSTRUCTION OF BUILDING OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL IN THE USE OF ALL SYSTEMS. ALL PERSONNEL SHALL BE INSTRUCTED AT ONE TIME, THE CONTRACTOR MAKING ALL NECESSARY ARRANGEMENTS WITH MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVES. THE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER SHALL PROVIDE PRODUCT LITERATURE AND APPLICATION GUIDES FOR THE USERS' REFERENCE. C. COSTS, IF ANY, FOR THE ABOVE SERVICE SHALL BE PAID BY THE CONTRACTOR. 3.03 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS (AS- BUILT) A. PROVIDE PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS AS REQUIRED BY OTHER SECTIONS OF SPECIFICATIONS AND AS REQUIRED HEREIN. SUCH DRAWINGS SHALL FULLY REPRESENT INSTALLED CONDITIONS INCLUDING ACTUAL LOCATION OF OUTLETS, CORRECT CONDUIT AND WIRE SIZING AS WELL AS ROUTING, REVISED FIXTURE SCHEDULING LISTING THE MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCTS ACTUALLY INSTALLED. B. ALL CHANGES TO DRAWINGS SHALL BE MADE BY QUALIFIED DRAFTSPERSONS TO MATCH EXISTING LINE WORK AND LETTERING AS CLOSELY AS POSSIBLE. 3.04 WORKMANSHIP A. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL UNDERTAKE THE WORK IN ITS ENTIRETY IN ACCORDANCE WITH ITS DESIGN AND PURPOSE. ALL WORK SHALL BE CARRIED OUT IN A PROFESSIONAL MANNER WITH MAXIMUM EFFICIENCY AND EXCELLENT WORKMANSHIP. PREPARATION, HANDLING AND INSTALLATION SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS AND TECHNICAL DATA PARTICULAR TO THE PRODUCT SPECIFIED AND /OR APPROVED EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. COORDINATE WORK AND COOPERATE WITH OTHER IN FURNISHING AND PLACING THIS WORK. WORK TO APPROVED SHOPDRAWINGS FOR WORK BY OTHERS AND TO FIELD MEASUREMENTS AS NECESSARY TO PROPERLY FIT THE WORK. CONFORM TO THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR'S ASSOCIATION STANDARD OF INSTALLATION FOR GENERAL INSTALLATION PRACTICE. B. C. 1. INSULATION RESISTANCE: PERFORM 500 -VOLT D.C. TESTS FOR ONE MINUTE ON ALL FEEDER CONDUCTORS, INCLUDING THE NEUTRAL, AND MAKE A TYPED RECORD OF ALL READINGS TO BE INCLUDED IN THE MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS. REPAIR OR REPLACE CIRCUITS SHOWING LESS THAN 40 MEGOHMS RESISTANCE TO GROUND. MAKE TESTS USING BIDDLE INSULATION RESISTANCE MEGGER, OR EQUAL 2. GROUND RESISTANCE: TEST GROUND RESISTANCE PER IEEE STANDARD NO. 81. HIRE AN INDEPENDENT LAB TO PERFORM THE GROUNDING SYSTEM TESTING PER NETA 7.13. CERTIFIED DOCUMENTS SHALL BE PROVIDED TO THE OWNER FOR VERIFICATION PRIOR TO PROJECT COMPLETION. 3. CIRCUITS CONTINUITY: TEST ALL FEEDER AND BRANCH FOR CONTINUITY. TEST ALL NEUTRALS FOR IMPROPER GROUNDS. 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS: TEST LIGHTING CIRCUITS FOR CORRECT OPERATION THROUGH THEIR CONTROL DEVICES. TEST ELECTRIC BASEBOARD HEATERS FOR CORRECT OPERATIONS THROUGH THEIR CONTROL RELAYS/THERMOSTATS. 5. LIGHTING CONTROL CIRCUITS: PERFORM OPERATION TESTS FOR ALL UGHTING CIRCUITS. 6. PROPERLY TEST THE PHASE ROTATION OF ALL NEW FEEDERS AND BRANCH CIRCUITS, AND MAKE SUCH CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS NECESSARY TO INSURE THE CORRECT ROTATION OF ALL MOTOR DRIVEN EQUIPMENT THROUGHOUT THE NEW INSTALLATION. 7. PRODUCT FAILURE: ANY PRODUCTS WHICH FAIL DURING THE TESTS OR ARE RULED UNSATISFACTORY BY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE SHALL BE REPLACED, REPAIRED, OR CORRECTED AS PRESCRIBED BY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE AT THE EXPENSE OF THE CONTRACTOR. TESTS SHALL BE PERFORMED AFTER REPAIRS, REPLACEMENTS OR CORRECTIONS UNTIL SATISFACTORY PERFORMANCE IS DEMONSTRATED. 8. PHYSICAL INSPECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND CABLES: INSPECTION SHALL BE MADE OF ALL EQUIPMENT TO INSURE PROPER ASSEMBLY AND CONSTRUCTION. 9. FURNISH, IN WRITING, A COMPLETE GUARANTEE AGAINST DEFECTIVE MATERIALS AND IMPROPER WORKMANSHIP, SATISFACTORY TO OWNER, FOR ALL PARTS, COMPONENTS, AND OPERATION. INCLUDE IN GUARANTEE COMPLETE MAINTENANCE OF THE SYSTEM, INCLUDING REPLACEMENT PARTS, ALL LABOR AND MATERIALS TO MAINTAIN THE SYSTEM IN PROPER OPERATING CONDITION FOR THE GUARANTEE PERIOD. 3.05 SCHEDULE OF WORK: ARRANGE WORK TO CONFORM TO THE SCHEDULE WHICH HAS BEEN ESTABLISHED FOR THE PROGRESS OF THE WORK. ADVISE REGARDING SHIPPING SCHEDULE OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT. 3.06 SUPERVISION: CONTRACTOR SHALL PERSONALLY OR THROUGH AN AUTHORIZED AND COMPETENT REPRESENTATIVE CONSTANTLY SUPERVISE THE WORK FROM BEGINNING TO COMPLETION AND, WITHIN REASON, KEEP THE SAME WORKMEN AND FOREMAN ON THE PROJECT THROUGHOUT THE PROJECT DURATION. 3.07 PROTECTION: KEEP CONDUITS, JUNCTION BOXES, OUTLET BOXES, AND OTHER OPENINGS CLOSED TO PREVENT ENTRY OF FOREIGN MATTER. COVER FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT AND APPARATUS AND PROTECT AGAINST DIRT, PAINT, WATER, CHEMICAL OR MECHANICAL DAMAGE, BEFORE AND DURING CONSTRUCTION PERIOD. RESTORE TO ORIGINAL CONDITION ANY FIXTURE, APPARATUS, OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGED PRIOR TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE. PROTECT BRIGHT FINISHED SURFACES AND SIMILAR ITEMS UNTIL IN SERVICE. NO RUST OR DAMAGE WILL BE PERMITTED. 3.08 SPECIAL TOOLS: ALL SPECIAL TOOLS FOR PROPER OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF THE EQUIPMENT PROVIDED UNDER THIS SECTION SHALL BE DEUVERED TO THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. 3.09 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. CONTRACTOR SHALL CAREFULLY LAY OUT ALL WORK IN ADVANCE TO AVOID UNNECESSARY CUTTING, CHANNELING, CHASING OR DRILLING OF FLOORS, WALLS, PARTITIONS, CEIUNGS OR OTHER SURFACES. STRUCTURAL MEMBERS WILL NOT BE CUT OR DRILLED WITHOUT THE APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER AND OWNER. WHERE SUCH WORK IS NECESSARY, HOWEVER, DO ALL CUTTING, CORING AND PATCHING OF THE CONSTRUCTION WORK WHICH MAY BE REQUIRED FOR THE PROPER INSTALLATION OF THE ELECTRICAL WORK. ALL PATCHING SHALL BE OF THE SAME MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH AND SHALL ACCURATELY MATCH ALL SURROUNDING WORK. AFTER COMPLETION OF WORK, CLEAN UP RESULTANT DEBRIS AND REMOVE FROM SITE. B. INSTALL ALL REQUIRED SLEEVES, FORMS AND INSETS BEFORE WALLS OR PARTITION ARE BUILT. CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WALLS, PARTITIONS, CEILINGS AND FLOOR NECESSARY FOR RECEPTION OF WORK, CAUSED BY FAILURE TO PROVIDE OR PROPERLY LOCATED SLEEVES, FORMS AND INSETS, INCORRECT LOCATION OF WORK OR FAILURE TO COOPERATE WITH OTHER TRADES, SHALL BE DONE AT EXPENSE OF TRADE RESPONSIBLE. C. NO CUTTING OF FINISHED OR STRUCTURAL WORK MAY BE DONE WITHOUT ACCEPTANCE. WHEN NECESSARY TO HAVE FINISHED MATERIAL OR STRUCTURAL WORK CUT, FURNISH NECESSARY DRAWINGS TO TRADE WHOSE MATERIALS ARE OUT TO BE CUT. 3.10 CLEARANCES: PROVIDE WORKING CLEARANCE IN FRONT OF, IN BACK OF AND TO SIDES FOR ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AS REQUIRED BY NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE. 3.11 DEMOLITION: DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL SERVICES TO THE EXISTING TENANT SPACE TO BE BY THE CONTRACTOR. 3.12 CONNECTIONS: CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL ELECTRICAL FINAL CONNECTIONS AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE AND OPERABLE SYSTEM U.N.O. 3.12 ACCESS PANEL A. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL ACCESS PANELS REQUIRED FOR CODE REQUIRED ACCESS TO ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND JUNCTION BOXES IN HARD CEILING AREAS. B. ACCESS PANELS SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED IN SALES AREA CEILING OR WALLS. DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT THAT NORMALLY WOULD BE CONCEALED FROM VIEW SHALL BE LOCATED AT NORMALLY ACCESSIBLE AREAS SUCH AS ABOVE CEIUNG, NEAR HVAC DIFFUSERS OR IN BACK ROOMS IN ACCESSIBLE CEIUNG AREAS. END OF SECTION SECTION 16100: BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS THE GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, AND DIVISION 1 APPLY TO WORK UNDER THIS SECTION. PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. WORK SPECIFIED IN THIS SECTION ENCOMPASSES PRODUCTS, ASSEMBUES AND BASIC INSTALLATION METHODS REQUIRED FOR ELECTRICAL PROJECT SYSTEMS SPECIFIED UNDER THIS DIVISION AND INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO: 1. CONDUIT, RACEWAYS, AND FITTINGS. 2. WIRE AND CABLES. 3. WIRE CONNECTIONS AND DEVICES. 4. OUTLET BOXES. 5. PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES. 6. SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES. 7. DEVICE PLATES. 8. OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES. 9. TELEPHONE TERMINAL BACKBOARD. 10. DOOR BUZZER AND PUSHBUTTON SYSTEM. 11. BACKGROUND SOUND SYSTEM EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND WIRING. 12. EMPTY RACEWAY PROVISIONS FOR BURGLAR ALARM AND SECURITY SYSTEM DETECTION UNITS AND SWITCHES. 13. PANELBOARDS AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT B. WORK NOT INCLUDED: 1. BACKGROUND SOUND SYSTEM EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY AUDIO CONTRACTOR. 2. BURGLAR ALARM AND SECURITY SYSTEM EQUIPMENT AND WIRING. SUBMITTALS 1.02 A. SUBMIT IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF SECTION 16050 THE FOLLOWING ITEMS: 1. SWITCHES, RECEPTACLES AND DEVICE PLATES. 2. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES. 3. OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES. 4. RACEWAYS. 5. DOOR BUZZERS AND PUSHBUTTON. 6. PANELBOARDS AND TRANSFORMER 2.02 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. RACEWAYS FOR FEEDERS AND BRANCH CIRCUITS SHALL BE, RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL CONDUIT (RGS) & ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT), SUBJECT TO THE RESTRICTIONS OF THE STATE ELECTRIC CODE, MINIMUM OF Y" OR AS SPECIFIED ON DRAWINGS, AS FOLLOWS: 1. RIGID STEEL CONDUIT (RGS) la. RGS SHALL BE PERMITTED UNDER ALL CONDITIONS SUBJECT TO THE RESTRICTIONS OF THE STATE ELECTRIC CODE, EXCEPT AREAS IDENTIFIED AS A CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT BY OWNER OR WHERE EXPOSED IN GMP CLASSIFIED ASEPTIC AREAS (CLASS 100,000 TO CLASS 100). EXPOSED CONDUITS SHALL BE RGS. la. CONDUIT, RIGID STEEL FULL WEIGHT, THREADED, HOT -DIP GALVANIZED, INSIDE ENAMELED, CONFORMING TO ANSI C80.1. 1b. CONDUIT AND FITTINGS SHALL BE THREADED, HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED WITH ZINC COATED THREADS AND SHALL BE IN COMPLIANCE WITH NEC, ANSI AND UL CONNECTORS SHALL HAVE INSULATED THROATS. 1c. THREE -PIECE COUPLNGS: ELECTROPLATED, CAST MALLEABLE IRON. EFCOR 165 SERIES, O.Z. /GEDNEY 4 -50 SERIES OR EQUAL. 1d. THREADLESS COUPLINGS: ELECTROPLATED, CAST MALLEABLE IRON, WITH INTEGRAL CONDUIT STOP. EFCOR 1760. le. THREADLESS CONNECTORS: ELECTROPLATED, CAST MALLEABLE IRON, ON THREADED MALE HUB PLASTIC INSULATED THROAT RATED 90 DEGREES C MINIMUM. EFCOR 1750B SERIES, O.Z. /GEDNEY 31 -050 1T SERIES OR EQUAL 1f. INSULATED BUSHINGS: THREADED POLYPROPYLENE OR THERMOSETTING PHENOLIC RATED 150 DEGREES C MINIMUM. INSULATED GROUNDING BUSHINGS: THREADED CAST MALLEABLE IRON BODY WITH INSULATED THROAT AND STEEL, "LAY -IN" GROUND LUG WITH COMPRESSION SCREW. O.Z. /GEDNEY BLG SERIES, THOMAS & BETTS 3870 SERIES OR EQUAL 1h. INSULATED METAWC BUSHINGS: THREADED CAST MALLEABLE IRON BODY WITH PLASTIC INSULATED THROAT RATED 105 DEGREES C. O.Z. /GEDNEY TYPE B, THOMAS & BETTS 1222 SERIES OR EQUAL 1i. SUPPORT CONDUITS IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC. 2. ELECTRICAL METAWC TUBING (EMT) 2a. EMT SHALL BE PERMITTED FOR BOTH EXPOSED AND CONCEALED WORK - INTERIOR POWER AND UGHTING BRANCH CIRCUITS WHERE RUN CONCEALED ABOVE SUSPENDED CEIUNG, IN STUD WALLS, FURRED SPACES, AND WHERE NOT EXPOSED TO MECHANICAL DAMAGE, OR ABOVE 6' FROM FLOOR. 2b. EMT SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED: a) WHERE SUBJECT TO PHYSICAL DAMAGE, INCLUDING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ROOMS BELOW 8' -0" AFF. b) FOR SIZES LESS THAN 2 3h" IN EXTERIOR & ROOFTOP LOCATIONS. c) IN CORROSIVE AREAS. 2.03 d) IN CINDER BLOCK CONSTRUCTION. A. e) IN HAZARDOUS OR CLASSIFIED ASEPTIC LOCATIONS. 2c. CONDUIT: SHALL BE FORMED OF COLD ROLLED STRIP STEEL, ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE WELDED CONTINUOUSLY ALONG THE LONGITUDINAL SEAM AND HOT -DIP GALVANIZED AFTER FABRICATION. CONDUIT SHALL CONFORM TO ANSI C80.3 SPECIFICATIONS AND SHALL MEET U.L REQUIREMENTS. 2d. FITTINGS SHALL BE COMPRESSION TYPE, STEEL, GLAND NUT AND RING TYPE ONLY. PRESSURE INDENTED DRIVE -ON AND DIE -CAST TYPES SHALL NOT BE USED. CONNECTORS SHALL HAVE INSULATED THROATS 2e. COUPLINGS: ELECTROPLATED, CAST MALLEABLE IRON, GLAND COMPRESSION TYPE, U.L. LISTED RAIN AND CONCRETE TIGHT THROUGH 1 -1/4 INCH TRADE SIZE, O.Z. /GEDNEY 6050W SERIES, EFCOR 760 SERIES OR EQUAL SET SCREW TYPE COUPLINGS MAY BE USED IN DRY LOCATIONS, 0.Z. /GEDNEY 5050 SERIES OR EQUAL 2f. CONNECTORS: GLAND COMPRESSION TYPE WITH CAST MALLEABLE IRON BODY WITH MALE HUB AND INSULATED PLASTIC THROAT 150 DEGREES C. TEMPERATURE RATED. O.Z. /GEDNEY 4050 SERIES OR EQUAL 2g. SUPPORT CONDUITS IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC. 3. FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT 3a. FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT SHALL BE PERMITTED FOR FINAL CONNECTIONS TO, SUSPENDED UGHT FIXTURES, BETWEEN J -BOXES AND RECESSED /SURFACE MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES, TO OVERCOME BUILDING OBSTRUCTIONS, FOR CONNECTIONS TO VIBRATING (24" MAXIMUM), HYDRAUUC, OR PNEUMATIC EQUIPMENT, MOTORS, TRANSFORMERS AND SOLENOIDS IN DRY LOCATIONS. 3b. CONDUIT: SHALL BE FABRICATED IN CONTINUOUS LENGTHS FROM GALVANIZED STEEL STRIP, SPIRALLY WOUND AND FORMED TO PROVIDE AN INTERLOCKING DESIGN AND SHALL BE IN COMPLIANCE WITH NEC AND UL. 4' MAX. LENGTH. FLEXIBLE CONDUIT IS NOT PERMITTED IN WALLS. 3c. FITTINGS: CONNECTORS SHALL BE MADE OF THE SCREW CLAMP WITH CAST MALLEABLE IRON BODIES AND THREADED MALE HUBS WITH INSULATED THROATS. 3d. FLEXIBLE CONDUIT SHALL ONLY BE ALLOWED IN THE LENGTHS AND FOR APPLICATIONS AS ALLOWED BY THE JURISDICTION. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR CORRECTING INSTALLATION THAT IS NOT IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE JURISDICTIONAL REQUIREMENTS 3e. SUPPORT CONDUITS IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC. 4. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT 4a. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT SHALL BE PERMITTED FOR FINAL CONNECTIONS TO VIBRATING (24 MAXIMUM), HYDRAULIC, OR PNEUMATIC EQUIPMENT, MOTORS, TRANSFORMERS AND SOLENOIDS IN OUTDOOR AREAS, MECHANICAL AREAS AND WHERE EXPOSED TO MOISTURE. 4b. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE COVERED CONTINUOUSLY SPIRALLY WOUND GALVANIZED STEEL OR ALUMINUM STRIP WITH INTEGRAL GROUNDING CONDUCTOR AND SHALL BE IN COMPLIANCE WITH NEC AND UL ANACONDA TYPE U.A., COLEMAN TYPE UXT1 OR EQUAL. 4' MAX. LENGTH. 4c. FITTINGS: FITTINGS SHALL BE LIQUID TIGHT, ZINC COATED STEEL CONNECTOR BODY AND GLAND NUT SHALL BE OF CADMIUM PLATED CAST MALLEABLE IRON, WITH INSULATED THROAT, MAX. 24 ", T & B 5331 SERIES, Q.Z. /GEDNEY 4Q -38 -1T SERIES, OR EQUAL 4d. SUPPORT CONDUITS IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC. 1 g. 2.04 B. MC CABLING WIRE AND CABLE A. GENERAL B. 1. METAL CLAD CABLE SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH UL THE CABLE SHALL BEAR THE UL LABEL AND MANUFACTURER'S "E" NUMBER 2. ACCEPTABLE SIZES FOR MC CABLE: 12/2 THROUGH 12/9; 10/2 THROUGH 10/ 9 AND SHALL CONTAIN COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY, NO ALUMINUM ALLOWED 3. MANUFACTURER - AFC OR EQUAL 4. CONDUCTORS: COPPER; SOLID OR STRANDED 5. INSULATION: THERMOPLASTIC (THHN) OR EQUIVALENT; VOLTAGE RATING 600V; TEMPERATURE RATING 90"C 6. ARMOR: ALUMINUM; CORRUGATED OR SMOOTH TUBE 8. CABLE SHALL BE FIRE RATED, 1 HOUR MINIMUM OR HIGHER AS REQUIRED BY SPECIFIC INSTALLATION AREA, UL LISTED, RATED FOR USE IN CABLE TRAY, AND FOR USE IN ENVIRONMENTAL AIR PLENUMS 9. CONNECTORS: FURNISH ONLY UL LISTED MC CONNECTORS MANUFACTURED FOR MC CABLE. CONNECTORS SHALL BE STEEL; DIE CAST NOT ALLOWED. 10. MC CABLING SUPPORTS: CADDY, OR APPROVED EQUAL ALL SUPPORTS SHALL BE U.L. LISTED FOR THE APPLICATION, AND SHALL COMPLY WITH THE NEC. TIE -WRAPS AND STAPLES ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. UTILIZE THE FOLLOWING: 1. SNAP -IN SUPPORTS TO FRAMING STUD, CADDY #MAC2. 2. STRAP TO FRAMING STUD, CADDY #FXC20 3. DROP -WIRE SUPPORTS, CADDY #PCS1. 4. CABLE SNAP CLIP FOR ATTACHMENT TO STRUCTURE, CADDY #SC. 5. CABLE SUPPORT FOR ATTACHMENT TO FRAMING STUD, CADDY #CJ6. 6. SUPPORT AND ANTI- RATTLE CLIP FOR MC THROUGH STUDS, CADDY #781. 11. MC CABLING SHALL ONLY BE ALLOWED FOR APPLICATIONS AS ALLOWED BY THE JURISDICTION AND THE LANDLORD. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, CONTRACTOR SHALL CONFIRM WITH BOTH AGENCIES, THAT MC IS PERMITTED. FOR INSTALLATIONS THAT HAVE NOT BEEN APPROVED BY BOTH AGENCIES, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE REMOVAL OF THE MC AND REPLACEMENT WITH EMT, AT THE EXPENSE OF THE CONTRACTOR. 12. MC CABLING SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED TO RUN INTO THE PANELBOARDS. TRANSITION TO EMT BY MEANS OF A WIREWAY ABOVE PANELBOARDS, AND RUN BRANCH CIRCUITS IN EMT FROM WIREWAY TO PANELBOARDS - NO EXCEPTIONS 13. CONTRACTOR'S BID SHALL REFLECT COSTS FOR UTILIZING MC CABLING AND /OR EMT INSTALLATION AS PERMITTED BY THE JURISDICTION AND LANDLORD. 14. MC CABLE SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED IN AREAS OPEN TO PUBLIC VIEW. 1. WIRE AND CABLE SHALL BE INSULATED COPPER, SIZES AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS AND SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN #12 AWG. ALL #8 AWG AND LARGER SHALL BE STRANDED. ALL #10 AWG WIRE AND SMALLER SHALL BE TYPE SOLID. VOLTAGE RATING OF INSULATION SHALL BE 600 VOLTS. 120V, 20A. CIRCUITS OVER 75 L.F. MUST BE #10 AWG MINIMUM. ALUMINUM WIRE AND CABLE SHALL NOT BE USED. 2. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: GENERAL ELECTRIC CO., ROME CABLE, SOUTHWIRE, TRIANGLE, PWC INC., OR EQUAL. 3. INSULATION TYPES FOR ALL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: 4. FIXTURE WIRE: TYPE AF. 5. COLOR CODE. COLOR CODE 120/208V PHASE A BLACK PHASE B RED PHASE C BLUE NEUTRAL WHITE 6. EQUIPMENT GROUND WIRE SHALL BE GREEN. ISOLATED GROUND WIRE SHALL BE GREEN WITH YELLOW STRIPE. VOLTAGE RATING OF INSULATION SHALL BE 600 VOLTS. 7. ALL WIRES SHALL BE IDENTIFIED BY CIRCUIT NUMBERS IN ALL CABINETS, BOXES WIRING TROUGHS, OTHER ENCLOSURES, AT ALL SPLICES, TERMINATION POINTS, ETC. 8. WIRE RATED FOR 90 DEGREES C SHALL BE USED FOR CIRCUIT WIRING OF RECESSED FIXTURES, BETWEEN FIXTURES, AND THEIR ADJACENT OUTLET BOXES, AS REQUIRED FOR FIXTURE RATING AND FOR BRANCH CIRCUIT EQUIPMENT FEEDS UNDER RAISED FLOORS. 9. PROVIDE CONNECTORS SUITABLE FOR THE TYPE AND SIZE CONDUCTOR USED. JOINTS, TAPS, AND SPLICES OF WIRE #10 AND SMALLER SHALL BE MADE BY MEANS OF "IDEAL -NUT" CONNECTORS OR "3M SCOTCHLOK" SPRING CONNECTORS. #8 AND LARGER CONDUCTORS SHALL BE SPLICED WITH SCREW COMPRESSION CONNECTORS SIMILAR TO "BURNDY" TYPE KVS WITH HEAT OR COLD SHRINK JACKET. CONNECTORS SHALL BE LARGE ENOUGH TO ENCLOSE AND SECURELY FASTEN ALL STRANDS OF THE CONDUCTOR. EACH JOINT, TAP AND SPLICE IN CONDUCTOR #8 AND LARGER SHALL HAVE THE CONNECTOR VOIDS FILLED WITH ELECTRICAL INSULATION PUTTY AND BE TAPED WITH RUBBER AND COVERED WITH PLASTIC TAPE PROVIDING INSULATION NOT LESS THAN TWO HALF - LAPPED LAYERS EACH, "SCOTCH #33 ", "SCOTCH #88 ", "SLIPNOT" GREY" OR EQUAL 10. PROVIDE LUBRICANT AS REQUIRED, "IDEAL WIRE LUBE" OR APPROVED EQUAL OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS STANDARD OUTLET BOXES: GALVANIZED, ONE- PIECE, DRAWN STEEL, KNOCK -OUT TYPE OF SIZE AND CONFIGURATION BEST SUITED TO THE APPLICATION INDICATED ON THE PLANS. MINIMUM BOX SIZE, 4 INCH SQUARE BY 1 -1/2 INCH DEEP. SWITCH BOXES: TWO INCH BY 3 -INCH LONG, GALVANIZED STEEL SWITCH BOXES SHALL BE USED ONLY FOR THE INSTALLATION OF SINGLE SWITCHES, INSTALL MULTIPLE SWITCHES IN STANDARD GANG BOXES WITH RAISED DEVICE COVERS SUITABLE FOR THE APPUCATION INDICATED. C. ENCLOSURES, JUNCTION BOXES, GUTTERS ETC. INSTALLED OUTSIDE OF BUILDING AND SUBJECT TO WEATHER SHALL BE WEATHERPROOF. D. JUNCTION BOXES AND PULL BOXES: LOCATE GENERALLY NOT EXPOSED IN FINISHED SPACE. WHERE NECESSARY, REROUTE RACEWAYS OR MAKE OTHER ARRANGEMENTS FOR CONCEALMENT. PROVIDE PULL BOXES AS INDICATED AND WHERE NECESSARY TO FACILITATE PULLING OF WIRE AND COORDINATE LOCATION WITH OTHER TRADES. COVERS OF JUNCTION BOXES AND PULL BOXES SHALL BE ACCESSIBLE. FOR EMPTY RACEWAY RUNS PROVIDE PULL BOXES EVERY 100' AND AS INDICATED. COORDINATE LOCATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES. E. SET BOXES SQUARE AND TRUE WITH BUILDING FINISH. ERECT WALL AND SWITCH OUTLETS IN ADVANCE OF FURRING AND FIRE PROOFING. SECURE TO BUILDING STRUCTURE BY ADJUSTABLE STRAP IRONS. F. JUNCTION BOXES & PULL BOXES SHALL BE SIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC. SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES A. GENERAL: COLOR OF DEVICES SHALL BE WHITE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ORANGE FOR DEDICATED I.G. RECEPTACLES . BLACK AT SALES AREAS WHERE LOCATED ABOVE 12' A.F.F. 1. ALL GENERAL PURPOSE 20 AMPERE, 125 -250 VOLT RECEPTACLES AND 120 -277 VOLT SWITCHES SHALL CONFORM TO NEMA WD 1 AND APPLICABLE U.L TESTS. B. RECEPTACLES: ALL CONDUCTORS IN ACCORD WITH NEC AS FOLLOWS: 277/480V BROWN ORANGE YELLOW GRAY 1. GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER RECEPTACLE: NEMA TYPE 5 -20R LEVITON #6898 -HG OR EQUAL 2. DUPLEX RECEPTACLES: NEMA TYPE 5 -20R, HEAVY DUTY SPECIFICATION GRADE, SIDE WIRED ONLY, LEVITON 5243 OR EQUAL 3. CASH REGISTER RECEPTACLES: NEMA TYPE 5 -20R, HEAVY DUTY SPECIFICATION GRADE, SIDE WIRED ONLY, HUBBELL #IG- -5362, PROVIDED WITH GREEN INSULATED GROUND WIRE, AND WITH ENGRAVED COVER PLATE " "FOR CASH REGISTERS ONLY" ". C. SWITCHES: TWENTY AMPERE, 120 -277 VOLTS, FAST MAKE -SLOW BREAK, QUIET TYPE SWITCH WITH SILVER CADMIUM ALLOY CONTACTS, BINDING HEAD TERMINAL SCREWS, SIDE WIRED ONLY. ALL SWITCHES SHALL BE WHITE IN COLOR. 1. SINGLE POLE, SINGLE THROW, LEVITON #1221 OR EQUAL 2. THREE -WAY, LEVITON #1223 OR EQUAL Do - 317 41, COPYRIGHT 0 2008 CARTER & BURGESS. INC. at &t Carter::Burgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (714) 327 -1600 FAX: (714) 327-1601 DRAWN BY: RT PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE: 1 EXPIRES 08/26/09 ISSUES /REVISIONS - 06-05-08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 16415 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 AEC ENED a,rC" y rr' ' !. - I'. ;rQ�c' _< JUN O9 22 DESIGNED BY: RT CHECKED BY: BLD ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS APPROVED BY: CNB 444017.011.037.0001 NONE E -003 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONTINUED) 2.05 DEVICE PLATES 2.06 A. A. FLUSH DEVICE PLATES: PLATES SHALL BE SMOOTH PLASTIC, COLOR TO MATCH DEVICE, LEVITON #8600 SERIES OR EQUAL B. SURFACE MOUNTED DEVICES, INDOOR: GALVANIZED METAL TO FIT BOX. C. OUTDOOR, WEATHERPROOF: DIE CAST ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, CORROSION RESISTANT, HEAVY DUTY, HINGED COVER FLAP, AND GASKET, LEVITON #6196, HORIZONTAL MOUNTING. DISCONNECT SWITCHES SWITCH INTERIOR: DEAD -FRONT CONSTRUCTION WITH HINGED ARC SUPPRESSOR AND SWITCH BLADES WHICH ARE FULLY VISIBLE IN THE "OFF "" POSITION AND WITH DOOR OPEN. B. SWITCH MECHANISM: QUICK -MAKE AND QUICK -BREAK OPERATING HANDLE AND MECHANISM WITH DUAL COVER INTERLOCK TO PREVENT UNAUTHORIZED OPENING OF THE SWITCH DOOR IN THE "ON" POSITION OR CLOSING THE SWITCH MECHANISM WHILE THE DOOR IS OPEN. C. RATINGS: SWITCHES SHALL BE HORSEPOWER RATED FOR THE OPERATING VOLTAGE AND WITH FUSED OR NON -FUSED ARRANGEMENTS AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. D. ENCLOSURES: NEMA 1, CODE GAUGE SHEET STEEL WITH HINGED COVER, OR NEMA 3R AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS, AND AS REQUIRED BY APPLICATION. 2.07 TRANSFORMERS A. TRANSFORMERS SHALL BE INDOOR TYPE, SELF COOLED, 480V, THREE- PHASE, DUAL WINDING, FULLY ENCLOSED, VENTILATED, GENERAL PURPOSE DRY TYPE, 480 VOLT PRIMARY, 120/208 VOLT SECONDARY, 60 HERTZ, EQUIPPED WITH TWO 2 1/2% FULL CAPACITY TAPS ABOVE AND BELOW RATED VOLTAGE AND SHALL BE OF THE KVA RA11NG SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. TRANSFORMERS SHALL HAVE COPPER OR ALUMINUM WINDINGS CLASS 'H' INSULATION GROUP, WITH TEMPERATURE RISE, WHEN OPERATED CONTINUOUSLY AT FULL LOAD AND RATED FREQUENCY, NOT EXCEEDING 150 DEGREE C. RISE OVER 40 DEGREE C. AMBIENT, UNLESS MENTIONED OTHERWISE ON THE ONE LINE DIAGRAM. B. C. TRANSFORMER SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM OF 10% OVERLOAD CAPACITY AT RATED VOLTAGE AND SHALL HAVE A 10 KV BIL RA11NG. D. SOUND LEVEL AT ANY LOAD SHALL NOT EXCEED 45 DB WHEN TESTED IN A ROOM WITH AMBIENT SOUND LEVEL NOT EXCEEDING 24 DB. EXCESSIVELY NOISY TRANSFORMERS SHALL BE REPLACED WITH NEW AT THE EXPENSE OF THE CONTRACTOR. E. TRANSFORMER IMPEDANCE SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 4% NOR GREATER THAN 5%. TRANSFORMERS SHALL CONFORM TO NEMA, NEC AND ALL APPLICABLE STATE AND LOCAL CODES. F. TRANSFORMER SHALL NOT CONTAIN ANY PCB'S (POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS). G. TRANSFORMER SIZE SHALL FIT SPACE ALLOCATED PER DRAWINGS. H. MANUFACTURER SHALL BE GE, SIEMENS, CUTLER HAMMER, OR SQUARE D. I. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TRANSFORMER AS INDICATED ON THE PLANS. 2.08 PANELBOARDS A. RATINGS: SEE PANEL SCHEDULES. PANEL BOARDS SHALL BE OF THE "DEAD FRONT" ENCLOSED TYPE, FLUSH OR SURFACE MOUNTED AS REQUIRED TO FIT IN THE SPACE INDICATED ON THE PLANS, IN STEEL CABINETS, CODE GAUGE, WITH STEEL TRIM CONCEALED HINGES, DOORS, AND FLUSH TYPE LOCKS, ALL KEYED ALIKE, GE, SIEMENS, CUTLER HAMMER, OR SQUARE -D, OR APPROVED EQUAL B. FINISH: ALL PAINTED STEEL WORK SHALL BE TREATED WITH A PRIMER COAT AND FINISH COAT OF THE MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD GRAY COLOR OR ANSI 61. C. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL PANELBOARDS AS INDICATED ON THE PLANS. D. BUSSES, INCLUDING NEUTRAL AND GROUND BUS SHALL BE RECTANGULAR CROSS SECTION FULL LENGTH, MINIMUM 98% CONDUCTIVITY, HARD DRAWN COPPER. SILVER OR 11N PLATED JOINTS, AND SIZED ON THE BASIS OF 1000 AMPERES PER SQ. IN. CROSS SECTIONAL AREA. BUSSES SHALL BE ARRANGED FOR SEQUENCE PHASING. E. EACH PANELBOARD SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH A GROUND BUS SECURED TO THE INTERIOR OF THE ENCLOSURE. THE BUS SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE PANELBOARD NEUTRAL BUS AND SHALL HAVE A SEPARATE LUG FOR EACH GROUND CONDUCTOR. NOT MORE THAN ONE CONDUCTOR SHALL BE INSTALLED PER LUG. F. EACH ISOLATED GROUND PANELBOARD SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH A ISOLATED GROUND BUS SECURED TO THE INTERIOR OF PANELBOARD WITH A SEPARATE ISOLATED GROUND WIRE (SIZED PER THE NEC) RUN BACK TO THE GROUNDING ELECTRODE G. PRIOR TO ORDERING, THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL CONFIRM WITH THE SERVING UTILITY AND THE LANDLORD, THE AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT LEVEL AT THE TENANT DISCONNECT. TENANT PANELBOARDS SHALL BE ORDERED WITH AN AIC RA11NG GREATER THAN THE AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT LEVEL IF CONTRACTOR DOES NOT CONFIRM FAULT CURRENT LEVEL FULLY RATED EQUIPMENT AT 65K AIC MINIMUM SHALL BE PROVIDED. H. BACK BOXES SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF CODE GAUGE STEEL W/ GALVANIZED TRIMS AND RUST INHIBITED COATING AND PAINTED WITH GRAY ENAMEL FINISH (ANSI 61). I. DOORS AND TRIM SHALL EACH BE IN ONE PIECE 50 DESIGNED THAT DOORS WILL OPEN 180 DEGREES. DOORS SHALL BE FASTENED TO TRIMS WITH SEMI- CONCEALED FIVE KNUCKLE STEEL WITH NONFERROUS PINS. TRIMS SHALL BE FASTENED TO BACK BOXES BY SCREWS. J. CLEAN, VACUUM AND TIGHTEN ALL CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS IN EXISTING & NEW ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. SEAL EXISTING PANEL KNOCKOUTS NOT REUSED. K. CIRCUIT BREAKERS PROVIDED IN EXISTING PANELBOARDS SHALL MATCH EXISTING TYPE, MAKE & AIC RATING. 2.09 PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. PANEL BOARDS SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH BOLT ON, MOLDED CASE, THERMAL MAGNETIC TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKERS OF THE TYPE, # OF POLES, TRIP SIZES, AS SHOWN IN THE DRAWINGS. PANEL BOARD AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES SHALL BE "FULLY RATED" WITH INTERRUPTING RATINGS EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN SYSTEM AVAILABLE SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT AT INCOMING LINE TERMINALS, AND NOT LESS THAN 10,000 A.I.C. FOR 120/208V AND NOT LESS THAN 14,000 A.I.C. FOR 480/277V. B. CIRCUIT BREAKERS: MOLDED CASE, BOLT -ON, THERMAL MAGNETIC TYPE, 40 DEGREES C. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED, FIXED MOUNTING, WITH QUICK -MAKE AND QUICK -BREAK SWITCHING MECHANISM MECHANICALLY TRIP -FREE FROM THE OPERATING HANDLE. C. RATINGS: REFER TO DRAWINGS AND PANEL SCHEDULES FOR TRIP FRAME AND POLES REQUIRED. EQUIPMENT SHALL BE FULLY RATED BASED ON AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT LEVEL D. MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS: FRACTIONAL H.P. 1 PHASE MOTORS SHALL BE PROTECTED BY THERMAL O.L RELAY INTEGRAL WITH THE DISCONNECT: "MOTOR- MINDER ", OR EQUAL 2.10 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES A. PROVIDE SUPPORT DEVICES AND APPURTENANCES INCLUDING HANGERS, ANCHORS, SLEEVES, INSERTS, SEALS, AND ASSOCIATED FASTENERS USED FOR MOUNTING RACEWAYS, EQUIPMENT AND OTHER ELECTRICAL ITEMS AS REQUIRED. B. CONDUIT STRAPS: HOT -DIP GALVANIZED, CAST MALLEABLE IRON, ONE HOLE TYPE STRAP WITH CAST CLAMP -BACKS AND SPACERS AS REQUIRED. O.Z. /GEDNEY #14 -50G STRAP AND #141G SPACER, REFCOR #231 STRAP AND #131 SPACER, OR EQUAL C. CONSTRUCTION CHANNEL: 1 -1/2 INCH BY 1 -1/2 INCH 12 GAUGE GALVANIZED STEEL CHANNEL WITH 17/32 INCH DIAMETER BOLT HOLES, 1 -1/2 INCHES ON CENTER, IN BASE OF THE CHANNEL. KINDORF 905 SERIES, UNISTRUT P- 1000 -HS, OR EQUAL FASTENERS (GENERAL): WOOD SCREWS FOR FASTENING TO WOOD. MACHINE SCREWS FOR FASTENING TO STEEL TOGGLE BOLTS FOR FASTENING TO HOLLOW CONCRETE BLOCK, GYPSUM BOARD OR PLASTER WALL EXPANSION ANCHORS FOR ATTACHMENTS TO PRE - POURED CONCRETE. D. 2.11 IDENTIFYING DEVICES 3.02 A. PANELBOARD DIRECTORIES: A CIRCUIT DIRECTORY WITH METAL FRAME AND GLASSINE PAGE SHALL BE PROVIDED ON THE INSIDE OF THE DOOR UPON COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT. THE DIRECTORY SHALL BE TYPEWRITTEN, INDICATING THE SERVICE CONTROLLED BY EACH CIRCUIT FOR NEW AND EXISTING PANELS. THE ROOM NUMBERS USED SHALL BE VERIFIED WITH THE OWNER AND SHALL NOT NECESSARILY BE THOSE USED IN THE DRAWINGS. B. WIRE & TERMINAL MARKERS: SELF - ADHERING, PRE - PRINTED VINYL WITH SELF -- LAMINATING WRAP GROUND STRIP BRADY B191 SERIES, THOMAS & BETTS WSI SERIES, OR EQUAL C. PROVIDE NAMEPLATES, ENGRAVED, THREE LAYER LAMINATED PLASTIC W/ WHITE LETTERS ON A BLACK BACKGROUND AND 1/4" LETTERS FOR EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION AND 1/8" LETTERS FOR SOURCE CIRCUIT. NUMBER FOR THE FOLLOWING (BUT NOT LIMITED TO) EQUIPMENT; PANEL BOARDS, SWITCHBOARDS INCLUDING EACH INDIVIDUAL DEVICE OR PIECE OF EQUIPMENT WITHIN THE SWITCHBOARD, MOTOR CONTROL CENTER (MCC) INCLUDING EACH DEVICE WITHIN THE MCC AND ENCLOSED SWITCHES, STARTERS, CONTACTORS, CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND TRANSFORMERS. 2.12 PLYWOOD BACKBOARDS A. WHERE INDICATED FOR TELEPHONE OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM TERMINALS, OR FOR MOTOR CONTROL OR OTHER EQUIPMENT ASSEMBLES, PROVIDE BACKBOARDS OF SIZE INDICATED. 1. USE DOUGLAS FIR PLYWOOD, EXTERIOR GRADE WITH "B" FACE, PRIME AND FINISHED PAINTED. 2. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, PROVIDE 3/4 INCH THICK PLYWOOD. 3. ALL PLYWOOD SHALL BE FIRE RESISTANT. 2.13 GROUNDING A. B. C. D. E. F. 2.14 A. B. C. D. 2.15 A. B. PART 3 3.01 A. B. C. D. E. B. GREEN, INSULATED COPPER GROUNDING CONDUCTORS SHALL BE FURNISHED TO EACH PANEL AND /OR DEVICE RACEWAYS /CONDUITS SHALL NOT BE RELIED UPON FOR EQUIPMENT GROUNDING. BRANCH/FEEDER CONDUITS SHALL INCLUDE A GROUND CONDUCTOR SIZED PER NEC. GROUND ALL CONDUITS, CABINETS, MOTORS, BOXES, ENCLOSURES, PANELS AND OTHER EXPOSED NON- CURRENT CARRYING METAL PARTS OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL PROVISIONS OF THE NEC ARTICLE 250 AND LOCAL CODES THAT MAY APPLY. ELECTRICALLY GROUND METAWC BOXES. WHERE WIRING TO ITEM INCLUDES GROUNDING CONDUCTOR, PROVIDE GROUNDING TERMINAL IN INTERIOR OF BOX. ENCLOSURES OF EQUIPMENT, RACEWAYS, AND FIXTURES SHALL BE PERMANENTLY AND EFFECTIVELY GROUNDED. PROVIDE CODE- SIZED, (UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED) COPPER, INSULATED GREEN EQUIPMENT GROUND WITH ALL BRANCH AND FEEDER CIRCUIT RUNS. EQUIPMENT GROUND SHALL ORIGINATE AT PANELBOARD GROUND BUS AND SHALL BE BONDED TO ALL SWITCH AND RECEPTACLE BOXES AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES. BUILDING SERVICES SHALL BE GROUNDED TO BUILDING STEEL AND TO COLD METALLIC WATER PIPING. ISOLATED GROUND CONDUCTORS SHALL TERMINATE ON ISOLATED GROUND BUS AND RECEPTACLE ISOLATED GROUND LUGS ONLY. DOOR BUZZER AND PUSHBUTTON SYSTEM PROVIDE A COMPLETE AND OPERATING DOOR BUZZER SYSTEM WITH ALL NECESSARY ACCESSORIES, TRANSFORMER AND WIRING. BUZZERS SHALL BE EDWARDS #1064 -G5, MOUNTED 8' AFF IN STOCK AND MEZZANINE AREAS, AND 2' AFF UNDER CASH WRAP COUNTER. PUSHBUTTON SHALL BE EDWARDS #1786 -B, MOUNT AT 4' AFF. TRANSFORMER RATED 20 VA, 24VAC SHALL BE EDWARDS #592, MOUNT AT 8' AFF LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM PROVIDE A COMPLETE AND OPERATING LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM WITH ALL NECESSARY ACCESSORIES, RELAYS, WIRING, CONTACTORS, PHOTOELECTRIC DEVICE, AND PROGRAMMING. PROVIDE ALL PROGRAMMING AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE THE OWNER'S SCHEDULING. PROVIDE TRAINING TO THE OWNER, FOR OPERATING THE 11MECLOCK. EXECUTION CONDUIT INSTALLATION GENERAL 1. CONDUIT SYSTEM SHALL BE CONCEALED UNLESS EXPOSED WORK IS CLEARLY CALLED FOR ON DRAWINGS. 2. CONDUITS SHALL BE TIGHTLY COVERED AND WELL PROTECTED DURING CONSTRUCTION USING METALLIC BUSHINGS AND BUSHING "PENNIES" TO SEAL OPEN ENDS. 3. IN ALL EMPTY CONDUITS OR DUCTS, INSTALL A 200 -POUND TENSILE STRENGTH POLYETHYLENE PULLING ROPE (INCLUDING ALL COMMUNICATION CONDUITS). 4. CONDUIT SYSTEMS SHALL BE ELECTRICALLY CONTINUOUS THROUGHOUT. INSTALL CODE SIZE, INSULATED, COPPER, GREEN GROUNDING CONDUCTOR IN ALL CONDUIT RUNS PULLED WITH PHASE AND NEUTRAL CONDUCTORS. 5. SIZE RACEWAYS AS REQUIRED BY NEC (OR LARGER IF SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS) EXCEPT THAT MINIMUM SIZE SHALL BE 3/4" UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED TO THE CONTRARY. EXCEPT THAT 1/2" FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT MAY BE USED FOR TAP CONNECTIONS BETWEEN LIGHTING FIXTURES AND JUNCTION BOXES. LAYOUT 1. LOCATIONS OF CONDUIT RUNS SHALL BE PLANNED IN ADVANCE OF THE INSTALLATION AND COORDINATED WITH THE DUCTWORK, PLUMBING, CEILING AND WALL CONSTRUCTION IN THE SAME AREAS AND SHALL NOT UNNECESSARILY CROSS OTHER CONDUITS OR PIPE, NOR PREVENT REMOVAL OF CEILING OR 11LES OR PANELS, NOR BLOCK ACCESS TO MECHANICAL OR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. 2. EXACT ROUTING OF CONDUIT WITHIN BUILDING SHALL BE DETERMINED BY THE CONTRACTOR. ANY COST REQUIRED TO ROUTE CONDUIT DIFFERENT THAN IT I5 SHOWN ON THESE DRAWINGS SHALL BE INCURRED BY THE CONTRACTOR. CONDUIT RUNS SHALL BE ROUTED AT RIGHT ANGLES OR PARALLEL TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS, WALLS, FLOOR OR CEILING AND SUPPORTED AT INTERVALS NO GREATER THAN 1O' -0 ". 3. WHERE PRACTICAL, INSTALL CONDUITS IN GROUPS, IN PARALLEL FOR VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL RUNS AND AT ELEVA11ONS THAT AVOID UNNECESSARY OFFSETS. 4. PASS RACEWAYS OVER & MAINTAIN A SEPARATION OF NOT LESS THAN 12 INCHES FROM PARALLEL RUNS OF HEATED PIPE LINES AND FLUES OR 3 INCHES FROM SUCH LINES CROSSING PERPENDICULAR TO THE RUNS.. WHEN RACEWAYS AND HEATED PIPE LINES ARE CLOSER THAN 6 INCHES, INSTALL ONE -PIECE INSULATION JACKETED WITH EMBOSSED VAPOR BARRIER LAMINATED ON CONDUIT. WHERE AVAILABLE, JACKET FLAPS WITH FACTORY - APPLIED PRESSURE SENSITIVE ADHESIVE MAY BE REQUIRED. 5. AT FLUSH FLOOR RECEPTACLE LOCATIONS, ASSOCIATED CONDUIT- SHALL BE RUN WITHIN WOOD FLOORING PLYWOOD UNDERLAYMENT. COORDINATE LAYOUT WITH FLOORING CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO UNDERLAYMENT INSTALL TO ACCOMMODATE CONDUIT CUT -OUTS IN PLYWOOD. CONDUIT LAYOUT SHALL NOT BE PARALLEL WITH WOOD FLOOR PLANKS SCHEDULED FOR INSTALL ON TOP OF UNDERLAYMENT. MAINTAIN MINIMUM 30 DEGREE ANGLE FROM PARALLEL SUPPORTS 1. ALL RACEWAY SYSTEMS SHALL BE SECURED TO THE BUILDING STRUCTURES USING SPECIFIED FASTENERS, CLAMPS AND HANGERS SPACED ACCORDING TO CODE REQUIREMENTS. 2. SUPPORT SINGLE RUNS OF CONDUIT USING ONE HOLE PIPE STRAPS. WHERE RUN HORIZONTALLY ON WALLS IN DAMP OR WET LOCATION, INSTALL "CLAMP- BACKS" TO SPACE CONDUIT OFF THE SURFACE. 3. MULTIPLE CONDUIT RUNS SHALL BE SUPPORTED USING "TRAPEZE" HANGERS FABRICATED FROM SPECIFIED CONSTRUCTION CHANNEL, MOUNTED TO 3/8 INCH DIAMETER, THREADED STEEL RODS SECURED TO BUILDING STRUCTURES., FASTEN CONDUIT TO CONSTRUCTION CHANNEL WITH STANDARD ONE HOLE PIPE CLAMPS OR THE EQUIVALENT. TERMINATION AND JOINTS 1. RACEWAYS SHALL BE JOINED USING SPECIFIED COUPLING OR TRANSITION COUPLINGS WHERE DISSIMILAR RACEWAY SYSTEMS ARE JOINED. 2. CONDUITS SHALL BE SECURELY FASTENED TO CABINETS, BOXES AND GUTTERS USING TWO LOCKNUTS AND AN INSULATING BUSHING OR SPECIFIED INSULATED CONNECTORS. INSTALL GROUNDING BUSHINGS OR BONDING JUMPERS ON ALL CONDUITS TERMINATING AT CONCENTRIC KNOCKOUTS. IN PANELS, PULL BOXES, OUTLET BOXES, GUTTERS, ETC. CONDUCTORS SHALL BE TIED WITH PLASTIC TIES, NEATLY FANNED OUT AND TAGGED WITH ADHESIVE MARKERS. (3M, BRADY OR APPROVED EQUAL) WHICH ARE CLEARLY MARKED WITH CIRCUIT NUMBERS, ALL IN AN APPROVED WORKMANLIKE MANNER. 3. CONDUIT TERMINATIONS EXPOSED AT WEATHERPROOF ENCLOSURES AND CAST OUTLET BOXES SHALL BE MADE WATERTIGHT USING SPECIFIED CONNECTORS AND HUBS. 4. INSTALL EXPANSION FITTINGS ON CONDUIT RUNS EVERY 200 FEET OF LINEAR RUN, WHEREVER STRUCTURAL EXPANSION JOINTS ARE CROSSED OR WHERE REQUIRED BY THE PROJECT CONDITIONS. EXPANSION FITTINGS SHALL HAVE GROUND JUMPER AND INTERNAL BEARING ASSEMBLY. MISCELLANEOUS FITTINGS FOR CONDUIT SUCH AS REDUCERS, CHASE NIPPLES, LONG OR SHORT NIPPLES AND PLUGS SHALL BE USED AS APPLICABLE. THREE PIECE AND SPLIT COUPLINGS SHALL BE USED FOR RENOVATION OR ADD -ON WORK ONLY WHERE NECESSARY. 5. CUT CONDUIT ENDS SQUARE, REAM SMOOTH, PAINT MALE THREADS OF FIELD THREADED RACEWAYS WITH GRAPHITE BASE PIPE COMPOUND. DRAW UP TIGHT WITH RACEWAY COUPLINGS. 6. EACH END OF ANY CONDUIT RUN TERMINATING IN A SHEET METAL BOX OF ANY KIND SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH GALVANIZED LOCK NUT INSIDE AND OUTSIDE OF THE BOX WITH INSULATED BUSHING ON END OF CONDUIT. 7. CAP UNUSED KNOCKOUT HOLES WHERE BLANKS HAVE BEEN REMOVED AND PLUG UNUSED CONDUIT HUBS. USE BLANK PLATES ON OUTLET BOXES IN WHICH NO DEVICE I5 INSTALLED. PENETRATIONS 1. ALL FLOOR PENETRATIONS SHALL BE SEALED WATER - TIGHT. MAINTAIN FIRE RATING AS REQUIRED. 2. FIRE -SAFE ALL RATED WALL PENETRATIONS USING 3M LISTED FIRE - SAFING SEALANTS AND ASSEMBLIES. CABLE AND WIRE INSTALLATION A. GENERAL 1. CONDUCTORS SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED IN CONDUIT UNTIL ALL WORK OF ANY NATURE THAT MAY CAUSE DAMAGE IS COMPLETED. CARE SHALL BE TAKEN IN PULLING CONDUCTORS SO THAT INSULATION I5 NOT DAMAGED. U.L. APPROVED NON - PETROLEUM BASE AND INSULATING TYPE PULLING COMPOUND SHALL BE USED AS NEEDED. 2. ALL CABLES SHALL BE INSTALLED AND TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS AND WARRANTY. SPLICING AND TERMINATING 1. ALL ASPECTS OF SPLICING AND TERMINATING SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH CABLE MANUFACTURER'S PUBLISHED PROCEDURES. 2. MAKE UP ALL SPLICES IN OUTLET BOXES WITH CONNECTORS AS SPECIFIED HEREIN WITH SEPARATE TAILS OF CORRECT COLOR TO BE MADE UP TO SPLICE. PROVIDE AT LEAST SIX (6) INCHES OF TAILS PACKED IN BOX AFTER SPLICE IS MADE UP. 3. ALL WIRE AND CABLE IN PANELS, TERMINAL CABINETS AND EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES SHALL BE BUNDLED AND CLAMPED. C. MC CABLE INSTALLATION 1. INSTALL CABLE IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS AND IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 72. 2. USE SOUD CONDUCTOR FOR BRANCH CIRCUITS 12 AWG AND SMALLER. 3. BEND CABLE PER NEC. 4. GROUNDING: ALL CABLE SHALL CONTAIN A GREEN WIRE GROUND. THE JACKET SHALL NOT SERVE AS THE ONLY GROUNDING MEANS. 5. SUSPENSION: 1. CABLE SHALL BE STRAPPED TIGHT TO UNDERSIDE OF DECKING WHERE PRACTICAL 2. CABLE SHALL HAVE INDEPENDENT SUSPENSION AND SHALL NOT BE TIED TO CEILING GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEM, PLUMBING PIPING, OR SPRINKLER PIPING. 3. CABLE SHALL BE GROUPED SEPARATELY FROM LOW VOLTAGE CABLE SYSTEMS. 4. SUPPORT CABLE EVERY 6 FEET, MAXIMUM. 5. CABLE SHALL BE STRAPPED EVERY 6' -0', AT EACH TURN, AND WITHIN 12 INCHES OF ALL JUNCTION BOXES USING CABLE STRAPS, NOT TIES. 6. BUNDLING: INSTALL NO MORE THAN 4 CABLES TOGETHER IN A SINGLE BUNDLE 6. ROUTING: 1. BENDING RADIUS SHALL BE APPROXIMATELY 12 TIMES THE EXTERNAL DIAMETER OF THE METAL SHEATH. 2. ROUTING OF THE CABLE SHALL FOLLOW THE ORTHOGONAL GRID OF THE BUILDING STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS OF THE BUILDING, SUCH AS BEAMS AND PURLINS. 3. CABLE IN CEILNGS SHALL RUN AS TIGHT TO STRUCTURE AS POSSIBLE, AND IN NO CASE (WITH THE EXCEPTION OF DROPS) LESS THAN 12 INCHES ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILINGS. 4. MC CABLE SHALL NOT BE USED IN FINAL HOMERUN CONNECTION TO THE BRANCH CIRCUIT PANEL 5. ISOLATED GROUND CIRCUITS AND NORMAL GROUND CIRCUITS SHALL BE RUN IN SEPARATE CABLES. 6. CABLE SHALL BE INSTALLED USING BUSHINGS OR BUSHED FITTINGS. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF BOXES AND WIRING SERVICES A. GENERAL 1. ALL OUTLETS SHALL FINISH FLUSH WITH WALL FINISHES AND CEILING, EXCEPT WHERE EXPOSED WORK IS CALLED FOR. THERE SHALL BE NO GAP BETWEEN BOX AND WALL OR CEILING MATERIAL ANY OPENING BETWEEN BOX AND WALL OR CEILING SHALL BE CAULKED AIRTIGHT. 2. INSTALL RAISED DEVICE COVERS ON ALL OUTLET BOXES AS REQUIRED TO FINISH FLUSH WITH SURFACE. COVERS SHALL BE OF A DEPTH TO SUIT THE WALL OR CEILING FINISH. 3. LEAVE NO UNUSED OPENINGS IN ANY BOX. INSTALL CLOSE -UP PLUGS AS REQUIRED TO SEAL OPENINGS. 4. EXPOSED OUTLET BOXES AND BOXES IN DAMP AND WET LOCATIONS SHALL BE CAST METAL WITH GASKETED CAST METAL COVER PLATES. B. BOXES LAYOUT 1. OUTLET BOXES SHALL BE INSTALLED AT THE LOCATIONS AND ELEVA11ONS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFIED HEREIN. MAKE ADJUSTMENTS TO LOCATIONS AS REQUIRED BY STRUCTURAL CONDITIONS AND TO SUIT COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS OF OTHER TRADES. 2. OUTLET BOXES IN STUD WALL AND PARTITIONS SHALL NOT BE MOUNTED BACK -TO -BACK NOR SHALL THROUGH -WALL BOXES BE PERMITTED. 3. WHERE INSTALLATION I5 WITHIN OR BEHIND CASEWORK, COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH CASEWORK CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN TO ENSURE ACCESSIBILITY. C. SUPPORTS 1. BOXES INSTALLED IN STUD WALLS SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH BRACKETS DESIGNED FOR ATTACHING DIRECTLY TO THE STUDS OR SHALL BE MOUNTED ON HEAVY GAUGE GALVANIZED STEEL BOX SUPPORTS. 2. FIXTURE OUTLET BOXES INSTALLED IN SUSPENDED CEILINGS OF GYPSUM BOARD OR LATH AND PLASTER CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE MOUNTED TO 16 GAUGE METAL CHANNEL BARS ATTACHED TO MAIN CEILING RUNNERS. 3. FIXTURE OUTLET BOXES INSTALLED IN SUSPENDED CEILINGS SYSTEMS SUPPORTING ACOUSTICAL 11LES OR PANELS SHALL BE SUPPORTED DIRECTLY FROM THE STRUCTURES ABOVE WHEREVER PENDANT - MOUNTED FIXTURES ARE INSTALLED FROM THE BOX. D. MOUNTING HEIGHTS: UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE HEIGHTS ARE FROM FINISHED FLOOR TO CENTER LINE OF DEVICE BOX SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS, AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS OF STATE CODE. DEVICE: HEIGHT(INCHES) CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLE & TELEPHONE OUTLET 18 CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLES ABOVE COUNTERS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED 44 SWITCHES, LIGHT 46 1.02 3.05 TRANSFORMER INSTALLATION A. TRANSFORMER SHALL BE FLOOR MOUNTED AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. PROVIDE MOUNTING HARDWARE TO SAFELY CARRY THE WEIGHT OF THE TRANSFORMER. MAINTAIN ADEQUATE SPACING FOR 1.03 VENTILATION AS RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER AND REQUIRED BY CODE. B. PROVIDE KORFUND TYPE VIBRATION ISOLATION PADS FOR EACH TRANSFORMER. C. CONNECTIONS TO TRANSFORMER SHALL BE MADE MTh FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT. INSTALL GROUND CONDUCTORS IN EACH CONDUIT AND PROVIDE GROUNDING BUSHINGS AS REQUIRED. D. PROVIDE HEAT INSULATING BARRIER BELOW TRANSFORMER WHERE INSTALLED ON COMBUSTIBLE SURFACE. END OF SECTION SECTION 16510: LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. WORK INCLUDED 1. PROVIDE COMPLETE LIGHTING SYSTEM, WIRED, ASSEMBLED AND OPERABLE, INCLUDING LIGHTING FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS AND DESCRIBED IN THE FIXTURE SCHEDULES AS NECESSARY TO PROPERLY AND COMPLETELY INSTALL THE FIXTURES IN THE TYPE OF CEILINGS SHOWN ON THE ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLANS AND SPECIFIED HEREIN. ACCESSORIES INCLUDE CANOPIES, SUSPENSION OF PROPER LENGTHS, HICKEYS, CASTINGS, SOCKETS, HOLDERS, REFLECTORS, BALLASTS, DIFFUSING MATERIAL, LOUVERS, PLASTER AND MOUNTING FRAMES, LAMPS, RECESSING BOXES, SUPPORTING BRACKETS AND CHANNELS TO SPAN STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. FIXTURES TO BE FACTORY PREWIRED AND PREASSEMBLED. 2. INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION OF ALL FIXTURES, LAMPS, BALLASTS, LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES, RELAYS, RELATED COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORY WIRING AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS, FIXTURE SCHEDULE OR AS SPECIFIED HEREIN. 3. FINAL AIMING AND ADJUSTMENT OF RECESSED ADJUSTABLE FIXTURES AND TRACK MOUNTED FIXTURES SHALL BE BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR, AS DIRECTED BY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. B. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: REFER TO SECTION 16050 FOR REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO THIS SECTION. 1.02 COORDINATION: REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: SUBMIT IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF SECTION 16050: TIME SWITCHES, CONTROL DEVICES, RELAYS AND CABINETS AND WIRING DIAGRAMS. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LAMPS A. INCANDESCENT LAMPS: GENERAL PURPOSE A BASE LAMPS SHALL BE INSIDE FROSTED, RATED 120 VAC, OR AS NOTED ON FIXTURE SCHEDULE. REFLECTOR STYLE LAMPS, R AND PAR, AS NOTED ON FIXTURE SCHEDULE. MR16 LAMPS SHALL BE G.E. PRECISE CONSTANT COLOR TYPE. B. FLUORESCENT LAMPS 1. 24, 36 AND 48 INCH LONG LAMPS SHALL BE T8 ENERGY SAVING DELUXE WARM - WHITE, UON. 2. COMPACT TWIN -TUBE AND DOUBLE TWIN -TUBE, 9, 13 AND 18 WATTS NOMINAL, 735 K SPX35. C. LAMPS SHALL BE MANUFACTURED AS INDICATED IN THE LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE ONLY. 2.02 BALLASTS A. FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS 1. BALLASTS SHALL COMPLY WILL ALL APPLICABLE UL AND ANSI STANDARDS AND SHALL BE UL LISTED. BALLASTS PERFORMANCE MAY BE CERTIFIED BY A NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED INDEPENDENT TESTING LABORATORY WITH A U.S. GOVERNMENT REGISTERED CERTIFICATION MARK FOR FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS. PERFORMANCE CERTIFICATION SHALL BE CONDUCTED PER ETL IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANSI TEST METHODS. INTERIOR BALLASTS SHALL CONFORM TO THE STATE ENERGY STANDARDS. FLUORESCENT BALLASTS SHALL BE WARRANTED AGAINST FAILURE DUE TO DEFECTS IN MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP FOR A MINIMUM PERIOD OF THREE (3) YEARS FROM DATE OF INSTALLATION ACCEPTANCE REGARDLESS OF THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE. BALLASTS SHALL BE CLASS P, SOUND RATED A, "FULL - OUTPUT" ENERGY - SAVING, ELECTRONIC BALLASTS FOR OCTRON LAMPS AS MANUFACTURED BY MAGNETEK. 2. BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS SHALL HAVE HIGH POWER FACTOR. 2.03 REFRACTORS, REFLECTORS AND LOUVERS (FURNISHED BY OWNER) A. ALL GLASSWARE, PLASTER AND METAL SHALL BE UNIFORM, FREE FROM DEFECTS, AND PHOTOMETRICALLY TESTED FOR DISTRIBUTION BY AN INDEPENDENT TESTING LABORATORY. B. PLASTIC DIFFUSERS SHALL BE OF VIRGIN ACRYLIC PLASTIC. C. POLISHED REFLECTORS USED WITH TRIPHOSPHOR COMPACT LAMPS SHALL HAVE ANTI- IRIDESCENT OPTICAL COATING. UGHTING FIXTURES FIXTURES SHALL BE LISTED AND LABELED BY UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES OR ETL TESTING LABORATORIES. LIGHTING FIXTURE MANUFACTURER'S CATALOG NUMBERS ARE INDICATIVE OF DESIRED DESIGN, APPEARANCE QUAILTY AND PERFORMANCE. OTHER FIXTURES OFFERING THESE SAME FEATURES MAY BE CONSIDERED AS SUBSTITUTIONS, ALTHOUGH THE FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF SUCH SUBSTITUTIONS ARE TO BE MADE BY THE ARCHITECT. ALL FIXTURES SHALL BE CERTIFIED FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE STATE ENERGY COMMISSION. EXIT LIGHTS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH MOUNTING AND DIRECTIONAL HARDWARE TO MEET FIELD CONDITIONS. VERIFY PRIOR TO ORDERING. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR HANDLING AND STORAGE. FIXTURES SHALL BE INSTALLED PLUMB, LEVEL, IN STRAIGHT LINES WITHOUT DISTORTION AND CLEAN. B. INSTALL EACH FIXTURE IN A MANNER RECOMMENDED BY THE FIXTURE MANUFACTURER AND APPROVED BY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. UNDER THIS SEC11ON OF THE WORK, FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL ADDITIONAL CEILING BRACING, HANGER SUPPORTS AND OTHER STRUCTURAL REINFORCEMENTS TO THE BUILDING REQUIRE TO PROPERLY AND SAFELY SUSPEND FIXTURES, ALL AS APPROVED BY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. C. FIXTURES IN AREAS OF EXPOSED DUCT AND PIPE WORK SHALL BE SUSPENDED TO AVOID CONFLICT WITH SAME. D. PENDANT FIXTURES SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH BALL AUGNERS AND SWAY ADAPTERS. FIXTURE CHAIN SHALL NOT BE USED FOR SUPPORTING FIXTURES. E. BALLASTS: BALLASTS JUDGED BY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE TO BE NOISY, AND FAILED OR MALFUNCTIONING BALLASTS SHALL BE REPLACED AT OWNER'S EXPENSE. 2.04 A. B. C. 3.02 FIXTURE SUPPORT - SUSPENDED CEILINGS A. ALL LIGHT FIXTURES INSTALLED IN SUSPENDED CEILINGS MUST BE FASTENED TO CEILING FRAMING MEMBERS PER NEC AND TO BUILDING STRUCTURE PER UBC. PROVIDE EARTHQUAKE CLIPS & SEISMIC SUPPORT BRACING AS REQUIRED. LIGHT FIXTURES INSTALLED IN AREAS WHERE THERE IS NO CEILING SHALL BE SUPPORTED FROM STRUCTURE ABOVE ONLY USING APPROVED SUPPORTS. END OF SEC11ON SECTION 16720: FIRE ALARM SYSTEM BIDDER DESIGN (NOT PART OF THIS PROJECT) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. PROVIDE A COMPLETE BIDDER DESIGN FIRE ALARM SYSTEM FOR THE TENANT SPACE TO INCLUDE, BUT SHALL NOT BE LIMITED TO: 1. COMPLETE SYSTEM DESIGN. THIS SHALL INCLUDE COORDINATION OF LANDLORD AND JURISDICTIONAL REQUIREMENTS. 2. DEVELOP PERMIT SUBMITTAL DOCUMENTATION, INCLUDING SHOP DRAWINGS AND BATTERY CALCULATIONS. 3. ALL WORK, ITEMS, ARTICLES, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, WIRING, AND RACEWAY FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERATIONAL SYSTEM. 4. SYSTEM TESTING, DEMONSTRATION, AND TRAINING. 5. WARRANTY. 6. ALL DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED BY NFPA. B. SUBMITTALS - BIDDER DESIGN CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL SUBMITTALS AS FOLLOWS: 1. SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO ARCHITECT FOR APPROVAL OF DEVICE LOCATIONS AND FINISH. 2. SUBMIT ALL DOCUMENTATION TO LANDLORD AND LOCAL JURISDICTION AS REQUIRED FOR APPROVAL AND TO OBTAIN PERMITS. THIS SHALL INCLUDE, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO, SHOP DRAWINGS, BATTERY CALCULATIONS. LISTING INFORMATION, AND PRODUCT DATA. CODES AND STANDARDS A. TENANT SYSTEM SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL JURISDICTIONAL CODES, AND SHALL BE IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE LANDLORD'S STANDARDS AND REQUIREMENTS. APPROVED CONTRACTOR AND INSTALLER A. ALL WORK RELATED TO THE TENANT FIRE ALARM SYSTEM INSTALLATION SHALL BE PERFORMED BY A LANDLORD APPROVED CONTRACTOR. ALL WORK REQUIRED TO BE PERFORMED BY THE LANDLORD OR THE LANDLORD'S CONTRACTOR SHALL BE AT THE EXPENSE OF THE TENANT FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR. 1.04 DEVICE COORDINATION A. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DEVICES, NOTES, AND RELATED INFORMATION SHOWN ON THE ELECTRICAL PLANS ILLUSTRATES THE INTENT OF DEVICE LOCATIONS AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS, AND SHALL NOT CONSTITUTE A COMPLETE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DESIGN. BIDDER DESIGN CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATING THE EXACT SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS WITH LANDLORD AND JURISDICTION. B. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM INSTALLER SHALL COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECTURAL AND ALL OTHER TRADES FOR PROPER PLACEMENT OF DEVICES TO ELIMINATE CONFLICTS WITH OTHER SYSTEMS. PART 2 PRODUCTS B. 1.01 DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT A. ALL WIRING, DEVICES, AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE NEW AND COMPATIBLE WITH LANDLORD'S SYSTEM. B. ALL DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE U.L LISTED, FM APPROVED, AND LABELED FOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM USE. C. AUDIBLE /VISUAL DEVICES, IF REQUIRED, SHALL BE WHITE IN COLOR AND CEILING MOUNTED, UNLESS NOT ALLOWED BY LANDLORD OR JURISDICTION. IF CEILING MOUNT DEVICE ARE NOT ALLOWED BY JURISDICTION OR LANDLORD, PROVIDE THE REQUIRED WALL MOUNT DEVICES. D. PULL STATIONS, IF REQUIRED, SHALL BE FLUSH. E. FOR INSTALLATIONS REQUIRING COMMUNICATOR OR DIALER, PROVIDE REQUIRED PRIMARY AND SECONDARY TELEPHONE LINES TO CONTROL PANEL AND PROVIDE 120 VAC DEDICATED BRANCH CIRCUIT AS REQUIRED FOR POWER. PART 3 INSTALLATION 1.01 INSTALLATION SHALL BE IN COMPLIANCE WITH LANDLORD AND JURISDICTIONAL REQUIREMENTS. 1.02 INSTALLATION SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS OUTLINED IN TENANT DESIGN CRITERIA MANUAL 1.03 WIRING A. AT AREAS THAT ARE WITHIN PUBLIC VIEW, ALL FIRE ALARM CABLING SHALL BE RUN IN EMT. B. AT NON- PUBLIC AREAS, CABLING MAY BE RUN EXPOSED ABOVE 10' A.F.F. UNLESS LANDLORD /JURISDICTION REQUIRES METALLIC RACEWAY. IF 50, PROVIDE REQUIRED RACEWAY. FOR CABLING BELOW 10' A.F.F., RUN CONCEALED IN WALL OR IN RACEWAY. 1.04 CEIUNG MOUNT DEVICES A. AT AREAS WITH GWB OR ACT CEILING, PROVIDE REQUIRED BACKBOX AND FLUSH MOUNT DEVICE IN CEILING. B. AT AREAS OPEN TO STRUCTURE, PROVIDE APPROPRIATE BACKBOX ATTACHED TO STRUCTURE WITH SURFACE MOUNT DEVICE. FOR AUDIBLE /VISUAL DEVICE SUPPORT FROM STRUCTURE WITH 3/8" THREADED ROD WITH DEVICE AT THE REQUIRED ELEVATION. 1.05 COORDINATION A. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, INSTALLER SHALL REVIEW WITH THE LOCAL JURISDICTION AND THE LANDLORD, THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DEVICE LOCATIONS. INSTALLATION SHALL NOT OCCUR UNTIL APPROVAL OF LAYOUT IS OBTAINED BY BOTH AGENCIES AND COORDINATED WITH ARCHITECT. B. IF CEILING MOUNTED AUDIBLE /VISUAL DEVICES ARE NOT ALLOWED BY THE LOCAL JURISDICTION, NOTIFY ARCHITECT. 1.06 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM BIDDER DESIGN CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ALL ,��° RACEWAY REQUIRED FOR THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM INSTALLATION. ` d' ; PART 4 TESTING AND CLOSEOUT 1.01 PROVIDE A COMPLETE SYSTEM TEST AS REQUIRED BY NFPA 72, AND THE LANDLORD. 1.02 TEST ALL CONDUCTORS AS REQUIRED IN NFPA 72, CHAPTER 7 AND COMPLETE THE INSPECTION AND TESTING FORM IN NFPA 72, FIGURE 7- 5.2.2. SUBMIT ALL TESTING AND INSPECTION REPORTS, SHOP DRAWINGS, AND AS -BUILT DRAWINGS TO OWNER AND AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION AS REQUIRED BY NFPA 72. 3. BALLASTS SHALL BE APPROVED FOR SE i i ENERGY 5 G LAMPS BY THE LAMP MANUFACTURER. 17 1.03 Cartereurgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (714) 327 -1600 FAX: (714) 327 -1601 06- 05-08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT NO 16415 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 DRAWN BY: RT DATE PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE: 1 EXPIRES 08/26/09 ISSUES /REVISIONS ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS COPYRIGHT 0 2008 CARTER & BURGESS, INC. at &t DESCRIPTION DESIGNED BY: RT CHECKED BY: BLD APPROVED BY: CNB 444017.011.037.0001 NONE E -004 12e u B2 TYPICAL 15' M 8c RECEPTfON _ / WAITING 10 MDF ROOM L2 005 1 OPEN OFFICE MANAGER'S OFFICE 002 20 20j INVENTORY ROOM 004 NL 20 RESTROOM 1 006 ] 20 R 0 20 PANEL " A " 22 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL GENERAL NOTES: 1. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES, LIGHTING FIXTURE MOUNTING HEIGHT, LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE AND OTHER DETAILS ON LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS. 2. FIELD VERIFY FOR EXISTING ELECTRICAL PANEL AND LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT LOCATION. MAKE ADJUSTMENTS AS REQUIRED. 3. SE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR AREA OF ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION WORK. REMOVE / RELOCATE ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, LIGHTING FIXTURES, DEVICES AND ASSOCIATED CONDUIT AND WIRE THAT INTERFERE WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION. DISPOSE OF DEMOLISHED EQUIPMENT AS DIRECTED BY OWNER. MAINTAIN POWER CONNECTION TO EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND LIGHTING FIXTURES TO REMAIN. 4. PROVIDE A TIME CLOCK, CONTACTOR PANEL MANUAL OVERRIDE SWITCH AND ALL ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT AND WIRING AS REQUIRED FOR AUTOMATIC LIGHTING SHUT —OFF AFTER HOURS. SEE TYPICAL LIGHTING CONTROL DETAIL ON SHEET E -103. 5. FIELD COORDINATE FOR ALL NEW ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT LOCATION. MAKE PROPER ADJUSTMENTS. 6. SEE PANEL SCHEDULES AND SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM ON SHEET E -103 FOR REFERENCE TO CIRCUITING REQUIREMENTS. ROUTE ALL LIGHTING CIRCUITS VIA LIGHTING CONTACTOR PANEL PROVIDE UNSWITCHED HOT TO EMERGENCY EXfI SIGNS AND EMERGENCY LIGHTING FIXTURES. 7. FIELD VERIFY THAT EMERGENCY LIGHTING FIXTURES PROVIDE 1 FOOT— CANDLE MINIMUM AT FLOOR LEVEL ADD EMERGENCY LIGHTS AS REQUIRED. 8. LIGHTING FIXTURES SHOWN SHADED ARE NIGHT LIGHTS AND MUST ALWAYS STAY ON. PROVIDE INTEGRAL 90 MINUTES EMERGENCY POWER BATTERY AND UNSWITCHED POWER CONNECTION AS SHOWN. 9. LIGHTING FIXTURES TYPE " B " , "B1" AND "B2" (SHOWN DASHED) ARE PROVIDED WITH FURNITURE AND ARE MOUNTED ON THAT FURNITURE. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE SWITCHED RECEPTACLE AS SHOWN FOR PROPER POWER AND CONTROL CONNECTION. FIELD VERIFY FOR EXACT REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO ROUGH —IN. 10. PROVIDE #10 CONDUCTORS IN CONDUITS WITH MORE THAN (6) SIX CURRENT — CARRYING CONDUCTORS, UNO. PLAN NOTES: ® PROVIDE MANUAL MOTOR RATED TOGGLE SWITCH AND POWER CONNECTION TO RESTROOM EXHAUST FAN AS SHOWN. EXHAUST FAN SHALL BE CONTROLLED BY THE RESTROOM LIGHTING SWITCH. 0 PROVIDE NEW SWFTCHBANK TO CONTROL SALES FLOOR LIGHTING CIRCUITS. COORDINATE WITH THE OWNER FOR LIGHTING SWITCH LOCATIONS. ADJUST AS REQUIRED. PROVIDE ONE SINGLE POLE SWITCH FOR EACH CIRCUIT. MOUNT ALL SWITCHES IN GANGED WALL BOX W111-1 SINGLE COVERPLATE. PROVIDE ENGRAVED DESCRIPTION AT EACH SWITCH — `TRACK LTS ", WALL UNIT LTS ", ETC. ® 2'X4' AND 2'X2' FLUORESCENT FIXTURES ARE EXISTING OR EXISTING RELOCATED AS SHOWN. SEE ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR DETAILS. CLEAN AND RELAMP AS REQUIRED PER FIELD CONDITIONS. ® PROVIDE EMERGENCY LIGHT FIXTURE AND LED EXIT SIGN AS SHOWN. PROVIDE UNSWITCHED CIRCUIT. TYPICAL ® PROVIDE 20A, 125V LIGHTING SWITCH AS SHOWN. TYPICAL ® PROVIDE MANUAL OVERRIDE SWITCH. FIELD VERIFY FOR LOCATION AND PROPER OPERATION. MAKE ADJUSTMENTS AS REQUIRED. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH OWNER. ® LIGHTING FIXTURE "B2" AND ASSOCIATED CORD AND PLUG ARE BEING PROVIDED AS PART OF THE WALL UNIT. PROVIDE OUTLET 26" AFF, BEHIND THE WALL UNIT, WITHIN 6" OF THE END. THE OUTLET SHALL BE SWITCHED AS SHOWN. ANOTHER UNSWITCHED OUTLET SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR POWER CONNECTION TO PHONES AND ACCESSORIES. SEE SHEET E -102 FOR DETAILS. TYPICAL FOR WALL UNIT FIXTURES. FIELD COORDINATE PRIOR TO ROUGH —IN. PROVIDE FLOOR OUTLET WHERE WALL UNIT INSTALLED AT GLASS WALL AND WALL OUTLET INSTALLATION IS IMPOSSIBLE. ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLAN SCALE: 1/4 "=1' -0" Carter:Burgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (714) 327 -1600 FAX: (714) 327 -1601 — 06 -05 -08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 16415 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 DESIGNED BY: RT CHECKED BY: BLD DRAWN BY: RT PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE: ISSUES/REVISIONS NORTH ELECTRICAL LIGHTING �7_,• PLAN COPYRIGHT 0 2008 C. RTER & BURGESS. INC. at &t 1 EXPIRES 08/26/09 E -101 APPROVED BY: CNB 44401 7.01 1 .037.0001 AS SHOWN LOCATE OUTLET 26" AFF, BEHIND THE WALL UNIT, WITHIN 6 OF THE END. ANOTHER SWITCHED POWER OUTLET SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR POWER CONNECTION TO WALL UNIT LIGHTING FIXTURE. SEE SHEET E -101 FOR DETAILS. TYPICAL FOR WALL UNIT RECEPTACLES "B" -27,29 19 HELD VERIFY FOR TV OUTLETS MOUNTING HEIGHT PRIOR TO ROUGH —IN (E) WP (E) DOWN TO PANEL "A' -7 10 (E) FEEDER DOWN TO PANEL "A" -1,3,5 RECEPTION / WAITING 4" WIREMOLD FOR PERIMETER POWER, TYPICAL. SEE DETAIL C7 /A --802 TYPICAL [7 (E) ON ROOF 10 (E) WP 3P "B "- 7,9,11 TYPICAL TYPICAL DEDICATED PRINTER CIRCUIT. MOUNT OUTLETS +26 "AFF 3,5 "B" -1,3,5 " 13,15,17 23 DEDICATED PRINTER CIRCUIT. MOUNT OUTLETS +26 "AFF 19 "B "- 19,21,23 ( J +40 "AFF A +40 "B" -25 1 -1/2" C.O. 2 4 MDF ROOM D05I1 ® TELEPHONE BACKBOARD 7 0 +45" AFF 10 OPEN OFFICE 002 "B "- 20,22,24 003 24 ® 8 "B "- 14,16,18 18 MANAGER'S OFFICE® 1 INVENTORY ROOM "B" -2,4,6 #1 004 J 12 m p RESTROOM ooa 16 S "B" -39,41 0 +6' --6" AFF "B "- 8,10,12 PANEL "B" (E) PANEL "A" GENERAL NOTES: 1. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATION AND MOUNTING HEIGHT OF DEVICES AND OTHER DETAILS ON POWER AND COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTIONS. 2. FIELD VERIFY FOR EXISTING ELECTRICAL AND TELEPHONE SERVICE LOCATION. 3. SEE MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATION OF MECHANICAL / PLUMBING EQUIPMENT, RELATED DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS. COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL / PLUMBING CONTRACTOR FOR POWER AND CONTROL CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO ROUGH —IN. ALL CONTROL CONDUITS ARE BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. CONTROL WIRING IS BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. COORDINATE CIRCUIT SIZES, DISCONNECTS AND TERMINATION LOCATIONS WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR BEFORE ROUGH —IN. 4. PROVIDE 120VAC POWER CONNECTION TO DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS. SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS. 5. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR AREA OF ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION WORK. FIELD VERIFY AND REMOVE / RELOCATE ALL DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT THAT INTERFERE WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION. REMOVE ASSOCIATED CONDUIT AND WIRE BACK TO THE LAST ACTIVE DEVICE OR BACK TO PANEL AS REQUIRED. MAINTAIN POWER CONNECTION TO EXISTING DEVICES TO REMAIN. 6. SEE PANEL SCHEDULES AND SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM ON SHEET E -103 FOR REFERENCE TO CIRCUITING REQUIREMENTS. 7. PROVIDE COMPLETE CONDUIT SYSTEM FOR POWER AND CONTROL CONNECTIONS TO ALL MECHANICAL, SECURITY, FIRE ALARM AND OTHER DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT SHOWN ON ELECTRICAL, ARCHITECTURAL MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, FIRE ALARM AND OTHER DRAWINGS. FIELD COORDINATE FOR EXACT REQUIREMENTS. 120V AND UP WIRING IS BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. LOWER VOLTAGE WIRING IS BY OTHERS, U.N.O. 8. EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, CONDUIT AND WIRE SHOWN ON THIS PLAN ARE NEW, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 9. PROVIDE CORES, PATCH AND PAINT TO MATCH EXISTING CONDMONS. 10. MOUNT NEW DEVICES FLUSH IN WALLS. PATCH AND PAINT TO MATCH EXISTING CONDITIONS. 11. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES OUTSIDE AND ON THE ROOF SHALL BE WEATHER PROOF. 12. RECEPTACLES ON ROOF SHALL BE SURFACE MOUNTED WEATHERPROOF AND GFI WITH `TAYMAC" ENCLOSURE OR APPROVED EQUAL TO MEET NEC 410.57b. PROVIDE UNISTRUT SUPPORT AS REQUIRED. MOUNT WEATHERPROOF /GFI RECEPTACLE AT EACH HVAC UNIT. 13. CONDUIT PENETRATIONS SHALL BE THROUGH MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CURBS, NO INDMDUAL CONDUIT ROOF JACKS. CAULK AROUND THE CONDUITS FOR WEATHER PROOF AT POINT OF ENTRY TO THE ROOF. TYPICAL FOR ALL CONDUITS PENETRATING THE ROOF. 14. PROVIDE BOXES, POWER AND COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS, CONDUIT AND WIRE AT CASHWRAPS AS REQUIRED PER FIELD CONDm0N5. ALL ELECTRICAL WORK INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INSTALLATION AND WIRING OF OUTLETS IN THE MILLWORK SHALL BE DONE BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. PLAN NOTES: O RECEPTACLES AND COMMUNICATION OUTLETS SHALL BE MOUNTED IN CASHWRAP BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. RECEPTACLES SHALL BE WIRED TO A JUNCTION BOX WITHIN CASHWRAP. PROVIDE BRANCH CONNECTION TO JUNCTION BOX AND ENERGIZE RECEPTACLES. SEE DETAIL NO.3, SHEET E -104. ® PROVIDE RECEPTACLE IN WIREMOLD AT UNDERSIDE OF CASHWRAP COUNTER FOR POWERING LAMP MOUNTED ON UPRIGHT. SEE DETAIL NO.2, SHEET E -104. O ROUTE BRANCH CIRCUIT FROM ABOVE CEILING, DOWN CASHWRAP UPRIGHT SUPPORT TO POWER DEVICES INDICATED. SEE DETAIL NO.3, SHEET E --104. ® PROVIDE DEDICATED OUTLETS FOR POWER AND COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTION TO STORE EQUIPMENT AS SHOWN. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS. FIELD COORDINATE. ® FIELD VERIFY FOR POWER AND COMMUNICATION OUTLETS IN THE ROOM. PROVIDE AS REQUIRED. ® PROVIDE BACKBOX AND 1/2" C.O. FROM THE THERMOSTAT BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR TO CORRESPONDING AC UNIT ON ROOF. CONTROL WIRING IS BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR FOR THERMOSTAT LOCATION AND CONTROL CONDUIT CONNECTION DETAILS. ® PROVIDE 3/4 "x4'x8' FIRE TREATED PLYWOOD TELEPHONE BACKBOARD. PROVIDE THREE (2) QUAD RECEPTACLES ON DEDICATED CIRCUITS. MOUNT ONE RECEPTACLE AT THE TOP, ANOTHER AT THE BOTTOM. PROVIDE 1 -1/2" C.O. FROM BUILDING TELECOM SERVICE TO NEW TELEPHONE BACKBOARD. FIELD COORDINATE CONDUIT ROUTING. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR TELEPHONE / DATA SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE WALL MOUNTED RACK 48" HIGH, 24" DEEP, 19" WIDE, SWING OUT, WITH MINIMUM 150 LB CAPACITY. ® DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING FEEDER FROM EXISTING ELECTRICAL PANEL A. FIELD VERIFY FOR EXISTING LOADS TO REMAIN. REMOVE POWER CONNECTION TO LOADS BEING DEMOLISHED. MARK CORRESPONDING CIRCUIT BREAKERS AS SPARE. REPLACE EXISTING DOUBLE CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH SINGLE 20 AMP, 1 POLE CIRCUIT BREAKERS. PROVIDE ELECTRICAL PANEL "B" AND CORRESPONDING FEEDER AS SHOWN ON SINGLE UNE DIAGRAM, SHEET E -103. PROVIDE SUB FEED TO PANEL " A " . FIELD COORDINATE PRIOR TO ROUGH —IN. SEE SHEET E -103 FOR DETAILS. MAINTAIN 3' CLEARANCE IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. ® PROVIDE POWER CONNECTION TO STORE SIGNAGE. SIGNAGE CIRCUIT SHALL BE CONTROLLED BY THE TIME CLOCK. FIELD COORDINATE FOR SIGNAGE LOCATION AND POWER / CONTROL REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO ROUGH —IN. PROVIDE A 120V, 20A TOGGLE SWITCH AS A LOCAL DISCONNECT. 0 ROOF TOP A/C UNIT AND ASSOCIATED RECEPTACLE ARE EXISTING. UNIT LOCATION ON ROOF IS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. FIELD VERIFY. DISCONNECT EXISTING FEEDER FROM EXISTING ELECTRICAL PANEL BEING REMOVED. PROVIDE POWER CONNECTION TO UNIT CONTROL PANEL AND ASSOCIATED RECEPTACLE TO MATCH EXISTING. FIELD VERIFY DISCONNECT SWITCH AND FUSE SIZES, PANEL CIRCUIT BREAKER SIZE, CONDUCTORS SIZE WITH UNIT MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE DATA PRIOR TO ROUGH —IN. MAKE PROPER ADJUSTMENTS. 11 PROVIDE POWER CONNECTION TO WATER HEATER. PROVIDE A HEAVY DUTY TOGGLE SWITCH AS A LOCAL DISCONNECT (MOTOR RATED SWITCH — 3HP MINIMUM, 1 PHASE, NON— FUSED) BY SQUARE —D OR EQUAL. COORDINATE WITH WATER HEATER INSTALLER PRIOR TO ROUGH —IN. IYO 3 317 ELECTRICAL POWER & COMMUNICATIONS PLAN SCALE: 1/4"=1'—O" 1 Carter::Burgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (714) 327 -1600 FAX: (714) 327-1601 06 -05 -08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT NO. 6415 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 DRAWN BY: RT PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE: COPYRIGHT ® 2008 CARTER & BURGESS, INC. DATE E at &t 1 EXPIRES 08/26/09 ISSUES /REVISIONS NORTH DESCRIPTION DESIGNED BY: RT CHECKED BY: BLD APPROVED BY: CNB 444017.011.037.0001 AS SHOWN ELECTRICAL POWER AND COMMUNICATIONS PLAN 102 FEEDER LOAD SCHEDULE AND CALCULATIONS 400 AMP, 208/120V 3PHASE, 4 -WIRE & GND. LOAD COPPER FEEDERS VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATIONS AFC CALCULATIONS NAME VOLTS 0 CONNECTED DEMAND 41010 CONDUITS WIRE PER CONDUIT GND.PER CONDUIT EST DIST. REMARKS FEEDER SEGMENT DROP ONLY NET DROP AT DEVICE AFC FROM SOURCE MOTOR CONTRI- BUTION NET AFC AT DEVICE HP KVA KVA AMPS # SIZE # SIZE SIZE VOLTS DROP % VOLTS DROP % UTILITY XFMR SECONDARY 208 3 49 55 154 65,000 107 65,107 MAIN SERVICE 208 3 49 55 154 1 2 1/2" 4 3/0 #6 80 2.01 0.96% 2.01 0.96% 65,107 14,874 PANEL "B" 208 3 49 55 154 1 2 1/2" 4 3/0 #6 50 1.25 0.60% 3.26 1.57% 14,874 10,035 SUB -PANEL "A" 208 3 79 1 1 1/2" 4 #1 #8 10 0.22 0.11% 3.48 1.67% 10,035 9,003 VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATED USING CEC CHAPTER 9, TABLE 9. FEEDER LENGTHS ESTIMATED FOR CALCS ONLY, NOT FOR BIDDING. FAULT VALUES BASED ON POINT TO POINT METHOD. 0 1 EXISTING SERVICE FEEDER 03 PROVIDE 2-1/2"C, WITH 4 #3/0 & 1 #6 GND LOAD VA 2080 (L.C.L.) @125 %: -\„ METER & MAIN NEMA 3R GND BUS PANEL "B" at&t STORE 04 1- 1/2 "C -4#1 & 1 #8 GND 360 CASH WRAP RECEPTACLES 720 CASH REGISTER RECEPTACLES 360 CASH REGISTER RECEPTACLES 360 CASH WRAP RECEPTACLES 360 CASH REGISTER RECEPTACLES 720 CASH REGISTER RECEPTACLES 540 SALES AREA RECEPTACLES 540 SALES AREA RECEPTACLES 500 PRINTER RECEPTACLE 720 SALES AREA RECEPTACLES 500 CABLE TV RECEPT. 500 EQUIPMENT RECEPTACLE 500 PRINTER RECEPTACLE 1400 SHOW WINDOW RECEPTACLE 1400 SHOW WINDOW RECEPTACLE 1500 SHOW WINDOW RECEPTACLE 1200 SHOW WINDOW RECEPTACLE 1200 _ SHOW W INDOW RECEPTACLE SPARE 2080 INSTAHOT PHASE PHASE TOTAL VA, PANEL TOTAL: CONNECTED MAIN CB 200A 3P MAIN CB 200A 3P ) 100A 3P LOAD DESCRIPTION (0) (SIGNS & SHOW WIND. @1. (2400) WATER HEATER © 125% (4160) (HVAC) @ 100 %: (0) GEN. RECEPT. DEMAND (2620) (LARGEST MOTOR) @125% (0) REMAINING @100% PANEL TOTAL W/ DEMAND: 0 3000 5200 SEE GENERAL , --- NOTE 4 OUTLETS M R 4 2 VA VA VA L 0 VA 2620 VA 0 VA 40014 VA 50834 VA (E) MAIN CB ) 125A 3P (E) SUB -PANEL "A" at&t STORE PANELBOARD 'B' MAIN: 120/208 VOLT / 3 PHASE / 4 WIRE MAIN BREAKER: 200 AMP BUS: 1 SECTION: SINGLE LUGS NEMA ENCLOSURE 1 BUS: 200 AMP GB /P 20/1 20/1 2011 20 /1 20/1 2 4 2011 3 2011 3 ... _. 20/1 A B C 15555 16955 16684 49194 VA U 3012 39 41 w 1 3 I B 5 C 7 A 9 B 11 C CB / P 2 20/1 4 20/1 6 20/1 8 20/1 10 20/1 12 20/1 13 A 14 2011 15 B 16 2011 18 20/1 20/1 20/1 2 20/1 17 C mm - - 4 2011 19 A 20 2 20/1 21 B 22 2 2011 23 C 1 241 2011 2 20/1 25 A 26 20/1 1 •J 2011 27 B 28 20/1 1 2011 29 C 30 20/1 1 2011 31 A 32 20/1 1 2011 33 B 34 2011 20/1 35 C 1 36 20/1 2011 37 A , 38 100/3 B 40 C 42 . - -- EXISTING PANEL LOAD 25% PER NEC 220 -35 (2): LESS LOAD REMOVED OUTLETS L 2 6 1 1 2 2 2 2 PANEL LOCATION: AREA SERVED: FED FROM 0 0 0 DEMAND LOAD ON SUB -PNL 4664 PLUS LOAD ADDED NEW PANEL LOAD. TELEPHONE BOARD RECEPT. TELEPHONE BOARD RECEPT. MDF ROOM RECEPT. BACK AREA RECEPT. WATER COOLER RECEPT. RESTROOM RECEPT. MANAGER OFFICE CCTV REC MANAGER OFFICE RECEPT. MANAGER OFFICE RECEPT. REFRIGERATOR RECEPT. MICROWAVE RECEPTACLE OPEN OFFICE RECEPTACLES SPARE SPARE SPARE _.. SPARE __... SPARE SPARE 1 (E) PANEL "A" STORE STORE 200 AMP SERVICE VA VA VA VA 50834 VA 55498 VA SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM LOAD DESCRIPTION MOUNTING: FLUSH A.I.C. RATING: 22K LOAD VA 1000 1000 1000 1080 500 180 500 500 500 800 500 360 8195 7655 7884 154.2 FULL LOAD AMPS GENERAL NOTES: 1. SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM IS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY THAT THE AMPACITY OF THE SERVICE DISCONNECT AND FEEDER ARE ADEQUATE FOR THE CAPACITY OF THE PANELBOARD SHOWN. 2. INSPECT AND RE- TORQUE EXISTING PANELBOARD FEEDER AND BUS TERMINATIONS PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. 3. FIELD VERIFY AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT AT SERVICE ENTRANCE WITH UTILITY COMPANY PRIOR TO PROCUREMENT OF ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT, AND VERIFY MINIMUM FAULT INTERRUPTING RATINGS OF TENANT ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. 4. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE BONDED AND GROUNDED AS REQUIRED PER APPLICABLE CODES AND JURISDICTIONS. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE FULLY RATED FOR THE MAXIMUM AVAILABLE SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LISTED FOR CONTINUOUS OPERATION AT 100% OF ITS RATING. 5. FIELD VERIFY FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND ASSOCIATED CONDUITS AND WIRE TO BE REMOVED. PROVIDE DEMOLITION AS REQUIRED PER FIELD CONDITIONS. 6. EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND CONDUITS MAY BE REUSED IF DEEMED SUITABLE BY THE CONTRACTOR. KEY NOTES: ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND /OR FEEDER SHOWN IS EXISTING. FIELD VERIFY FOR EQUIPMENT AND /OR FEEDER SIZE AND AIC RATING. 02 FIELD VERIFY FOR EXISTING ELECTRICAL SERVICE SIZE. REPLACE AS SHOWN IF DIFFERENT. COORDINATE WITH THE LOCAL ELECTRICAL UTILITY COMPANY AND THE LANDLORD PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. a PROVIDE ELECTRICAL PANEL AND CORRESPONDING FEEDER AS SHOWN ON SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM AND PANEL SCHEDULES BELOW. SEE SHEET E -102 FOR MORE INFORMATION. 0 REMOVE EXISTING FEEDER FROM EXISTING PANEL "A ". PROVIDE FEEDER AS SHOWN. SCALE: NONE MAIN: BUS: LOAD VA 5000 5000 (E) RTU 5000 - - - - -- REMAINING ©100% r PANEL TOTAL: CONNECTED WATER HEATER @ 125% PANEL TOTAL W/ DEMAND. L J 0 -2 -HOUR MANUAL OVERRIDE TIMER SWITCH (INTERMAIIC #FF2H OR APPROVED EQUAL) 120/208 VOLT 1 3 PHASE / 4 WIRE MAIN BREAKER: 125 AMP 1 SECTION SINGLE LUGS NEMA ENCLOSURE 1 BUS: 125 AMP LOAD DESCRIPTION 180 (E) RTU RECEPTACLE SPARE SPARE 500 (E I LOAD 500 (E) LOAD SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE 500 (E) FIRE ALARM PANEL 500 (E) SECURITY PANEL PHASE PHASE TOTAL VA: OR SPARE OR SPARE (L.C.L.) @125 %: (2454) (SIGNS & SHOW WIND. @1 (1200) (HVAC) @ 100 %: (0) GEN. RECEPT. DEMAND (1180) (0) (LARGEST MOTOR) @125% (15000) A 8195 23734 3068 1500 0 0 1180 18750 VA 3900 VA 28398 H N CIRC. A -22 OUTLETS R 8 E) PANELBOARD 'A' VA VA VA VA VA VA VA L 2- CHANNEL 365 DAY / HOLIDAY PROGRAMMABLE DIGITAL TIME CLOCK IN A NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE. (INTERMATIC ET70000C SERIES OR APPROVED EQUAL). CB 1P 60/3 20/1 20/1 2011 20/1 20/1 2011 2011 2011 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 C 7655 7884 L L r U 1 3 5 7 9 11 w 13 A 15 B 17 1 C 19 A 21 B 23 C 25 A 27 B 29 th 14 16 18 20 22 H N CIRC. A -20 U A 2 20/1 - B 4 ..._- 20/1 _.. C 6 20/1 A ._ 8- 20/1 7 B 10 20/1 7 C 12 20/1 4 24 20/1 2s _... -20/1 28 20/1 EXISTING PANEL LOAD: 25% PER NEC 220 -35 (2). LESS LOAD REMOVED: CB 1P 20/1 2 20/1 20/1 20/1 10 20/1 OUTLETS R C 30 2011 PANEL LOCATION: AREA SERVED: FED FROM: UNSWITCHED "HOT" TO NIGHT LIGHT AND EMERGENCY LIGHTING FIXTURES 0 0 0 M H N CIRC. A -14 1 (E) STREET SIGN 1200 (E) CANOPY LTS 1000 (E) CANOPY LTS 500 ' SALES AREA DAY LIGHTING 395 SALES AREA LIGHTING DISPLAY LIGHTING SALES AREA LIGHTING (TRACK) SPARE SPARE 1 BACK AREA LIGHTING 1 TIME CLOCK 1 STORE SIGNAGE SPARE SPARE SPARE STORE - - - -- -- - - -- STORE PANEL "B" VA VA VA DEMAND LOAD ON SUB -PNL: VA PLUS LOAD ADDED: 28398 VA NEW PANEL LOAD: 28398 VA LOAD DESCRIPTION 78.9 FULL LOAD AMPS H N CIRC. A -10 MOUNTING: FLUSH LOAD VA 455 684 300 620 200 1200 H N CIRC. A-8 UNSWITCHED "HOT" TO NIGHT LIGHT AND EMERGENCY UGHTING FIXTURES H _ N — CIRC. A -6 INTERIOR LIGHTING CONTACTOR CONTROL PANEL, IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE. PROVIDE POLES AS REQUIRED, REFER TO PANEL SCHEDULES. PROVIDE MINIMUM 1 SPARE TYPICAL LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAM ELECTRICAL CALCULATIONS SIGNAGE / EXTERIOR LIGHTING CONTACTOR CONTROL PANEL, IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE. PROVIDE POLES AS REQUIRED, REFER TO PANEL SCHEDULES. PROVIDE MINIMUM 1 SPARE GENERAL NOTES: 7. PROVIDE HACR TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR CIRCUITS SUPPLYING HVAC UNITS. 317 PANEL SCHEDULES AND LOAD CALCULATION SCALE: NONE SCALE: NONE 1. PANEL " A " IS EXISTING. FIELD VERIFY FOR PANEL TYPE, SIZE AND EXISTING LOADS TO REMAIN. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE CONDUIT AND WIRE TO EXISTING LOADS BEING DEMOLISHED. SEE ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR REQUIRED DEMOLITION. PROVIDE NEW CIRCUIT BREAKERS TO MATCH EXISTING CIRCUIT BREAKERS TYPE, MAKE AND AIC. REPLACE EXISTING DOUBLE CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH SINGLE 20 AMP, 1 POLE CIRCUIT BREAKERS. PROVIDE TYPED PANEL SCHEDULE. 2. CIRCUIT NUMBERS FOR NEW AND EXISTING LOADS ON EXISTING PANEL " A " ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. FIELD VERIFY FOR CORRECT CIRCUITING. ADJUST AS REQUIRED. 3. PROVIDE ELECTRICAL PANEL "B" AS SHOWN ON SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM AND PANEL SCHEDULE THIS SHEET. PROVIDE TYPED PANEL SCHEDULE. 4. ADJUST CIRCUITING ON PANEL TO MAINTAIN 10% PHASE IMBALANCE MAXIMUM. 5. SEE LIGHTING PLAN ON SHEET E -101 AND DETAIL THIS SHEET FOR LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS. ROUTE ALL LIGHTING CIRCUITS VIA LIGHTING CONTACTOR. 6. PROVIDE SWITCH RATED CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR CIRCUITS SUPPLYING EMERGENCY LIGHTING FIXTURES. 8. FIELD VERIFY AND COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR FOR POWER CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS TO HVAC EQUIPMENT, WATER HEATERS, EXHAUST FANS, ETC. VERIFY REQUIRED CIRCUIT BREAKER SIZE AND CORRESPONDING CONDUIT & WIRE SIZES PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. SEE SHEET E -102 FOR MORE INFORMATION. MAKE PROPER CORRECTIONS TO PANEL SCHEDULE IF REQUIRED. 4 COPYRIGHT 0 2009 CARTER & BURGESS, INC. at &t Carter:Burgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (71 4) 327 -1600 FAX: (714) 327 -1601 1 EXPIRES 08/26/09 NO. DATE ISSUES /REVISIONS - 06 -05 -08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT DESCRIPTION 6415 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 DESIGNED BY: RT CHECKED BY: BLD DRAWN BY: RT PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE: APPROVED BY: CNB 444017.011.037.0001 AS SHOWN ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULES, DETAILS AND SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM 1 3 JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED ABOVE CEILING / ..—JUNCTION ACCESSIBLE LOCATION. 10" r � a 00 '144 I I G.W.B. CEILING A.C.T. CEILING 0 1 3 O 1.25" 4.5" 1.25 . ° M_ —WEI 1.75" o N, —. —�f `��mi. VINE war 4.75" _-T =_ - . =■Il i. - 0 WIREMOLD 0 EQUIPMENT 0 a© GENERAL NOTES: 4 CASEWORK S 4S, CD o 0 O COUNTER TOP SORBETTI UPRIGHT SLIDER CASHWRAP CASEWORK SORBETTI UPRIGHT R CASHWRAP DETAIL GENERAL NOTES: - L CASHWRAP DETAIL GENERAL NOTES: 0 ROUTE LOW VOLTAGE CABLING WITHIN SORBETTI UPRIGHT SLIDER DOWN TO COUNTER TOP AND INTO LOW VOLTAGE SECTION OF WIREMOLD MOUNTED BENEATH COUNTER. 02 MC CABLE ROUTED FROM JUNCTION BOX IN CEILING, WITHIN THE SORBETTI UPRIGHT, TO WIREMOLD MOUNTED BENEATH COUNTER. 3 O 45' MC CONNECTOR BETWEEN MC CABLE AND WIREMOLD. 04 WIREMOLD BASE WITH COVER. 05 WIREMOLD. © WIREMOLD DUPLEX RECEPTACLE DEVICE PLATE. 07 CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CONDUITS AND SURFACE MOUNTED JUNCTION BOXES FOR RECEPTACLES AND TELECOM OUTLETS AS SHOWN ON POWER PLAN. 01 WIREMOLD V4000 B/C BASE WITH COVER. 02 V4010B END FITTING. 03 V4048B DUPLEX RECEPTACLE. 4 G40DpD DIVIDER. O 0 JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED ABOVE CEILING AT ACCESSIBLE LOCATION. O LOW VOLTAGE CABLING ROUTED FROM CEILING SPACE, WITHIN THE SORBETTI UPRIGHT SLIDER, DOWN INTO WIREMOLD MOUNTED BENEATH COUNTER. 0 MC CABLE ROUTED FROM JUNCTION BOX IN CEILING, WITHIN THE SORBETTI UPRIGHT, INTO WIREMOLD MOUNTED BENEATH COUNTER. Q NOT USED. O CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CONDUITS AND SURFACE MOUNTED JUNCTION BOXES FOR RECEPTACLES AND TELECOM OUTLETS AS SHOWN ON POWER PLAN. CASHWRAP DETAIL - ELEVATION SCALE: 3 CASHWRAP DETAIL - PERSPECTIVE SCALE: 2 WIREMOLD EQUIPMENT DETAIL SCALE: NTS NTS NTS GROUND BOND TO G G ROU B PROVIDE SEPARATE NEUTRAL FOR EACH CIRCUIT. ,.......---OUTLET BOX CONVENTIONAL GROUND TO STRAP -L.. II IG GROUND TO viii , ,iY 0 IG TERMINAL 0 0 0 0 TYPICAL WIRE CONNECTORS RACEWAYS, CABLE, ETC LEADS DEVICE SINGLE TO NOTE: MOUNTING O HEIGHT BOTTOM STROBE LENS ALL LOW VOLTAGE CABLING MUST BE IN CONDUIT ABOVE T —GRID. / `` d o co IV LWAL HORN/STROBE MOUNTED UGHT SWITCHES FIRE ALARM PULL STATION _ WALL OUTLETS MOUNTED T YPICAL IG OUTLET WIRING (DIAGRAMMATIC) SCALE: 4 NTS GROUND BOND IF METAL BOX CONVENTIONAL GROUND TO WIRING _ BOX 4: a o U ® �T HORIZ. ABOVE COUNTERS. I FIELD VERIFY . WALL OUTLETS ' �0 u. d . IN RESTROOMS DEVICE TYP. WIRE CONNECTORS RECEPTACLES AND DATA/VOICE RACEWAYS, ' SINGLE TO . 1) CABLE, ETC ,r LEADS DEVICE 0 3 1 7 4,7,,,, / /7 FINISHED FLOOR TYPICAL DEVICE MOUNTING DETAIL SCALE: 6 TYPICAL OUTLET WIRING SCALE: (DIAGRAMMATIC) NTS 5 NTS Carter::Burgess Carter & Burgess, Inc. 4 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 800 Santa Ana, California 92707 TEL: (714) 327-1600 FAX: (714) 327 -1601 - 06- 05-08 ISSUE FOR PERMIT NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 16415 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 DESIGNED BY: RT CHECKED BY: BLD DRAWN BY: RT PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE: ELECTRICAL DETAILS COPYRIGHT 0 2008 CARTER & BURGESS. INC. at &t 1 EXPIRES 08/26/09 ISSUES /REVISIONS APPROVED BY: CNB 444017.011.037.0001 NONE E -104